Agilent Technologies 3499 A, B, C Switch/Control System User’s Manual

Agilent 3499A/B/C
Switch / Control System
User’s Manual
© Copyright Agilent Technologies, Inc.
1999-2012
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means
(including electronic storage and
retrieval or translation into a foreign
language) without prior agreement 
and written consent from Agilent 
Technologies as governed by the United
States and international copyright laws.
Manual Part Number
03499-90017
Revision
Revision F, October 2012
Revision E, March 2009
Revision D, November 2002
Revision C, April 2002
Revision B, April 2000
Revision A, September 1999
Printed in Malaysia
Agilent Technologies, Inc.
815 14th Street S.W.
Loveland, Colorado 80537 U.S.A.
Assistance
Product maintenance agreements and
other customer assistance agreements
are available for Agilent Technologies
products. For assistance, contact your
nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and
Service Office. Further information is
available on the Agilent web site at
www.agilent.com/find/assist.
Trademark Information
Microsoft® and Windows® are U.S. 
registered trademarks of Microsoft 
Corporation. All other brand and 
product names are trademarks or 
registered trademarks of their 
respective companies.
Certification
Agilent Technologies certifies that this
product met its published specifications
at the time of shipment from the factory.
Agilent Technologies further certifies
that its calibration measurements are
traceable to the United States National
Institute of Standards and Technology,
to the extent allowed by that organization's calibration facility, and to the
calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members.
Warranty
Safety Notices
The material contained in this 
document is provided “as is,” and is
subject to being changed, without
notice, in future editions. Further,
to the maximum extent permitted
by applicable law, Agilent disclaims
all warranties, either express or
implied with regard to this manual
and any information contained
herein, including but not limited to
the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. Agilent shall
not be liable for errors or for 
incidental or consequential 
damages in connection with the
furnishing, use, or performance of
this document or any information
contained herein. Should Agilent
and the user have a separate 
written agreement with warranty
terms covering the material in this
document that conflict with these
terms, the warranty terms in the
separate agreement will control.
Do not install substitute parts or 
perform any unauthorized modification
to the product. Return the product to an
Agilent Technologies Sales and Service
Office for service and repair to ensure
that safety features are maintained.
Technologies Licenses
The hardware and/or software described
in this document are furnished under 
a license and may be used or copied
only in accordance with the terms of
such license.
WARNING
A WARNING notice denotes a hazard. 
It calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the like that, if not
correctly performed or adhered to, 
could result in personal injury or death.
Do not proceed beyond a WARNING
notice until the indicated conditions are
fully understood and met.
CAUTION
A CAUTION notice denotes a hazard. 
It calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the like that, if not
correctly performed or adhered to, 
could result in damage to the product or
loss of important data. Do not proceed
beyond a CAUTION notice until the 
indicated conditions are fully understood
and met.
Restricted Rights Legend
If software is for use in the performance
of a U.S. Government prime contract or
subcontract, Software is delivered and
licensed as “Commercial computer software” as defined in DFAR 252.227-7014
(June 1995), or as a “commercial item”
as defined in FAR 2.101(a) or as
“Restricted computer software” as
defined in FAR 52.227-19 (June 1987) 
or any equivalent agency regulation or 
contract clause. Use, duplication or 
disclosure of Software is subject to 
Agilent Technologies’ standard commercial license terms, and non-DOD
Departments and Agencies of the U.S.
Government will receive no greater 
than Restricted Rights as defined in
FAR 52.227-19(c)(1-2) (June 1987). 
U.S. Government users will receive no
greater than Limited Rights as defined
in FAR 52.227-14 (June 1987) or DFAR
252.227-7015 (b)(2) (November 1995), 
as applicable in any technical data.
Earth ground symbol.
Chassis ground symbol.
WARNING
Only qualified, service-trained personnel who are aware of the hazards
involved should remove the cover from
the instrument.
WARNING
For continued protection against fire,
replace the line fuse only with a fuse 
of the specified type and rating.
User’s Guide
Publication Number 03499-90017
Revision A, September 1999
Revision B, April 2000
Revision C, April 2002
Revision D, November 2002
Revision E, March 2009
Revision F, October 2012
© Copyright Agilent Technologies, Inc. 1999-2012
Agilent 3499A/B/C
Switch/Control System
Agilent 3499A/B/C at a Glance
The Agilent Technologies 3499A/B/C Switch/Control System provides a
convenient mechanical and programming environment for a variety of
plug-in modules. With appropriate plug-in modules, the Switch/Control
System provides high density/high speed switching and digital I/O
capability.
Switch/Control System Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
Intuitive and easy-to-use user interface
•
•
Relay cycle count information for preventive maintenance
GPIB (IEEE 488) or RS-232 interface control
External triggering capability
Built-in 4-bit digital I/O port
Store and recall up to 50 customized instrument setups
SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)
compatibility
Downloadable firmware upgrades

Agilent 3499A Features
•
•
Five plug-in slots
Full rack width

Agilent 3499B Features
•
•
Two plug-in slots
Half rack width

Agilent 3499C Features
•
•
Nine plug-in slots
Full rack width

Note: Unless otherwise indicated, this manual applies to all Serial Numbers.
2
Plug-in Modules at a Glance
The Agilent 3499A/B/C mainframes support a variety of plug-in modules
to make test system configuration easy. Each module is described in
more detail later in this manual.
Multiplexer Modules
N2260A 40-Channel MUX Module (armature relays)
N2266A 40-Channel MUX Module (reed relays)
N2270A 10-Channel High Voltage MUX Module
44470A 10-Channel MUX Module
44470D 20-Channel MUX Module
General Purpose Relay Modules
N2261A 40-Channel GP Relay Module
N2267A 8-Channel High Current GP Module
44471A 10-Channel GP Relay Module
44471D 20-Channel GP Relay Module
44477A 7-Channel Form-C Relay Module
Matrix Modules
N2262A 4 x 8 Matrix Module
44473A 4 x 4 Matrix Module
High Frequency Switching Modules
N2268A 50 3.0 GHz Dual 4-to-1 MUX Module
N2272A 1 GHz RF 1-to-9 MUX Module
N2276A/B Dual 1-to-6 (4) Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module
44472A Dual 4-Channel VHF Switch Module
44478A/B 50/751.3GHz Multiplexer
44476A 3-Channel 18 GHz Switch Module
44476B 2-Channel Microwave Switch Module
Optical Switch Modules
N2280A Optical Switch Quad 1-to-2 MUX Module
N2281A Optical Switch Dual 1-to-4 MUX Module
N2282A Optical Switch 1-to-8 MUX Module
Digital I/O Modules
N2263A 32-Bit Digital I/O Module
44474A 16-Bit Digital I/O Module
Multifunction/Special Purpose Modules
N2264A 12-Channel GP & 3-Channel High-current GP & 16-Bit Digital I/O 
N2265A 4 x 4 Matrix & 16-Bit Digital I/O Module
44475A Breadboard Module
3
The Front Panel at a Glance
1. Power On/Standby
8. Scan Keys (see page 85)
2. Reset Module/Instrument
9. Main Menu
3. Shift/Local
10. Open/Close Relay Channels
4. Store/Recall Instrument State
11. Enter a Value/Confirm Selection
5. Monitor Channel/Port/Module
12. Read/Write Digital I/O Ports
6. View Menu
13. Knob
7. Mode Menu
14. Navigation Arrow Keys
Note
The front panel shown above is the Agilent 3499B. The 3499A and 3499C
front panels are similar and have identical functionality.
4
The Display at a Glance
Channel/Slot Number
Annunciators
The display is divided into several areas. The channel and slot number is
always displayed on the right corner of the display. The main area,
which is in the center of the display, is primarily used to display channel
status (open or closed), information messages, menu items, prompt information, error messages, and so on. Around the display are annunciators
to indicate various states of the instrument operation. The annunciators
are summarized below.
Annunciator
Indication
SCAN
Scan is initiated.
MON
Instrument is in monitor mode.
VIEW
Scan list, errors or relay cycle counts are being viewed.
CONFIG
Any configuration key has been pressed.
*
Instrument is advancing a scan step.
ADRS
Instrument is active on the remote interface.
RMT
Instrument is in remote mode.
ERROR
Error queue is not empty.
EXT
Scan is waiting for external trigger source.
SHIFT
Shift key has been pressed.
Other annunciators in the display are not used in the Agilent 3499A/B/C
system.
5
The Rear Panel at a Glance
The figure below shows the Agilent 3499A rear panel.
Slot 1
Slot 4
Slot 2
Slot 5
Slot 3
Slot 0
Control Module
GPIB Connector
RS-232 Connector
Power Input
Mini DIN Connector
The figure below shows the Agilent 3499B rear panel.
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 0
Control Module
GPIB Connector
RS-232 Connector
Power Input
Mini DIN Connector
6
The figure below shows the Agilent 3499C rear panel. 
Option FP1 (1-slot) and FP2 (2-slot) filler panels can be ordered to cover
any unused slots.
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Mini DIN Connector
Slot 6
Slot 7
(2 slot width)
Slot 8
(3 slot width)
Slot 9
(3 slot width)
Slot 0
Control Module
GPIB Connector
WARNING
RS-232 Connector
Power Input
For protection from electrical shock, the power cord ground must not be
defeated.
The Mini DIN Connector
The rear panel mini DIN connector is used to make connections to
external triggers and the built-in digital I/O port. An Agilent N2289A
cable (mini DIN to D9) can be ordered to assist connections to external
devices. The figure below shows the pins used in the mini DIN connector.
7
In This Book
Quick Start Chapter 1 prepares the switch/control system for use and
helps you get familiar with a few of its front-panel features.
Front-Panel Menu Operation Chapter 2 introduces you to the frontpanel menu and describes some of the switch/control system’s menu
features.
System Overview Chapter 3 gives an overview of a switch/control
system, describes how parts of the system work together, and describes
the channel addressing scheme used.
Features and Functions Chapter 4 gives a detailed description of the
switch/control system’s capabilities and operation. This chapter is useful
for operating the switch/control system from the front panel or the remote
interface.
Remote Interface Reference Chapter 5 contains a SCPI language
reference used to program the switch/control system over a remote
interface.
Error Messages Chapter 6 lists the error messages that may appear as
you are working with the instrument.
Plug-in Modules Chapter 7 gives detailed information for each plug-in
module. Each module and its wiring is described. Additionally, wiring
information for terminal blocks, crimp-and-insert connections, BNC and
SMA connections, and special cables is included.
Application Programs Chapter 8 contains several remote interface
application programs to help you develop programs for your switch/
control system.
Specifications Chapter 9 lists the technical specifications for the
mainframe and plug-in modules.
If you have questions relating to the operation of the Agilent 3499A/B/C,
call 1-800-452-4844 in the United States, or contact your nearest Agilent
Technologies Sales Office. 

If your 3499A/B/C fails within one year of purchase, Agilent will either
repair or replace it free of charge. Call 1-877-447-7278 in the United
States (and ask for “Agilent Express”) or contact your local Agilent
Technologies Sales Office.
8
Contents
Chapter 1 Quick Start 13
To Prepare the Instrument for Use 15
To Install a Module in the 3499A/B/C 17
Basic Operation 19
To Rack Mount the 3499A/B/C 23
Filler Panels 26
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation 27
Contents
To Power On the Instrument 29
To Monitor a Channel or a Slot 29
To Use a Digital I/O Port 31
To View Instrument Errors 36
Scanning Operation 38
To Pair Two Modules Together 41
To Configure for External Trigger 42
To Configure the Power-on State 44
To Configure the Remote Interface 46
To Perform a Self-test 51
To Query the Firmware Revision 52
To Query the Serial Number 53
Local/Remote Control 54
Chapter 3 System Overview 55
Agilent 3499A/B/C Switch/Control System 57
Mainframes Overview 58
Firmware and Control Module Description 59
Plug-in Modules Overview 61
Channel and Slot Addressing 70
Factory Default and Reset States 74
9
Contents
Chapter 4 Features and Functions 77
Contents
SCPI Language Conventions 79
Monitoring a Channel or a Slot 80
Switching a Relay Channel 82
Configuring a Multiplexer Module 83
Parallel Switching 84
Scanning 85
Digital I/O Operation 95
State Storage 106
Error Conditions 108
Self-Test 109
Display Control 110
Relay Cycle Counts 111
To Select the System Mode 112
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference 113
SCPI Command Syntax 115
3499A/B/C SCPI Alphabetical Reference 116
3499A/B/C SCPI Commands Functionally Grouped 122
Switch Commands 127
Specific Plug-in Module Commands 129
Scanning Commands 132
Digital I/O Commands 139
State Storage Commands 147
Status System Commands 148
System Information Commands 153
System-Level Control Commands 156
RS-232 Commands 160
About the SCPI Language 161
Chapter 6 Error Messages 165
Execution Errors 167
Instrument Errors 170
Self-Test Errors 172
10
Contents
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules 173
4
Contents
N2260A 40-Channel MUX Module 176
N2261A 40-Channel GP Relay Module 182
N2262A 4 x 8 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module 185
N2263A 32-bit Digital I/O Module 188
N2264A Multifunction Module 192
N2265A Multifunction Module 196
N2266A 40-Channel MUX Module 200
N2267A 8-Channel High Current GP Module 206
N2268A 50 3.0 GHz Dual 1-to-4 MUX Module 210
N2270A 10-Channel High Voltage MUX Module 212
N2272A 1 GHz RF 1-to-9 MUX Module 214
N2276A Dual 1-to-6(4) Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module 217
N2276B Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module 221
N2280A Quadruple 1-to-2 Optical Switch Module 225
N2281A Dual 1-to-4 Optical Switch Module 226
N2282A 1-to-8 Optical Switch Module 228
44470A 10-Channel MUX Module 230
44470D 20-Channel MUX Module 233
44471A 10-Channel GP Relay Module 236
44471D 20-Channel GP Relay Module 239
44472A Dual 4-Channel VHF Switch Module 242
44473A 4 x 4 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module 245
44474A 16-Bit Digital I/O Module 248
44475A Breadboard Module 251
44476A Microwave Switch Module 257
44476B Microwave Switch Module 260
44477A Form-C Relay Module 265
44478A/B 1.3 GHz Dual 4-to-1 MUX Modules 267
Protection Networks 272
Terminals and Connections Information 275
Chapter 8 Application Programs 289
Visual C++ Example Program 291
Visual BASIC Example Program 293
VB.net Example Program 296
BASIC Example Program 298
11
Contents
Contents
Chapter 9 Specifications 299
3499A/B/C Mainframe 301
N2260A 40-Channel MUX Module 303
N2261A 40-Channel GP Relay Module 305
N2262A 4 x 8 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module 307
N2263A 32-bit Digital I/O Module 309
N2264A Multifunction Module 310
N2265A Multifunction Module 313
N2266A 40-Channel MUX Module 315
N2267A 8-Channel High Current GP Module 317
N2268A 50 3.0 GHz Dual 1-to-4 MUX Module 319
N2270A 10-Channel High Voltage MUX Module 321
N2272A 1 GHz RF 1-to-9 MUX Module 323
N2276A Dual 1-to-6(4) Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module 325
N2276B Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module 325
N2280A Quadruple 1-to-2 Optical Switch Module 326
N2281A Dual 1-to-4 Optical Switch Module 327
N2282A 1-to-8 Optical Switch Module 328
44470A 10-Channel MUX Module 329
44470D 20-Channel MUX Module 331
44471A 10-Channel GP Relay Module 333
44471D 20-Channel GP Relay Module 335
44472A Dual 4-Channel VHF Switch Module 337
44473A 4 x 4 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module 339
44474A 16-Bit Digital I/O Module 341
44475A Breadboard Module 342
44476A Microwave Switch Module 344
44476B Microwave Switch Module 344
44477A Form-C Relay Module 345
44478A/B 1.3 GHz Dual 4-to-1 MUX Modules 347
Index 349
12
1
1
Quick Start
Quick Start
1
This chapter describes the procedure to install the plug-in modules into
an Agilent 3499A/B/C mainframe and mount the mainframe onto a
system rack. The basic operations of the Agilent 3499A/B/C Switch/
Control System is also described. The chapter contents include:
•
•
•
•
14
To Prepare the Instrument for Use, on page 15
To Install a Module in the 3499A/B/C, on page 17
Basic Operation, on page 19
To Rack Mount the 3499A/B/C, on page 23
Chapter 1 Quick Start
To Prepare the Instrument for Use
1
To Prepare the Instrument for Use
1 Check the list of supplied items
Verify that you have received the following items with your 
Agilent 3499A/B/C mainframe:
?
One power cord;
?
This User’s Manual;
?
One Quick Reference Guide;
?
One Tie Down Clip 03499-21002 (for Agilent 3499B only);
?
Any plug-in modules that you ordered are delivered in separate
shipping containers.
4
2 Connect the power cord and turn on the instrument
1. Connect the 3499A/B/C to an AC power source with the supplied
power cord.
2. Push the Power switch located on the lower left side of the front
panel.
3. On power-up, every segment in the display will light up briefly,
including all annunciators. Following this “starburst” display, the
internal self-test will begin.
4. If the self-test passes1, the default system mode and the GPIB
address are displayed, together with a “beep” sound. Then the display
shows the instrument model number and the active slot (slot 0).
SCPI GPIB 9
3499
1
0
If the self-test failed, the failure will be displayed on the front panel. For
details of all self-test errors, refer to “Error Messages” starting on page
165.
15
Chapter 1 Quick Start
To Prepare the Instrument for Use
1
When shipped from the factory, the SCPI mode and the GPIB interface
address of “9” are used. Slot 0 refers to the built-in controller board of the
switch/control system.
If the Instrument Does Not Turn On
1. Verify that the power cord is firmly plugged into the power receptacle
on the rear panel of the 3499A/B/C.
2. Make sure that the power source the 3499A/B/C is plugged into is
energized.
3. Verify that the 3499A/B/C is turned on.
Note
If the 3499A/B/C DOES NOT turn on after you perform the above
procedure, contact your nearest Agilent Service Center (see page 8).
16
Chapter 1 Quick Start
To Install a Module in the 3499A/B/C
1
To Install a Module in the 3499A/B/C
The plug-in modules you ordered were not installed in the mainframe.
The figure on page 18 shows how to install a plug-in module into the
3499B mainframe. Other mainframes use similar procedures.
WARNING
Disconnect the power cord from the rear panel of the mainframe prior to
4
installing or removing any modules.
Caution
Use anti-static procedures when configuring, installing or removing any
plug-in modules. To prevent contamination to the modules that could
degrade performance, handle the modules by the side edges or shields
only. Do not touch the board surfaces or components.
Each plug-in module may have terminal block(s) and/or the cables for
wiring to external circuits. These terminations are also shipped
separately.
For more details about terminal blocks, cables, and connections, see
“Terminals and Connections Information” on page 275.
Caution
In order to stay within the 20W power limit set for convection cooling, no
more than three (3) N2266A 40-Channel MUX Modules should be
installed in an Agilent 3499A mainframe; the remaining two slots must
remain empty. Other module combinations are acceptable; for example,
two N2266A MUX modules plus any combination of other Agilent
modules is permissible. This limitation does not apply to the 3499B or
3499C mainframes.
Module Removal
To remove a plug-in module from the Agilent 3499A/B/C mainframe,
reverse the procedures shown on page 18.
17
1
STEP 2
STEP 1
1. Face the mainframe rear panel toward you.
2. Select a slot in which the module is to be
installed.
1. Hold the sides of the module, component side
down, by the metal shields.
2. Insert the module into the slot guides and slide
the module toward the front of the instrument.
3. Push firmly until the module “snaps” into place.
4. Push both plastic levers inward to lock the
module.
STEP 3 (for modules with terminal blocks)
STEP 4 (for modules with terminal blocks)
1. Wire the screw terminal block (module
dependent, refer to chapter 7 for details).
2. Attach the screw terminal block to the plug-in
module.
1. Push firmly until the terminal block “snaps” into
place.
2. Secure the screw terminal block with the two
screws (Torque < 8 in-lbs).
Module installation
18
Chapter 1 Quick Start
Basic Operation
1
Basic Operation
An Agilent 3499A/B/C Switch/Control System can be easily operated
from the front-panel, or programmed with SCPI commands over the
remote interface.
The following sections are only intended to show the basic front-panel
operation. For detailed front-panel operation, refer to the “Front-Panel4
Operation” chapter on page 27. For more information about
programming the instrument, refer to the “Remote Interface Reference”
chapter on page 113.
Channel Addressing
A channel refers to an individual relay on a switching module, or an
individual bit/port on a digital I/O module. The channel address is in the
form of snn, where s represents slot number and nn represents a channel
number.
For all mainframes, slot 0 refers to the 3499 controller board. Valid slot
numbers are:
3499A slots 0 through 5
3499B slots 0 through 2
3499C slots 0 through 9
The channel number, nn, is plug-in module dependent. For additional
information about channel numbers of individual plug-in modules, refer
to the table beginning on page 70.
19
Chapter 1 Quick Start
Basic Operation
1
To Select a Slot and Channel
When the instrument is first turned on, the display shows the model
number and the slot number of the controller board.
3499
0
Use the knob to select a channel on the active slot. For example, with the
display shown above, turning the knob to the right will select the first of
the individual built-in digital I/O ports.
DIN
090
The “DIN” indicates the port is set for a digital input operation. As the
knob is turned, the additional ports are displayed followed by any
installed plug-in modules.
If you have installed one or more plug-in modules, you can select the
module by pressing the right arrow key. For example, if an N2260A (40channel MUX module) is installed in slot 1, pressing the right arrow key
will show the module name and slot number.
N2260A
1
Turning the knob will then step through the individual channels on that
module.
MUX
20
OPEN
100
Chapter 1 Quick Start
Basic Operation
1
To Open or Close a Channel
When a channel is selected, you can open or close the channel using the
front panel keys. For example, with an N2260A 40-channel MUX
installed in slot 1, select channel 00 as described on the previous page.
MUX
OPEN
100

Press the CLOSE key to close the channel.
MUX
4
CLOSED 100

Press the OPEN key to open the channel
MUX
OPEN
100
In this manner, you can select and control as many channels as you need.
The N2260A has 40 channels numbered 0 through 39 (in slot 1, 100
through 139). You may also select additional plug-in modules and
channels by turning the knob.
21
Chapter 1 Quick Start
Basic Operation
1
To Open All Channels on a Module
You can open individual channels on a module one at a time as described
above. There are times, however, when it would be more expedient to
open all channels on a module at once.
Use the arrow keys to select the module to work with. You cannot have
an individual channel selected for this operation. For example, select the
module in slot 1 (using the N2260A as an example) to show a display
similar to this:
N2260A
1
Press and hold the card reset key. When you first press the key, the
display shows:
HOLD TO RESET
When the card has been reset, the display briefly shows:
RESET CARD
and then returns to:
N2260A
1
To Reset All Modules
You can reset all channels on all modules in the mainframe at once.
Press the shift key and then press and hold the reset key. The display
shows:
HOLD TO RESET
When the mainframe has been reset, the display will briefly show the
reset and then return to the slot or channel display.
RESET . . .
22
Chapter 1 Quick Start
To Rack Mount the 3499A/B/C
1
To Rack Mount the 3499A/B/C
You can mount the Agilent 3499A/B/C on a standard 19-inch EIA rack
cabinet with the optional rack-mounting kits. The instructions and
mounting hardware are included with each rack-mounting kit.
Agilent 3499A
To rack mount a 3499A, the full-rack-width mainframe, order either:
•
•
4
Rack-mount kit with handles, part number 5183-7170, or
Rack-mount kit without handles, part number 5183-7171.
3499A
SWITCH/CONTROL SYSTEM
To Rack Mount an Agilent 3499A
23
Chapter 1 Quick Start
To Rack Mount the 3499A/B/C
1
Agilent 3499B
To rack mount a single 3499B, order either:
•
Adapter kit, part number 5183-7172 
(includes the flange and filler panel).
Flange
Filler Panel
3499B
SWITCH/CONTROL SYSTEM
To Rack Mount a Single Agilent 3499B with Adapter kit 5183-7172
OR
•
•
•
A Support Shelf, part number 5063-9255,
A slide kit, part number 1494-0015,
And a filler panel, part number 5002-3999.
To Rack Mount a Single Agilent 3499B on a support shelf
24
Chapter 1 Quick Start
To Rack Mount the 3499A/B/C
1
To rack mount two Agilent 3499B’s side-by-side (or any System II
instrument next to an Agilent 3499B), order:
•
•
A Support Shelf, part number 5063-9255,
And a slide kit, part number 1494-0015.
4
To Rack Mount Two Agilent 3499B’s Side-by-side
25
Chapter 1 Quick Start
Filler Panels
1
Agilent 3499C
To rack mount an Agilent 3499C, order either:
•
•
Adapter kit without handles, part number 5063-9216, or
Adapter kit with handles, part number 5063-9223.
Adapter kit
To Rack Mount an Agilent 3499C
Filler Panels
Order filler panels to cover any unused slots in an Agilent 3499A/B/C.
•
•
26
1-slot filler panel, part number 03499-00023 (option FP1)
2-slot filler panel, part number 03499-00024 (option FP2)
2
2
Front-Panel Operation
Front-Panel Operation
2
The Agilent 3499A/B/C mainframes all operate the same from the frontpanel. This chapter does not give a detailed description of every possible
front-panel operation. It does, however, give you a good overview of the
front-panel menus and front-panel keys. See the “Features and
Functions” chapter on page 77 for additional discussions of the
instrument’s capabilities and operation. This chapter contents include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
To Power On the Instrument, on page 29
To Monitor a Channel or a Slot, on page 29
To Use a Digital I/O Port, on page 31
To View Instrument Errors, on page 36
Scanning Operation, on page 38
To Pair Two Modules Together, on page 41
To Configure for External Trigger, on page 42
To Configure the Power-on State, on page 44
To Configure the Remote Interface, on page 46
To Perform a Self-test, on page 51
To Query the Firmware Revision, on page 52
To Query the Serial Number, on page 53
Local/Remote Control, on page 54
The following conventions are used for the front-panel operation.
•
All keys on the front-panel keyboard are expressed in bold font and
normally associated with a “press”. For example, press Mon.
•
All the front panel display annunciators are expressed in bold font
followed by an “annunciator”. For example, MON annunciator.
•
The information shown on the front panel display is enclosed within a
pair of quotation marks.
28
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Power On the Instrument
To Power On the Instrument
To power on the instrument, press the power switch on the front panel.
If the instrument is powered up for the first time, the instrument will
use the factory default settings as shown on page 74. Otherwise, the
instrument will power on to the state specified. Refer to "To Configure
the Power-on State", on page 44 for more details.
4
To Monitor a Channel or a Slot
You can continuously monitor the current status of a particular
switching channel, a digital I/O port, or an entire plug-in module.
Monitoring from the front panel is especially useful when developing and
debugging remote interface commands.
1. Press the monitor key, the MON annunciator lights up to indicate the
instrument is in the monitoring state.
2. Select the slot or the channel/port to be monitored. The displayed
information depends on the selected module type. Typical displays
are shown in the table on page 81.
3. If only part of the channel status on the module can be displayed at
one time, press Enter to display the next part. 

For multiplexer modules and GP Relay modules, 10 channels can be
displayed at one time; for matrix modules, one Row or one Column
can be displayed at one time; for digital I/O modules, two 8-bit ports
can be displayed at one time. For multifunction modules, the first
function on the module is displayed, then the next.
4. Press the monitor key again to end monitoring (the MON
annunciator turns off).
Note
The built-in digital I/O bits/port (on the controller module) can be
monitored either individually as bit channels (numbered 091 through
094) or as a 4-bit port (numbered 090). However, the individual bit
channels on a digital I/O or multifunction module (with a DIO function)
cannot be monitored.
29
2
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Monitor a Channel or a Slot
.
2
Display
Description
1:0,,,,,,6,,,9,
2
ROW 3:,1,,3,,,6,7
3
0;,,3,COL 3,
3
00:H255
DIO
DOUT
L254.
4
12
090
0
091
ROW 0:,1,,3,
5
00:H255
5
L254.
30
The display for a multiplexer or a GP relay module. This
display indicates that the monitored module is in Slot 2 and
channels 10, 16, and 19 are closed.
The display for a matrix module. The top is the row
information, indicating that the relays on Row 3, Columns 1, 3,
6 and 7 of the module (in Slot 3) are closed. The lower display
is the column information, indicating that relays on column 3,
row 0 and 3 are closed.
The display for a digital I/O module. The first 2 digits on the left
(“00” in this case) represents the “L” 8-bit port address. Adding
one to this value, the “H” 8-bit port address is obtained. Data
with a trailing decimal point indicates that the last operation on
that port was a WRITE, data without a trailing decimal point
indicates that the last operation on that port was a READ. This
display shows that the data last read from Port 401 is 255 and
the data last written to Port 400 is 254.
The top display is for the built-in digital I/O Port 090 (control
module) and the data from the last operation.
The lower display indicates that data last written to the bit
channel 091 is 0.
For a multifunction module, the first function on the module is
displayed, then the next. This display is an example of a
multifunction module with matrix and DIO functions (in slot 5).
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Use a Digital I/O Port
To Use a Digital I/O Port
2
You can work with a digital I/O module as a port (all eight bits) or as
individual bits.
Reading a Digital I/O Port
You can read data from the built-in 4-bit digital I/O port, or any one of 4
the 8-bit ports on a digital I/O or multifunction module (with a DIO
function). You can read the entire port (all bits) when you select the slot
(for example, the built-in port is channel 090). Alternately, you can read
an individual bit by selecting the channel (for example the first bit in the
built-in port is channel 091).
Perform the following procedure to read from a port:
1. Select a digital I/O port. Use the knob to select the slot and channel
number. The channel number is in the form of snn, where s is the slot
number and nn is the channel number.
2. Read the data read from the selected port. For example, the display
below shows the data read from port 401.
DIN
255 401
DIN
11111111 401
Decimal format
(default)
Binary format
The data display format of individual 8-bit ports can be specified
either in binary or decimal formats (as described on page 34). Once
specified, the format applies to all input and output operations on the
same port.
31
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Use a Digital I/O Port
Writing to a Digital I/O Port
You can write data to the built-in digital I/O port (numbered 090) or to
one of the built-in digital I/O port bits (numbered 091 through 094), or
any one of the 8-bit ports on a digital I/O or multifunction module (with a
DIO function). To write to a port:
2
1. Select a digital I/O port. Use the knob to select the slot and channel
number. The channel number is in the form of snn, where s is the slot
number and nn is the channel number. In the display, “DIN”
indicates that the last operation on the port was a READ, and
“DOUT”, a WRITE.
DIN
401
2. Press the Write key. “DOUT” is displayed to indicate the port is now
an output port. The current port value is displayed.
DOUT
255 401
3. Edit the value. Use the arrow keys to select the to-be-edited bit (the
digit to be edited is set to half bright in the display).


Turn the knob to modify the value. Use the arrow keys to select the
next digit and the knob to modify its value.
DOUT
254 401
4. When the value is the one desired, press Enter to output the data to
the selected port.
5. Press Write again to cancel the current write operation.
Note
Data display format of individual 8-bit ports can be specified either in
binary or decimal values (refer to the procedure on page 34). Once
specified, the format applies to all input and output operations on the
same port.
32
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Use a Digital I/O Port
To Configure a Digital I/O Module
Digital I/O modules can be configured for handshake modes and control
line, flag line, and I/O line polarity. Use the Mode menu to configure
digital I/O parameters. See “Digital I/O Operation” on page 95 for
detailed descriptions of the operating modes. Only plug-in modules can
be configured this way, the built-in digital I/O port (control module) can
only be configured at the port level (see page 34).
4
The following procedure configures a plug-in digital I/O module to use a
two line digital handshake mode (mode 5) for data transfers.
1. Select the slot in which a digital I/O or multifunction module is
installed. The channel number is in the form of snn, where s is the
slot number and nn is the channel number.
N2263A
4
2. Press the Mode key. The CONFIG annunciator lights up in the
display and the first-level menu is shown.
CONFIG DIO
4
3. Press Enter to begin the configuration. The display shows the
second-level menu choice.
MODE 1
4
4. Turn the knob until the desired flow control mode (i.e., MODE 5) is
displayed. The displayed mode is half-bright. 
MODE 5
4


33
2
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Use a Digital I/O Port
5. Press Enter to select the new mode. The display changes to show the
next menu level.
2
CONT POL POS
4
6. You may change other configuration parameters as desired using the
same procedure. When all desired configurations have been made,
press the Mode key to exit the configuration menu. The CONFIG
annunciator turns off.
To Configure a DIO Port
You can configure an individual digital I/O port to change the data
polarity and the display format. The following procedure changes the
built-in digital I/O port to display in binary number format.
1. Select a digital I/O port (i.e., port 090). The channel number is in the
form of snn, where s is the slot number and nn is the channel number.
DIN
090
2. Press the Mode key. The CONFIG annunciator lights up in the
display. The first level menu is shown:
DATA POLARITY
090
3. Turn the knob to select the second menu level
DISP FORMAT
090
4. Press Enter to select the format parameter.
DECIMAL
34
090
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Use a Digital I/O Port
5. Turn the knob until the desired data display format (i.e., BINARY) is
displayed.
BINARY
6. Press Enter to make the change and return to the first level of the
Mode menu.
DISP FORMAT
2
090
4
401
7. Press Mode again to exit the current configuration, the CONFIG
annunciator turns off.
Note
Once you have selected the data display format for a port, it applies to
both input and output operations on that port.
35
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To View Instrument Errors
To View Instrument Errors
2
You can view errors from the front panel. This feature is especially
useful when developing remote instrument control. If an error occurs,
the ERROR annunciator in the display will light. Errors are stored in
the error queue in the order they occur. You read the errors in the same
order. After all errors have been read, the queue is empty and the
ERROR annunciator turns off. To view instrument errors:
1. Press the View key. The VIEW annunciator lights up and the display
shows the first menu level.
ERROR
0
2. Press Enter to view the first error.
a. If no error is in the error queue (the ERROR annunciator is off),
the display shows “NO ERROR” and then automatically returns to
the first level of the View menu.
NO ERROR
0
ERROR
0
b. If there are errors (the ERROR annunciator is on), the first error

in the error queue is displayed.
01:ERR -109
Press the right arrow key to scroll the display to show the entire
error message. 
MISSING PARAMETER
36
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To View Instrument Errors
3. Turn the knob to view other errors in the error queue (if any).


4. Press Enter to return to the first level of the View menu, the
ERROR annunciator turns off.
5. Press View again to exit the View menu operation, the VIEW
annunciator turns off.
Note
2
4
All errors are cleared, and the ERROR annunciator turns off, once the
error queue is viewed. See the “Error Messages” chapter on page 165 for
a complete list of error messages.
37
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
Scanning Operation
Scanning Operation
2
The instrument allows you to combine an external measurement device
such as a Digital Multimeter (DMM) with multiplexer channels to create
a scan. During a scan, the instrument closes the configured multiplexer
channels one at a time to allow a measurement to be made on that
channel.
Before initiating a scan, a scan list must be set up. You can also specify
an arm source, a trigger source, and the number of sweeps (a sweep is
one pass through the scan list) to control the scan process. All these can
be done from the S.List menu. The procedure in this chapter describes a
simple scan from the front panel. For more information about scanning
and using the parameters to control a scan, see page 85.
To Create a Scan List
1. Press the S.List key to enter the scan list menu. The CONFIG
annunciator lights up and the first level of the menu is displayed.
ADD TO SCAN
101
2. Press Enter to begin the channel selection.
SELECT
101
3. Turn the knob to select the first channel for the list (e.g., 103).
SELECT
103
4. Press Enter to add the channel into the scan list. The starburst
character lights in the display to indicate the channel is now a part of
the scan list.
SELECT
38
*
103
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
Scanning Operation
5. Repeat step 3 and 4 to add additional channels to the list.
6. When the desired channels have been added, press the S.List key
again to return to the first level of the menu.
ADD TO SCAN
2
107
4
7. Press S.List again to exit the menu. The CONFIG annunciator turns
off.
To Perform Scanning
After the scan configuration is complete, the actual scan can be
performed.
1. Press the Step key to close the first channel in the scan list.
2. Press the Step key again to open the first channel and close the next
channel in the list.
This procedure shows a simple way to scan, one channel at a time for
each press of a front panel key. You can also press the Scan key to scan
all channels in the list according to the various scan parameters set. In
the default parameter state, pressing the Scan key will cause all the
channels in the list to cycle through at the maximum possible speed.
While this occurs, the SCAN annunciator is lighted. For details about
the scan parameters, see page 85.
To Clear a Scan List
You can clear a scan list once it has been configured.
1. Press the Shift key and then the S.List key. The display will briefly
show: 
CLR SCAN LIST
101
and then return to normal operation.
39
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
Scanning Operation
To View a Scan List
2
You can view which channels are included in a scan list. This example
assumes that channels 103 through 107 are included in the scan list.
1. Press the View key. The VIEW annunciator lights up and the display
shows the first level menu.
ERROR
101
2. Turn the knob until “SCAN LIST” is displayed.
SCAN LIST
101
3. Press Enter. The first channel in the scan list is displayed on the
channel area.
001 OF 005
103
Turn the knob to view other channels in the scan list.
002 OF 005
104
4. Press Enter to return to the first level of the View menu.
SCAN LIST
107
5. Press View again to exit the View menu. The VIEW annunciator
turns off.
40
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Pair Two Modules Together
To Pair Two Modules Together
You can pair two modules together so that they operate as a single unit.
The two modules to be paired must be identical (that is, they must have
the same model number) and be installed in the same mainframe. When
two modules are paired together, any operation on a channel of one
module will be duplicated on the corresponding channel of the other
module. The example below pairs modules installed in slots 2 and 5. 4
1. Press the Menu key. The CONFIG annunciator lights up and
“CARD PAIR” is displayed.
2. Press Enter. 

When “FIRST SLOT x” is displayed, turn the knob to select the first
slot to be paired (i.e., Slot 2).
FIRST SLOT 2
3. Press Enter. 



When “SECOND SLOT x” is displayed, turn the knob to select the
second slot to be paired (i.e., Slot 5). 
SECOND SLOT 5
4. Press Enter to return to the first level of the Menu menu.
CARD PAIR
5. Press Menu again to exit the Menu menu. The CONFIG annunciator
turns off.
41
2
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Configure for External Trigger
To Configure for External Trigger
2
You can use one of two modules for an external trigger. The built-in rear
panel TRIG IN and TRIG OUT pair (on the control module) or the EI
(External Increment) and the CC (Channel Closed) pair on a 44474A
module. Only one pair can be used at a time. You can specify which pair
to use and whether a trigger out pulse is sent out when a relay is closed
during scanning operations. Refer to “Scanning” on page 85 for more
details.
1. Press the Menu key. The CONFIG annunciator lights up and the
display shows the first level menu.
CARD PAIR
2. Turn the knob to show the second menu item, “CONF EXT TRIG”.
CONF EXT TRIG
3. Press Enter. The display shows the next level menu.
TRIG SLOT 0
42
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Configure for External Trigger
4. Turn the knob to select the slot for the external trigger. Slot 0 (control
module) is the built-in external trigger (available at the rear panel
mini DIN connector, see page 7). If a 44474A is not installed, only slot
0 will be shown. Press Enter. The display shows the current setting
for the external trigger.
DISABLE
4
5. Turn the knob to show the alternate choice.
ENABLE
6. Press Enter to accept the choice and return to the first level menu.
CONF EXT TRIG
7. Press the Menu key to exit the menu. The CONFIG annunciator
turns off.
43
2
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Configure the Power-on State
To Configure the Power-on State
2
Firmware Rev 4.0 ONLY. To read your firmware version, see the
procedure on page 52. For more information about firmware revisions,
see “Firmware and Control Module Description” on page 59.
An instrument with Firmware REV 4.0 or later can be set to power on to
the reset state (see “Factory Default and Reset States” on page 74) or to a
state previously stored in a specified memory location. The instrument
will return to the specified state the next time it is turned on.
1. Press the Menu key. The CONFIG annunciator lights up and the
display shows the first menu level.
CARD PAIR
2. Turn the knob until “POWER ON SET” is displayed.
POWER ON SET
3. Press Enter to show the second level menu.
PWR ON RESET
4. To set the instrument power-on to the reset state, press Enter. The
instrument will return to the first level menu.

Alternately, to set the instrument power-on to a stored state: Turn
the knob until “USER SET UP” is displayed.
USER SET UP
5. Press Enter to select the stored state to use.
POWER ON 05
44
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Configure the Power-on State
6. Turn the knob to select the desired memory location (i.e., 08).
POWER ON 08
2
7. Press Enter to accept the stored state and return to the first level
menu. More information about storing states is given on page 106 of
this manual.
4
POWER ON SET
8. Press the Menu key again to exit the Menu menu. The CONFIG
annunciator turns off.
Note
If the instrument is set to power on to a previously stored setup that is
no longer valid, it will automatically power on to the reset state and
“RECALL FAILED” will be displayed.
45
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Configure the Remote Interface
To Configure the Remote Interface
2
The instrument can communicate with a computer over GPIB or RS-232
interface. Only one interface can be used at a time. When shipped from
the factory, the GPIB interface is selected and its address is set to “9”.
Note
The RS-232 interface can be configured and used only in SCPI mode.
GPIB Interface
Each device on the GPIB interface must have a unique address.
•
When shipped from the factory, the GPIB interface is selected and its
address is set to “9”. The GPIB address of the instrument can be set to
any value between 0 and 30.
•
The GPIB address is stored in non-volatile memory, and does not
change when the instrument is turned off or reset.
•
Switching between SCPI mode and 3488A mode causes the 
3499A/B/C to select the GPIB interface and its address setting.
To set the GPIB interface:
1. Press the Menu key. The CONFIG annunciator lights up and the
first level menu is shown.
CARD PAIR
2. Turn the knob to select “INTERFACE” in the menu.
INTERFACE
3. Press Enter to show the second level menu The active interface is
shown. If necessary, turn the knob until “GPIB/488” is displayed.
GPIB/488
46
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Configure the Remote Interface
4. Press Enter to select the interface and show the first parameter.
ADDRESS 09
2
5. Turn the knob to set GPIB address (i.e., 07). Valid addresses range
from 00 to 30.
ADDRESS 07
4
6. Press Enter to show the second parameter.
SRQ ON
7. Press Enter to enable the instrument to assert the SRQ line when
powered up. If the computer is so configured, this can be used to
interrupt the system computer.

To disable this feature, turn the knob to select “SRQ OFF” and press
Enter. The instrument returns to the first level of the menu.
8. Press Menu again to exit the menu.The CONFIG annunciator turns
off.
47
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Configure the Remote Interface
RS-232 Interface
2
RS-232 interface can be selected and its baud rate, parity, and flow
control mode can be configured from the front-panel.
•
Baud Rate: The baud rate can be set to one of the following: 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600. The factory default setting is
9600.
•
Parity and Data Bits: The parity and data bits can be set to one of
the following: None, 8 bits; Even, 7 bits; or Odd, 7 bits. The factory
default setting is None, 8 bits.
•
Flow Control: The flow control can be set to one of the following:
None (factory default setting), XON/XOFF, DTR/DSR, RTS/CTS.
• None: In this mode, data is sent and received over the interface
without any flow control. When using this method, use a slower
baud rate (< 9600 baud) and avoid sending more than 128
characters without stopping or reading a response.
• XON/XOFF: This mode uses special characters embedded in the
data stream to control the flow. If the instrument is addressed to
send data, it continues sending data until the “XOFF” (13h)
character is received. When the “XON” character (11h) is received,
the instrument resumes sending data.
• DTR/DSR: In this mode, the instrument monitors the state of the
DSR (data set ready) line on the RS-232 connector. When the line
goes true, the instrument sends data over the interface. When the
line goes false, the instrument stops sending information
(typically within six characters). The instrument sets the DTR line
false when the input buffer is almost full (approximately 100
characters) and releases the line when space is available again.
• RTS/CTS: This mode operates the same as the DTR/DSR mode
but uses the RTS (request to send) and CTS (clear to send) lines on
the RS-232 connector instead. When the CTS line goes true, the
instrument sends data over the interface. When the line goes
false, the instrument stops sending information (typically within
six characters). The instrument sets the RTS line false when the
input buffer is almost full (approximately 100 characters) and
releases the line when space is available again.
• Changing the instrument system mode (SCPI or 3488) causes the
instrument to select the GPIB interface and its address setting. 
48
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Configure the Remote Interface
To set the RS-232 interface:
2
1. Press the Menu key. The CONFIG annunciator lights up and the
first level menu is shown.
CARD PAIR
4
2. Turn the knob to select “INTERFACE” in the menu.
INTERFACE
3. Press Enter to show the second level menu The active interface is
shown. If necessary, turn the knob until “RS-232” is displayed.
RS-232
4. Press Enter to select the interface and show the first parameter.
9600 BAUD
5. Turn the knob until the desired baud rate is displayed.
19200 BAUD
6. Press Enter to select the baud rate and show the second parameter. 
NONE; 8 BITS



49
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Configure the Remote Interface


2
7. Turn the knob until the desired parity and data bits (default: NONE,
8 BITS) is displayed.
EVEN;7 BITS
8. Press Enter to select the parity and data bits and show the fourth
parameter.
FLOW NONE
9. Turn the knob until the desired mode is displayed.
FLOW RTS/CTS
10. Press Enter to select the parity and data bits and return to the first
level of the Menu menu.
INTERFACE
11. Press Menu again to exit the menu. The CONFIG annunciator turns
off.
50
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Perform a Self-test
To Perform a Self-test
2
The self-test feature of the instrument provides you with a method of
verifying proper instrument operation.
1. Press the Menu key. The CONFIG annunciator lights up and the
first level menu is shown.
4
CARD PAIR
2. Turn the knob to select “SELFTEST”.
SELFTEST
3. Press Enter. The self test will begin. The display will briefly show a
“starburst” pattern (all display segments lit). Following the pattern,
the display indicates: 
TEST. . .
while the internal tests are being performed. The self-test takes
several seconds to complete.

If the self-test is successful, “PASSED” will be displayed. Otherwise,
the reason of the failure will be displayed. For details on self-test
failures, refer to “Self-Test Errors” on page 172.
PASSED
4. Press Enter to return to the first level of the menu.
SELFTEST
5. Press Menu again to exit the Menu menu, the CONFIG annunciator
turns off.
51
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Query the Firmware Revision
To Query the Firmware Revision
2
Perform the following procedure to query the 3499A/B/C firmware and
revision. For a description of the firmware and hardware revisions, see
“Firmware and Control Module Description” on page 59.
1. Press the Menu key. The CONFIG annunciator lights up and the
first level menu is shown.
CARD PAIR
2. Turn the knob to select “REVISION INFO”.
REVISION INFO
3. Press Enter. The system firmware revision number will be displayed.
REVISION 4.0 2.0
4. Press Enter to return to the first level of the Menu menu.
REVISION INFO
5. Press Menu again to exit the Menu menu, the CONFIG annunciator
turns off.
52
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
To Query the Serial Number
To Query the Serial Number
Perform the following procedure to query the 3499A/B/C serial number.
1. Press the Menu key. The CONFIG annunciator lights up and the
first level menu is shown.
CARD PAIR
4
1. Turn the knob to select “SERIAL NO”.
SERIAL NO
2. Press Enter. The Agilent 3499A/B/C serial number is displayed.
MY12345678
3. Press Enter again to return to the first level of the Menu menu.
SERIAL NO
4. Press Menu again to exit the Menu menu, the CONFIG annunciator
turns off.
53
2
Chapter 2 Front-Panel Operation
Local/Remote Control
Local/Remote Control
2
The instrument operates in two data entry modes, local and remote. In
local mode, all keys on the front panel are fully functional. In remote
mode, some front panel keys are locked (exception are: Local, Mon,
View, Enter, the arrow keys, and the knob).
The instrument will enter the remote state upon receipt of any command
over the remote interface. The RMT annunciator lights.
You can regain control of the front panel keys when the instrument is in
remote by pressing the Shift (Local) key. The RMT annunciator turns
off and the instrument return to local mode.
Note
If the front panel keys are locked through either the SYSTem:RWLock
command on the RS-232 interface or a LOCAL LOCKOUT command on
the GPIB interface, the local key will not function. You can restore the
front panel operation by cycling power the instrument or by sending a
SYSTem:LOCal command on the RS-232 interface, or a LOCAL command
on the GPIB interface.
54
3
3
System Overview
System Overview
An Agilent 3499A/B/C Switch/Control System is composed of a
mainframe and a set of Plug-in modules. This chapter provides a typical
configuration of a test system using the 3499A/B/C for switching and
control, followed by a description of the three mainframes and all the
Plug-in modules. The following sections are included in this chapter:
3
•
•
•
•
•
•
56
Agilent 3499A/B/C Switch/Control System, on page 57
Mainframes Overview, on page 58
Firmware and Control Module Description, on page 59
Plug-in Modules Overview, on page 61
Channel and Slot Addressing, on page 70
Factory Default and Reset States, on page 74
Chapter 3 System Overview
Agilent 3499A/B/C Switch/Control System
Agilent 3499A/B/C Switch/Control System
The Agilent 3499A/B/C Switch/Control System provides high density and
high speed switching for routing test signals to and from your DUTs
(devices under test) and test instruments such as external DMMs,
scopes, counters, power supplies, etc. Whether you are involved in a
large production test system or a small R&D bench top system, the
Agilent 3499A/B/C provides an ideal combination of price/performance 4
solution. With a wide variety of available plug-in modules, you can
configure your test system much more easily and flexibly. The figure
below shows the typical configuration of a test system.
DUT
Plug-in
Modules
Agilent 3499A/B/C
Source(s)
Instrument
Device(s)
Custom
Equipment
IEEE488.2 (GPIB)
A Typical Test System
57
3
Chapter 3 System Overview
Mainframes Overview
Mainframes Overview
Three mainframes are available:
3
Slots Available
Rack Width
3499A
5
full width
3499B
2
half width
3499C
91
full width
1 The 3499C is
designed to accommodate multiple width plug-in modules and has 9 logical slots
but 14 mechanical slots. Slots 1 through 6 are 1-slot wide, slot 7 is 2-slots wide, and slots 8
and 9 are each 3-slots wide. See the figure on page 7 for more information.
All mainframes can be either operated from the front-panel or
programed over a remote interface (GPIB or RS-232).
The mainframes can be operated in either of two system modes: SCPI
mode or 3488A mode. The SCPI mode allows the full realization of
performance potentials and advanced features, such as parallel
operation of multiple relays on multiple modules. The 3488A mode is
included for backward compatibility with the legacy Agilent 3488A
system. This manual documents the SCPI mode of operation.
For information about the 3488 programming mode please visit
www.agilent.com.
58
Chapter 3 System Overview
Firmware and Control Module Description
Firmware and Control Module Description
The Agilent 3499A/B/C and this manual support two versions of the
Agilent 3499A/B/C control module and four versions of firmware.
Firmware revisions and control module versions can be queried either by
front-panel operation or using the remote interface. See page 52 for a
procedure to read the revision from the front-panel or page 153 for
4
remote interface operation.
From the front-panel:
Control Module Revision Firmware Revision
Typical Display
1.0
1.0
REVISION 1.0
1.0
2.0
REVISION 2.0
1.0
3.0
REVISION 3.0
2.0
4.0
REV 4.0 2.0
From the remote interface, in response to the *IDN? query, one of two
typical strings is returned:
“Agilent Technologies, 3499, cnxxxxxx, 3.0”
“Agilent Technologies, 3499, myxxxxxx, 4.0 2.0”
In these strings, cnxxxxxx or myxxxxxx is the instrument serial number.
Note that the control module revision is not returned for revision 1.0
control modules.
The table on the next page lists the differences between firmware and
control module revisions.
59
3
Chapter 3 System Overview
Firmware and Control Module Description
Firmware
Version
Control
Module
Version
Plug-in module
Support
Programming
Modes
Firmware
Upgrade
Needed?
1.0
1.0
Stored setups
are cleared if
power is
cycled.
Must upgrade
hardware and
firmware.
Not Applicable
YES
2.0
1.0
Stored setups
are cleared if
power is
cycled.
Supports all
modules except:
N2272A
N2276A/B
N2282A
Firmware
Version 2.0
allows
programming in
both SCPI
Mode and
3488A Mode.
Upgrade to
Firmware
Revision 3.0
ONLY if using
N2272A,
N2276A/B, or
N2282A.
3.0
1.0
Stored setups
are cleared if
power is
cycled.
SCPI Mode
supports all
modules.
3488A Mode
supports all
modules except:
N2272A,
N2276A/B, or
N2282A.
Firmware
Version 3.0
limits
programming to
either SCPI
Mode or 3488A
Mode (not both)
Upgrade to
firmware revision
4.0 ONLY if
control board
revision is
upgraded to 2.0.
4.01
2.0
Stored setups
are saved.
Instrument
can be
programmed
to power up in
a set state.
SCPI Mode:
supports all
modules.
3488A Mode
supports all
modules except:
N2272A,
N2276A/B, or
N2282A.
NO
Firmware
Version 4.0
allows
programming in
both SCPI
Mode and
3488A Mode.
3
State Storage
1 Upgrading to firmware revision 4.0 requires the control module be upgraded to revision 2.0.
Control module revision 1.0 does not support firmware revision 4.0.
60
Chapter 3 System Overview
Plug-in Modules Overview
Plug-in Modules Overview
The Agilent 3499A/B/C mainframes support multiple Plug-in modules,
including all the existing 3488A modules (4447XX modules), as well as
several new ones (N22XXX modules). Based on their functions, the
modules can be divided into five classes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Note
Multiplexer (MUX) modules
4
General Purpose Relay (GP) modules
Matrix modules
Digital I/O (DIO) modules
Multifunction modules
Optical Modules
Refer to the “Plug-in Modules” chapter on page 173 for the details of the
individual Plug-in modules.
MUX Modules
A MUX (multiplexer) module switches one signal to multiple DUTs
(devices under test), or multiple signals to one device, one at a time.
Example applications include capacitor leakage, connector/switch
contact, and insulation resistance test systems. To expand switching
capacity or build special configurations, the multiplexer switching
modules can also be used with matrix or other switching modules. The
figure below shows a simple 1 x 4 Multiplexer.
Simple Multiplexer Switching
61
3
Chapter 3 System Overview
Plug-in Modules Overview
Multiplexers are available in several types:
•
•
•
•
3
One-Wire (Single-Ended) Multiplexer for common LO measurements
Two-Wire Multiplexer for floating measurements
Four-Wire Multiplexer for resistance and RTD measurements
Very High Frequency (VHF) / Microwave Multiplexer for switching
frequencies up to microwave (26.5 GHz).
The table below lists the available MUX modules.
Model
Number
Module Name
Mainframe
Slots
Required
Relay
Type
Description
N2260A
40-Channel MUX
Module
1
Latching
Primarily a 40-channel 2-wire
multiplexer, switches both HI
and LO inputs (200 V, 1 A) with
DPST relays. It can be
configured as an 80-channel 1wire, two independent 20channel 2-wire or a 20-channel
4-wire MUX module.
N2266A
40-Channel MUX
Module
1
Reed nonlatching
Primarily a 40-channel 2-wire
multiplexer. In SCPI mode it can
be configured as an 80-channel
1-wire, two independent 20channel 2-wire or a 20-channel
4-wire MUX module.
Caution
In order to stay within the 20W power limit set for convection cooling,
no more than three (3) N2266A 40-Channel MUX Modules should be
installed in an Agilent 3499A mainframe; the remaining two slots
must remain empty. Other module combinations are acceptable; for
example, two N2266A MUX modules plus any combination of other
Agilent modules is permissible. This limitation does not apply to the
3499B or 3499C mainframes.
62
Chapter 3 System Overview
Plug-in Modules Overview
Model
Number
N2268A
Module Name
50 3.0 GHz Dual
4-to-1 MUX
Module
Mainframe
Slots
Required
1
Relay
Type
Latching
Description
Consists of two independent 1to-4 MUX switches which can
switch up to 30VDC or peak AC
from DC to 3.0 GHz.
4
N2270A
10-Channel High
Voltage MUX
Module
2
Nonlatching
10-channel 2-wire High Voltage
MUX module with maximum
switching voltage 1000Vpk,
maximum switching power
10W.
N2272A
1 GHz RF 1-to-9
MUX Module
1
Latching
1 GHz RF 1-to-9 MUX module
which can be used in RF testing
and measuring.
N2276A/B
Dual 1-to-6(4)
Microwave MUX/
Attenuator Module
3
Nonlatching
3-slot width Dual 1-to-6(4)
Microwave MUX/Attenuator
module with optional Microwave
switch blocks and
programmable attenuator
blocks.
44470A/D
10/20-Channel
MUX Module
1
Latching
The 10/20 DPST (Double-pole
Single-throw) relays switch both
HI and LO inputs up to 250V, 2A
with low differential offsets for
accurate measurements.
44472A
Dual 4-Channel
VHF Switch
Module
1
Latching
The two independent groups of
bidirectional 1x4 switches with
50 characteristic impedance
can be used for signals from
DC to 300 MHz.
44478A/B
50751.3GHz
Multiplexer
1
Latching
The two independent groups of
bidirectional 1x4 switches with
5075 characteristic
impedance can be used for
signals from DC to 1.3 GHz.
63
3
Chapter 3 System Overview
Plug-in Modules Overview
GP Modules
The GP (General Purpose) relay modules often consist of independent
latching or non-latching relays. They are useful for creating additional
isolation between circuits, providing safety interlocks, actuating other
relays or circuits, or building special topologies such as binary ladders
and tree structures. A simple 4-channel SPST (Single-pole Single-throw)
GP switch is shown below.
3
CH01
L
CH01
H
CH02
L
CH02
H
CH03
L
CH03
H
CH04
L
CH04
H
A Simple General Purpose Switch
The table below lists the available GP relay modules.
Model
Number
Module Name
Mainframe
Slots
Required
Relay
Type
Description
N2261A
40-Channel GP
Relay Module
1
Latching
The 40 independent SPST relays
provide quality connections for low
level signals. Can also switch signals
up to 200V, 1A.
N2267A
8-Channel
High Current
GP Module
1
Nonlatching
An 8-channel High Current GP module
which can switch up to 8A 250VAC or
5A 30VDC, with decreasing current to
1A at 125VDC.
44471A
10-Channel GP
Relay Module
1
Latching
The 10 independent SPST (Singlepole Single-throw) relays provide
quality connections for low level
signals. Can also switch signals up to
250V, 2A.
64
Chapter 3 System Overview
Plug-in Modules Overview
Model
Number
44471D
Module Name
20-Channel GP
Relay Module
Mainframe
Slots
Required
1
Relay
Type
Latching
Description
The 20 independent SPST (Singlepole Single-throw) relays provide
quality connections for low level
signals. Can also switch signals up to
4
250V, 1A.
44475A
Breadboard
Module
1
NA
Use the breadboard for custom circuits
and special purpose functions in your
test system.
44476A
3-Channel 18
GHz Switch
Module
1
Latching
The 3 independent 50SPDT (Singlepole Double-throw) coaxial switches
with SMA connectors provide high
isolation, low insertion loss, and low
VSWR for switching signals up to 
18 GHz.
44476B
2-Channel
Microwave
Switch Module
1
NA
Similar to the 44476A but does not
have the coaxial switches installed. 
A variety of coaxial switches can be
mounted onto the module to provide 
3-, 4-, or 5-port switching up to 
26.5 GHz.
44477A
7-Channel
Form-C Relay
Module
1
Latching
7 independent, break-before-make,
SPDT Form-C relays for general
purpose switching and control of
external devices up to 250V, 2A.
65
3
Chapter 3 System Overview
Plug-in Modules Overview
Matrix Modules
A matrix switch is the most versatile type of system switching. Any input
can be connected to any output, individually or in combination. This
helps minimize the need for complex wiring, and can simplify the DUT
interface. In addition, a matrix module can be used in conjunction with
other modules to provide a wide variety of switching combinations. A
matrix is arranged in rows and columns and a simple 4 x 4 matrix switch
is shown below.
3
Matrix Switching
The table below lists the available matrix modules.
Mainframe
Slots
Required
Model
Number
Module
Name
N2262A
4 x 8 Matrix
Module
1
Latching
Each crosspoint or node of the 4 x 8
matrix module uses a DPST (Doublepole Single-throw) relay to switch two
wires (Hi & Lo) for signals up to 200V,
1A.
44473A
4 x 4 Matrix
Module
1
Latching
Each crosspoint or node of the 4 x 4
matrix module uses a DPST (Doublepole Single-throw) relay to switch two
wires (Hi & Lo) for signals up to 250V,
2A.
66
Relay
Type
Description
Chapter 3 System Overview
Plug-in Modules Overview
Digital I/O Modules
The digital I/O modules provide high-density digital input/output
capabilities in an easy-to-control form. The independent TTL-compatible
inputs and outputs make it well-suited for monitoring and controlling
devices compactly and cost-effectively. Typically, the digital outputs are
used to provide drive for relatively high current devices such as
solenoids, relays and small motors. The digital inputs are used to
monitor devices such as micro-switches. A simplified schematic of a
4
single digital input and output line is shown below.
OPEN COLLECTOR/
CURRENT SINK
(VMOS FET)
+ 5V
ONE I/O LINE
DRIVER OUTPUT
INPUT SENSE
REFERENCE
VOLTAGE
A Simple Digital I/O Circuit
The table below lists the available digital I/O modules.
Model
Number
Module Name
Mainframe
Slots
Required
Descriptions
N2263A
32-Bit Digital I/O
Module
1
The module offers 32-bidirectional I/O lines and
three handshake lines for sensing and control of
external devices up to 42 V, 600 mA. All lines
are TTL-compatible.
44474A
16-Bit Digital I/O
Module
1
The module offers 16-bidirectional I/O lines and
four handshake lines for sensing and control of
external devices up to 30 V, 125 mA. All lines
are TTL-compatible.
67
3
Chapter 3 System Overview
Plug-in Modules Overview
Multifunction Modules
A multifunction module combines two or more functions such as MUX,
GP, Matrix, Digital I/O or DAC onto a single module, making it possible
to implement a complicated switching application with fewer modules.
Therefore, the cost is reduced by minimizing the number of mainframes
and modules required.
Each separate function on a multifunction module can be operated
independently. For example, an Agilent N2265A can be used as both a
4 x 4 matrix module and a 16-bit digital I/O module.
3
The table below lists the available multifunction modules.
Model
Number
Module Name
Mainframe
Slots
Required
Relay
Type
Description
N2264A
12-Channel GP +
3-Channel Highcurrent GP +
16-Bit Digital I/O
Module
1
Nonlatching
The module provides 12-channel
SPST (Single-pole Single-throw)
GP relays for signals up to 200 V, 1
A, 3-channel high-current GP
relays for signals up to 125 V, 5 A,
and 16-bit digital I/O for sensing
and control of external devices up
to 42 V, 600 mA.
N2265A
4 x 4 Matrix +
16-Bit Digital I/O
Module
1
Latching
The module provides 4 x 4 2-wire
matrix for signals up to 200V, 1A,
and 16-bit digital I/O for sensing
and control of external devices up
to 42 V, 600 mA.
68
Chapter 3 System Overview
Plug-in Modules Overview
Optical Modules
The Agilent N2280A, N2281A and N2282A are optical switch modules.
The table below lists the information about these three optical modules.
Model
Number
Module Name
Mainframe
Slots
Required
Relay
Type
Description
4
N2280A
Optical Switch Quad 1-to2 MUX Module
2
Nonlatching
Four 1-to-2 Optical
Switches
N2281A
Optical Switch Dual 1-to4 MUX Module
2
Nonlatching
Two 1-to-4 Optical
Switches
N2282A
Optical Switch 1-to-8
MUX Module
2
Latching
One 1-to-8 Optical Switch
69
3
Chapter 3 System Overview
Channel and Slot Addressing
Channel and Slot Addressing
A channel refers to an individual relay on a switching module, or an
individual bit/port on a digital I/O module. The channel address is in the
form of snn, where s represents slot number and nn represents a channel
number.
For all mainframes, slot 0 refers to the 3499A/B/C control board. Valid
slot numbers are:
3
3499A
slots 0 through 5
3499B
slots 0 through 2
3499C
slots 0 through 9
The channel number, nn, is plug-in module dependent. Detailed
information about channel numbers of individual plug-in modules is
given below and on the following pages.
Channel Addressing (snn) 
s = Slot Number; nn = Channel Number
Plug-in Module
N2260A
40-Channel MUX Modulea
1-Wire Mode: s00, s01... s78, s79b
2-Wire Mode: s00, s01...s38, s39
Dual 2-Wire Mode: s00, s01...s38, s39
4-Wire Mode: s00, s01...s18, s19c
N2261A
40-Channel GP Relay Module
s00, s01, s02, s03... s37, s38, s39
N2262A
4X8 Matrix Module
Row 0, 1, 2, 3; Column 0, 1, 2, 3... 6, 7
(s00, s01, s02... s07; s10, s11, s12... s17;
s20, s21, s22... s27; s30, s31, s32... s37)d
a. The N2260A and N2266A can be used as an 80-channel 1-wire MUX module, a 40-channel 2-wire MUX module, two
20-channel 2-wire MUX modules, or a 20-channel 4-wire MUX module.
b. The Low (L) terminals of the 40 2-wire channels form the first 40 1-wire channels (Channels 00-39), and the High (H)
terminals of the 40 2-wire channels form the second 40 1-wire channels (Channels 40-79).
c. The first channels (CH00 & CH20) of either banks (BANK 0 and BANK 1) form Channel 00, the second channels
(CH01 & CH21) of either banks form Channel 01, and so on.
d. A channel number on a matrix module is formed in Slot-Row-Column format, i.e., channel address s23 means row 2,
column 3 in Slot s.
70
Chapter 3 System Overview
Channel and Slot Addressing
Plug-in Module
Channel Addressing (snn) 
s = Slot Number; nn = Channel Number
N2263A
32-Bit Digital I/O Module
Individual Bits: s00, s01, s02... s30, s31
8-Bit Ports: s00, s01, s02, s03
16-Bit Ports: s00, s02
32-Bit Port: s00
N2264A
12-Channel GP Relay +
3-Channel High-current GP Relays +
16-Bit Digital I/O Module
12 GP Relays: s00, s01, s02... s10, s11
3 High-current GP Relays: s20, s21, s22
16-Bit Digital I/O:
Individual Bits: s30, s31, s32... s44, s45
8-Bit Ports: s30, s31
16-Bit Port: s30
N2265A
4x4 Matrix +
16-Bit Digital I/O Module
4x4 Matrix: 
Row 0, 1, 2, 3; Column 0, 1, 2, 3
(s00, s01, s02, s03; s10, s11, s12, s13;
s20, s21, s22, s23; s30, s31, s32, s33)a
16-Bit Digital I/O:
Individual Bits: s40, s41, s42... s54, s55
8-Bit Ports: s40, s41
16-Bit Port: s40
N2266A
40-Channel MUX Moduleb
1-Wire Mode: s00, s01... s78, s79c
2-Wire Mode: s00, s01...s38, s39
Dual 2-Wire Mode: s00, s01...s38, s39
4-Wire Mode: s00, s01...s18, s19d
N2267A
8-Channel High Current GP Module
s00, s01, s02... s07
N2268A
50 3.0 GHz Dual 4-to-1 MUX Module
s00, s01, s02, s03; s10, s11, s12, s13
4
a. A channel number on a matrix module is formed in Slot-Row-Column format, i.e., channel address s23 means row 2,
column 3 in Slot s.
b. The N2260A and N2266A can be used as an 80-channel 1-wire MUX module, a 40-channel 2-wire MUX module, two
20-channel 2-wire MUX modules, or a 20-channel 4-wire MUX module.
c. The Low (L) terminals of the 40 2-wire channels form the first 40 1-wire channels (Channels 00-39), and the High (H)
terminals of the 40 2-wire channels form the second 40 1-wire channels (Channels 40-79).
d. The first channels (CH00 & CH20) of either banks (BANK 0 and BANK 1) form Channel 00, the second channels
(CH01 & CH21) of either banks form Channel 01, and so on.
71
3
Chapter 3 System Overview
Channel and Slot Addressing
Channel Addressing (snn) 
s = Slot Number; nn = Channel Number
Plug-in Module
3
N2270A
10-Channel HIgh Voltage MUX Module
s00, s01, s02... s07
N2272A
1 GHz RF 1-to-9 MUX Module
s00, s01, s02... s07
N2276A/B
Dual 1-to-6 (4) Microwave MUX/
Attenuator Module
Two 1-to-4(6) Microwave Switch:
s00, s01, s02, s03(, s04, s05);
s10, s11, s12, s13(, s14, s15)
Two Attenuators:
s20; s30
N2280A
Optical Switch Quad 1-to-2 MUX Module
s00, s01; s10, s11; s20, s21; s30, s31
N2281A
Optical Switch Dual 1-to-4 MUX Module
s00, s01, s02, s03;s10, s11, s12, s13
N2282A
Optical Switch 1-to-8 MUX Module
s00, s01, s02... s07
4-Bit Built-in Digital I/O
(slot 0 control module)
Individual Bits: 091, 092, 093, 094
4-Bit Port: 090
44470A
10-Channel MUX Module
s00, s01, s02, s03... s08, s09
44470D
20-Channel MUX Module
s00, s01, s02, s03... s18, s19
44471A
10-Channel GP Relay Module
s00, s01, s02, s03... s08, s09
44471D
20-Channel GP Relay Module
s00, s01, s02, s03... s18, s19
44472A
Dual 4-Channel VHF Module
Group 0: s00, s01, s02, s03
Group 1: s10, s11, s12, s13
72
Chapter 3 System Overview
Channel and Slot Addressing
Plug-in Module
Channel Addressing (snn) 
s = Slot Number; nn = Channel Number
44473A
4x4 Matrix Module
Row: 0, 1, 2, 3; Column: 0, 1, 2, 3
(s00, s01, s02, s03; s10, s11, s12, s13;
s20, s21, s22, s23; s30, s31, s32, s33)a
44474A
16-Bit Digital I/O Module
Individual Bits: s00, s01, s02... s14, s15
8-Bit Ports: s00, s01
16-Bit Port: s00
44475A
Breadboard Module
N/A
44476A
3-Channel 13 GHz Microwave 
Switch Module
s00, s01, s02
44476B
2-Channel 26 GHz Microwave 
Switch Module
s00, s01
44477A
7-Channel Form-C Relay Module
s00, s01, s02, s03, s04, s05, s06
44478A
50  1.3 GHz MUX Module
Group 0: s00, s01, s02, s03
Group 1: s10, s11, s12, s13
44478B
75  1.3 GHz MUX Module
Group 0: s00, s01, s02, s03
Group 1: s10, s11, s12, s13
4
a. A channel number on a matrix module is formed in Slot-Row-Column format, i.e., channel address s23 means row 2,
column 3 in Slot s.
73
3
Chapter 3 System Overview
Factory Default and Reset States
Factory Default and Reset States
The table on the next page shows the settings of the instrument after a
reset (in SCPI mode) as well as the default settings when the instrument
is shipped from the factory. (A table showing the 3488 reset settings is
given on page 76.)
• You can reset the instrument either by pressing 
Shift + Card Reset on the front-panel, or with a *RST command
over the remote interface.
3
• If a module is accidentally removed or installed while the
instrument power is on, the instrument will preform a reset.
74
Chapter 3 System Overview
Factory Default and Reset States
SCPI Mode Defaults
Item
Interface
GPIB/488
Factory Default
Reset
GPIB (Address 9)
Keep current settinga
Keep current settinga
RS-232
System Mode
SCPI Mode
SCPI Mode
3488A Mode
System Related
Module Related
Scan Related
Keep current setting
Keep current setting
Display State
On
On
Stored State
Empty
Keep current setting
Error Queue
Empty
Not cleared
Switching Channels
Open
Open
Digital I/O Ports
Input
Input
Card Pair
None
None
Scanning
None
Stop scan in progress
Scan List
Empty
Empty
ARM SOURce
IMMediate
IMMediate
ARM TIMer (seconds)
0
0
Arm Count
1
1
TRIGger SOURce
IMMediate
IMMediate
TRIGger TIMer (seconds) 0
0
Channel Delay (seconds)
0
0
Trigger Out Pulse
Disabled
Disabled
4
a. Current setting includes the selection of an interface, as well as the settings for the interface.
75
3
Chapter 3 System Overview
Factory Default and Reset States
3488 Mode Defaults
Item
Interface
GPIB/488
Factory Default
Reset
GPIB (Address 9)
Keep current settinga
RS-232b
3
System Mode
SCPI Mode
Keep current setting
SCPI Mode
3488A Mode
System-Related
Module-Related
Scan-Related
Keep current setting
Keep current setting
Display State
On
On
Stored State
Empty
Keep current setting
Error Queue
Empty
Cleared
Switching Channels
Open
Open
Digital I/O Ports
Input
Input
Card Pair
None
None
Scanning
None
Stop scan in progress
Scan List
Empty
Empty
Channel Delay
(seconds)
0
0
Trigger Out Pulse
Disabled
Disabled
a. Current setting includes the selection of the GPIB interface and its address setting.
b. RS-232 interface CANNOT be used in 3488A mode.
76
4
4
Features and Functions
Features and Functions
This chapter provides details about particular functions and features of
the Agilent 3499A/B/C Switch/Control System. The sections in this
chapter describe the features using both the front-panel and the remote
interface using SCPI commands. The examples in this chapter are
general. For specific procedures using the front panel refer to Chapter 2.
For SCPI command information refer to Chapter 5. The following
sections are included in this chapter:
4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Monitoring a Channel or a Slot, on page 80
Switching a Relay Channel, on page 82
Configuring a Multiplexer Module, on page 83
Parallel Switching, on page 84
Scanning, on page 85
Digital I/O Operation, on page 95
State Storage, on page 106
Error Conditions, on page 108
Self-Test, on page 109
Display Control, on page 110
Relay Cycle Counts, on page 111
To Select the System Mode, on page 112
The following conventions are used for the front-panel operation.
•
All keys on the front-panel keyboard are expressed in bold font and
normally associated with a “press”. For example, press Mon.
•
All the front-panel display annunciators are expressed in bold font
followed by an “annunciator”. For example, MON annunciator.
•
The information shown on the front-panel display is enclosed within a
pair of quotation marks.
•
Shift + Recall1 indicates the sequential operation: first press Shift,
then press Recall.
1
78
Also applicable to keys Card Reset, Scan, and S.List.
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
SCPI Language Conventions
SCPI Language Conventions
Throughout this manual, the following conventions are used for SCPI
command syntax for remote interface programming.
•
•
•
Square brackets ([ ]) indicate optional keywords or parameters.
•
A vertical bar ( | ) separates multiple parameters.
Braces ({ }) enclose parameter choices within a command string.
4
Angle brackets (< >) enclose parameters for which you must specify a
value.
Rules for Using a Channel or Scan List
Many of the SCPI commands include a channel list or scan list
parameter which allows you to specify one or more channels. The
channel number has the form (@snn), where s is the slot number and nn
is the channel number. You can specify a slot, a single channel, multiple
channels, or a range of channels as described below.
•
The following command closes a single channel (channel 11) on the
module installed in slot 1:
ROUT:CLOS (@111)
•
The following command closes multiple channels on modules in slots
1 and 2:
ROUT:CLOS (@111,112,203,204)
•
The following command closes a range of channels. When you specify
a range of channels, the range may contain invalid channels (they are
ignored), but the first and last channel in the list must be valid.
ROUT:CLOS (@101:111)
•
Additional information about channel and slot numbering is given on
page 70.
79
4
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Monitoring a Channel or a Slot
Monitoring a Channel or a Slot
You may need to continuously monitor the current status of a particular
switching channel, a digital I/O port, or an entire plug-in module. This is
especially useful when developing and debugging remote interface
commands or watching for an important signal.
•
To monitor a channel or a port, specify the channel or port number.
To monitor a plug-in module, specify the slot number. The displayed
information is module type dependent as shown on the next page.
•
Front-Panel Operation: To select a channel, a digital I/O port, or a
slot, press Mon. The MON annunciator lights up. Press Mon again
to exit this state. 
4
MUX
OPEN
101
Monitor a switching channel 101.
DIN
255
400
Monitor a DIO Port 400.
1:0, , , , , ,6, , ,9,
2
Monitor a MUX or GP module.
00: H255
4
Monitor a DIO module.
L254.
If only part of the channel status on the module can be displayed at
one time, press Enter to display the next part.
•
Remote Interface Operation: To enable the monitor mode, send a SCPI
command similar to the ones shown below.
DIAG:MON 103
DIAG:MON 400
DIAG:MON 2
! Monitor Channel 103.
! Monitor a DIO Port 400.
! Monitor the module in slot 2.
To query the slot or channel being monitored, send the following
SCPI command.
DIAG:MON?
80
! Returns the slot or channel
being monitored. Returns -1
if no channel or slot is
monitored.
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Monitoring a Channel or a Slot
Example MON Display
1:0,,,,,,6,,,9,
2
Description
The display for a multiplexer or a GP relay module. This
display indicates that the monitored module is in Slot 2 and
channels 10, 16, and 19 are closed.
4
ROW 3:,1,,3,,,6,7
3
0;,,3,COL 3,
3
00:H255
DIO
DOUT
L254.
4
12
090
0
091
ROW 0:,1,,3,
5
00:H255
5
L254.
The display for a matrix module. The top display is the row
information, indicating that the relays on Row 3, Columns 1, 3,
6 and 7 of the module (in Slot 3) are closed. The lower display
is the column information, indicating that relays on column 3,
row 0 and 3 are closed.
The display for a digital I/O module. The first 2 digits on the left
(“00” in this case) represents the “L” 8-bit port address. Adding
one to this value, the “H” 8-bit port address is obtained. Data
with a trailing decimal point indicates that the last operation on
that port was a WRITE, data without a trailing decimal point
indicates that the last operation on that port was a READ. This
display shows that the data last read from Port 401 is 255 and
the data last written to Port 400 was 254.
The top display is for the built-in digital I/O Port 090 (controller
module) and the data from the last operation. The lower
display indicates that data last written to the bit channel 
091 is 0.
For a multifunction module, the first function on the module is
displayed, then the next. This display is an example of a
multifunction module with matrix and DIO functions (in slot 5).
81
4
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Switching a Relay Channel
Switching a Relay Channel
Switch modules can be used to route signals to and from your test
system. This is achieved by closing or opening the relay channels on
these modules.
4
•
From the front-panel, you can open or close one relay channel at a
time. However, over the remote interface, multiple relay channels can
be operated by a single command if a channel list is specified. In
addition, these open or closed states can be stored, and a stored
channel setup can be included in a scan list (see “State Storage” on
page 106).
•
Whenever a switch module is reset, all of the closed relay channels on
the module will be opened.
•
Whenever the instrument is turned on or reset, all of the closed relay
channels in the instrument will be opened.
•
Front-Panel Operation: Select a channel, press Open or Close.

Select a slot, press and hold Card Reset to open all channels on the
selected module.

Press Shift, then press and hold Card Reset to open all channels in
the instrument.
•
Remote Interface Operation: The following commands open and close
multiple channels on the modules in slots 1 and 2.
OPEN (@101,103:107,207)
CLOS (@101,103:107,207)
SYST:CPON 1
Note
! Open multiple channels.
! Close multiple channels.
! Open all channels on the
module in slot 1.
When an Agilent N2260A or N2266A is configured to the 1-wire mode,
only one channel on the module can be closed at a time.
82
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Configuring a Multiplexer Module
Configuring a Multiplexer Module
The Agilent N2260A and N2266A 40-Channel MUX modules can be
flexibly configured.
•
Configurations possible include:
80-channel 1-wire
40-channel 2-wire 
dual 20-channel 2-wire
20-channel 4-wire
4
•
At power on or after a reset, the MUX module will be configured as a
40-channel 2-wire MUX module (default setting).
•
When configured to be an 80-channel 1-wire module, only one channel
can be closed at a time.
•
For more information about the N2260A see page 176. 
For more information about the N2266A see page 200.
•
Front-Panel Operation: Select the slot in which an N2260A or
N2266A is installed, press Mode (the CONFIG annunciator lights
up). Select the desired function mode (i.e. 1-wire mode). Press Enter.
CONFIG MUX
•
1
WIRE1
1
Remote Interface Operation: A command parameter sets the
operational mode of the multiplexer. This parameter can take one of
the following values: WIRE1, WIRE2, BIWIRE2, or WIRE4.
[ROUTe]:FUNCtion 1, WIRE1
! Configure the module in slot
1 to be 1-wire mode.
83
4
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Parallel Switching
Parallel Switching
While traditional switch/control systems open/close relays in sequence,
the 3499A/B/C uses an innovative parallel driving circuit to open/close
switches simultaneously. The parallel operation of the 3499A/B/C
significantly increases the test throughput of an automated test system.
The following plug-in module use parallel switching: N2260A, N2261A,
N2264A, N2265A, and N2266A
For example, the 40, 2-wire relays on the N2260A can be separated into
four banks: Bank 1 (CH00-09) through Bank 4 (CH30-39). The switches
(up to 10) in the same bank can be closed simultaneously ('parallel
switching').
4
Since a relay is controlled by the signal applied to it's coil, relay coils can
be arranged in arrays to simplify the driver circuits. Coils aligned in the
same row share a common row control signal, and coils aligned in the
same column share a common column control signal. The figure below
shows an array of coils with 4 rows and 10 columns. This is different
from the wiring of the relay terminal from users' point of view. Relays
can be connected and configured as MUX, GP, or MATRIX, while their
driver circuits are similar.
The 3499A/B/C /C /C supports parallel operation of latching relays. Any
relay in the same row can be opened or closed at the same time.
Basically, the relays are switched row by row, or bank by bank.
84
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Scanning
Scanning
The Agilent 3499A/B/C can scan switching channels, digital I/O bit
channels, and stored channel setups in a scan list. When a scan starts,
the first channel in a scan list is closed. The channel is then opened and
the next channel in the list is closed. This process repeats for all
channels in the scan list. You can sweep through a scan list more than
once. You can also synchronize scanned channel closures with external4
measurement devices.
Rules for Scanning
•
A scan list must be specified before initiating a scan. One or more
switching channels, digital I/O bit channels, and/or previously stored
channel setups can be included in a scan list. The order of the
channels in the scan list determines the order of the channels to be
scanned.
•
If any plug-in module is installed or removed while the instrument is
operating, the instrument will automatically perform a reset and the
current scan list is cleared.
•
If a scan list contains a non-existing channel, the scan cannot be
performed and an error will occur.
•
If a scan list contains a channel on a digital I/O module that is not
configured to handshake mode #1 or mode #2 (see page 98), the scan
cannot be performed and an error will occur.
•
If a mismatch between a stored channel setup in the scan list and the
current hardware configuration is found, a scan cannot be performed
and an error will occur. When a stored setup is included in the scan
list, the stored setup is recalled and the next channel in the scan list
is switched.
•
When a scan is aborted, the channel last scanned before the
interruption will remain closed. Aborting a scan does not affect the
present scan configuration. A scan cannot resume from where it is
interrupted. To initiate a new scan, the channels in the scan list will
be scanned from the beginning of the scan list.
•
A scan list may contain up to 200 entries.
85
4
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Scanning
The Scan Process
The figure below illustrates how a scan works.
Idle
Idle
Initialize
no
yes
Controlled by
Arm Source
Arm Layer
Another
Scan?
Controlled by
Arm Count
Arm Event
Detection
4
no
yes
Controlled by
Trigger Source
Another
Channel?
Controlled by
Scan List
Trigger Event
Detection
Trigger Layer
Output Trigger*
Scan Channel
* Note: The trigger out pulse will occur at the specified trig-out line
only if you have configured to enable the slot to output.
The scan operation consists of two layers: arm layer and trigger layer.
The instrument is considered to be in the idle state whenever it is not
operating within either of these layers. When a scan is initiated, the
instrument is taken out of the idle state and proceeds into the arm layer.
When an arm source is detected, the instrument leaves the arm layer
and proceeds to the trigger layer. In the trigger layer, for each detected
trigger source, it advances one step in the scan list. After advancing
through all the channels/bits in the scan list, and reaching the arm
count, the scan is terminated and the instrument returns to the idle
state.
86
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Scanning
Idle State 
The instrument is considered to be in the idle state whenever it is not
operating within any one of the layers. When the instrument is taken out
of the idle state, the SCAN annunciator lights up and operation proceeds
to the arm layer. From the remote interface, the INITiate command
takes the instrument out of the idle state.
Arm Layer 
The instrument requires an arm source to allow operation to proceed into
4
the trigger layer. You can select the arm source from the following:
•
TIMER — with timer arm source selected, the instrument will not
proceed to the trigger layer unless the specified time interval has
elapsed.
•
IMM — with IMM (default) arm source selected, operation
immediately proceeds to the trigger layer as soon as the instrument is
taken out of the idle state.
•
BUS — with bus arm source selected, the instrument will not proceed
to the trigger layer unless a GET or a *TRG command is received, or
Step on the front-panel is pressed.
•
EXT — with external (EXT) arm source selected, the instrument will
not proceed to the trigger layer unless an external trigger is received
from the specified trigger-in line.
•
MIX — with mix arm source selected, the instrument will not proceed
to the trigger layer unless a BUS event or EXTernal event occurs.
•
HOLD — with hold arm source selected, the instrument will wait for
a TRIGger:IMMediate command before proceeding.
87
4
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Scanning
Trigger Layer 
In trigger layer, the instrument requires a trigger source to open the
previous channel and then close the next one listed in the scan list. You
can use one of the following trigger sources:
4
•
TIMER — with timer trigger source selected, the scan list advances
when the specified time interval has elapsed.
•
IMM — with IMM (default) trigger source selected, the scan list
advances as soon as the previous channel is opened.
•
BUS — with bus trigger source selected, the scan list advances when
a GET or a *TRG command is received, or Step on the front-panel is
pressed.
•
EXT — with external (EXT) trigger source selected, the scan list
advances when an external trigger is received from the specified
trigger-in line.
•
MIX — with mix trigger source selected, the scan list advances when
a BUS event or EXTernal event occurs.
•
HOLD — with hold trigger source selected, the scan list advances
when a TRIGger:IMMediate command is received.
88
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Scanning
Creating a Scan List
Before initiating a scan, a scan list must be set up. The instrument scans
the specified channels automatically in the same order of the scan list.
•
The scan list is automatically cleared whenever the instrument is
turned off or reset. You can also clear the scan list by pressing
Shift+S.List.
•
Front-Panel Operation: Press S.List, the CONFIG annunciator will4
light. The display will show “ADD TO SCAN”. Press Enter to begin
building the scan list. Select each desired channel and press Enter to
add the channel to the scan list. As channels are added, an asterisk is
shown in the display to indicate the channel is a part of the scan list.
SELECT
SELECT
SELECT
•
4
Press S.List. Press Enter.
ADD TO SCAN
*
101
Select a channel to add.
101
Press Enter.
203
Select the next channel to add.
Remote Interface Operation: You may use single channels, ranges of
channel, or stored setups in the scan list. Set up a scan list with one
command as follows:
[ROUTe]:SCAN (@100,104:109,411,1)
!Create scan list to include
channel 100, channels 104
through 109, bit channel
411, and stored state 1.
Note
Stored states may be used in scan lists. Stored states are discussed in
more detail beginning on page 106.
89
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Scanning
Configuring a Scan
The scan procedure is controlled by specifying an arm source, a trigger
source, and the number of sweeps (a sweep is one pass through the scan
list). Delay times can also be configured.
•
You can specify a delay time (from 0 to 99999.999 seconds, with 1 ms
resolution) between when a channel is closed and when the next
operation begins (and, if configured, a trigger out pulse is sent). The
delay time can be set individually for each channel in the scan list, or
one delay can be set for all channels in the scan list. Note that, even if
the trigger source is set to IMMediate, the scan list will not advance
until the delay time is met.
•
When you are using the trigger source TIMer and a delay time, they
have a relationship as shown in the following diagram. If you set the
delay time longer than the TIMer interval, the scan list will not
advance until the delay time is met.
90
Timer
Ne
xt o
per
atio
n
pul
s
Ex
ter
nal
trig
ger
De
lay
ti
Re
lay
rel
ay
Delay time
beg
ins
You can specify the number of times (between 1 and 99999) the
instrument is to sweep through the scan list. When the specified
number is reached, the scan stops.
e
•
me
-ou
t
You can select any one of the six trigger sources (listed on page 88) to
advance to the next channel in the scan list. IMM (immediate) is the
default trigger source. If TIMer trigger source is selected, the elapsed
time can be set from 0 to 99999.999 seconds, with a 1 ms resolution.
is c
los
ed
•
com
ma
nd
You can select any one of the six arm sources (listed on page 87) to
control the onset of each sweep through the scan list. IMM
(immediate) is the default arm source. If TIMer arm source is
selected, the elapsed time can be set from 0 to 99999.999 seconds,
with a 1 ms resolution.
Clo
se
a
4
•
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Scanning
•
Front-Panel Operation: Use the S.List menu to set the scan
configuration as shown below.
CONFIG SCAN
ARM: IMM
COUNT: 00001
Press S.List. Turn knob. Press Enter.
Turn the knob to select the arm source
Press Enter.
Use arrow keys and knob to
select the arm count. Press Enter.
4
TRIG: IMM
Turn the knob to select the trigger
source. Press Enter.
DELAY TIME
Turn the knob to select DELAY TIME.
Press Enter.
SET ALL
Turn the knob to select ALL channels
or individual channels. Press Enter.
00000.0000 SECS
3499
Use arrow keys and knob to
select the delay time. Press Enter.
Press S.List to exit the menu.
If you select TIMER for either arm source or trigger source, an
additional menu is shown that enables you to set the time in seconds.
•
Remote Interface Operation: The following code sets the scan sweep to
immediately start, the channel scan is advanced by the timer, and 10
sweeps of the scan list will occur. A 2 second delay is also set for
channel 101.
ARM:SOURce IMMediate
ARM:COUNt 10
TRIGger:SOURce TIMer
TRIGger:TIMer 5
ROUTe:CHANnel:DELAY 2,(@101)
! Set arm source to IMM.
! Set arm count to 10 times.
! Set trigger source to TIMer.
! Set the trigger timer to 5
seconds.
! Set a 2 second time delay for
channel 101.
91
4
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Scanning
Performing a Scan
Once you set up a scan list and configure the scan, the actual scan can be
performed.
4
•
If a scan list contains a non-existing channel, the scan cannot be
performed and an error will occur.
•
If a scan list contains a channel on a digital I/O module that does not
work in Mode #1 or Mode #2, the scan cannot be performed and an
error will occur (see page 98 for more information about modes).
•
If a stored channel setup in the scan list does not match the current
hardware configuration, the scan cannot be performed and an error
will occur.
•
Front-Panel Operation: Press Scan to begin the scan operation. If you
have set the arm source and trigger source to IMMediate, the scan
will begin when the key is pressed. If you have configured other arm
or trigger sources, the scan will begin when the source criteria are
met.
Stop a scan in progress by pressing Shift+Scan. The last channel
closed in the scan list will remain closed. You cannot pause and then
continue a scan. You must start the scan operation over.
Press Step to start and step through the channels in the scan list, one
channel at a time.
•
Remote Interface Operation: Use the commands shown below to begin
a scan or stop a scan in progress. If you abort a scan in progress, the
last channel closed in the scan list will remain closed. You cannot
pause and then continue a scan. You must start the scan operation
over. 

The INITiate command moves the instrument from the idle state to
the arm layer. The arm source and trigger source will control the
actual beginning of the scan.
INITiate
ABORt
92
!Initiate the scan.
!Stop the scan.
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Scanning
Using External Triggering
Two control lines are provided in the rear panel mini-DIN connector:
external trigger in and external trigger out. These lines can be used
individually or combined to synchronize a scan list with an external
instrument (such as a DMM). The figure below shows this connection.
The 3499A/B/C can be configured to output a trigger pulse to notify the
external instrument whenever a channel is closed. The arm or trigger
source is then configured as either EXT or MIX so that the 3499A/B/C can
4
receive the notification from the external instrument to advance to the
next channel in the scan list.
Agilent 3499B
External DMM
4
VM Complete Out
1
3
2
4
Ext Trig In
5
8 (Ext.Trig.Out)
6
7
(Ext.Trig.In)
•
In addition to the Ext.Trig.In and Ext.Trig.Out pair provided on the
rear panel of the mainframe, the EI (external increment) and CC
(channel closed) pair on a 44474A module (see page 248) can also be
used to synchronize. Specify either Slot 0 or the slot in which a
44474A module is installed to indicate which lines are to be used.
•
Both the built-in trigger lines and the EI/CC lines on the 44474A are
TTL compatible.
•
Once enabled, the selected trigger-in line is immediately ready to
accept the trigger signal from the external instrument. Enabling or
disabling a trigger source from the front-panel sets both the trigger in
and trigger out functions. On the remote interface, the trigger out
function can be controlled independently.
93
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Scanning
•
Front-Panel Operation: Press Menu, use the knob to select 
“CONF EXT TRIG” and press Enter. Select either slot 0 (built-in
external trigger) or the slot where a 44474A is installed and press
Enter. Enable or disable the pair of trigger lines and press Enter.
Press the Menu key again to exit the menu. 

Press S.List, select “CONFIG SCAN”, and configure the arm source
or trigger source as either EXT or MIX.
•
Remote Interface Operation: The following code segment will set up
the 3499A/B/C to synchronize with an external instrument.
CONFigure:EXTernal:TRIGger:SOURce 0
! Select to use the built-in
ext.trig.in and ext.trig.out
lines.
CONFigure:EXTernal:TRIGger:OUTPut 1
! Enable to output a trigger
pulse on the ext.trig.out
line.
ARM:SOURce EXT
! Set arm source to EXT.
TRIGger:SOURce EXT
! Set trigger source to EXT.
4
94
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Digital I/O Operation
Digital I/O Operation
The digital input/output is well-suited for monitoring and controlling
external devices. You may use the built-in digital I/O bits or port (on the
rear panel), one or more digital I/O modules, or a multifunction modules
with a DIO function. In the following context, multifunction modules
refer to those with a DIO function.
Note
4
•
The built-in digital I/O (control board) consists of four bits which can
be operated either independently as four bit channels (numbered 091
through 094) or as one 4-bit port (numbered 090).
•
The plug-in digital I/O modules and multifunction modules usually
consist of several 8-, 16-, and/or 32-bit ports. These ports can be
operated independently, which means one port can be used for output
operation, while others can be used for input. However, all bits within
a same 8-bit port are dependent. If one bit of a port is used for input
or output operation, then all other bits of the same port can only be
used for the same operation.
For more information about a specific digital I/O module, refer to “Plugin Modules” starting on page 173.
Digital I/O Configuration
•
Parameters such as flow control mode, control line polarity (PCTL),
flag line polarity (PFLG), and I/O direction line polarity, are all
configured for the plug-in digital I/O modules and multifunction
modules. However, these DO NOT apply to the built-in 4-bit 
digital I/O (on the rear panel).
•
The data line polarity of any 8-bit port (or the 4-bit built-in port) can
be configured from the front-panel. However, using the remote
interface, the data line polarity of any ports (8-, 16-, or 32-bit) can be
configured.
•
Data display format of any 8-bit port, binary or decimal (default), can
only be specified from the front-panel. Once specified, the format
applies to all input and output operations on the same port.
•
When the instrument is turned on or reset, the handshake mode is
set to Mode #1 and the polarities of all configured lines are positive.
More information about handshake modes is given starting on 
page 98.
95
4
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Digital I/O Operation
•
Note
4
Front-Panel Operation: Select a digital I/O module and press Mode.
“CONFIG DIO” is shown in the display. Press Enter to show the
second-level menu and begin the configuration.
Be sure to select the module, not a port or bit. The options on this menu
are only available when the module is selected.
Select a DIO module.
N2263A
4
CONFIG DIO
4
MODE 1
4
Select flow control mode. Press Enter.
CONT POL POS
4
Select the control line polarity. Press Enter.
FLAG POL POS
4
Select the flag line polarity. Press Enter.
I/O POL POS
4
Select the I/O direction line polarity. Press Enter.
Press Mode.
Press Mode again to exit the menu.
Configure a port. Select a digital I/O port, then press Mode, the
CONFIG annunciator lights up. When “DATA POLARITY” appears
in the display, press Enter to set data line polarity and/or use the
knob to select “DISP FORMAT” and press Enter to set data display
format for the port.
96
DIN
401
DATA POLARITY
NEG POLARITY
or
DIN
401
401
DISP FORMAT
401
401
BINARY
401
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Digital I/O Operation
•
Remote Interface Operation: Set the flow control parameters using the
following SCPI commands. These examples assume a digital I/O
module is installed in slot 4.
! Set the flow control mode to
Mode 1.
SOURce:DIGital:CONTrol:POLarity 4,1
! Set the PCTL line polarity to
negative.
4
SOURce:DIGital:FLAG:POLarity 4,0
! Set the PFLG line polarity to
positive.
SOURce:DIGital:IO:POLarity 4,1
! Set the I/O Direction line
polarity to negative.
SOURce:DIGital:MODE 4,1
4
Set the data line polarity using the following command.
SOURce:DIGital:DATA:BYTE:POLarity 400, POS
! Set the data line polarity of
8-bit Port 400 to positive.
97
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Digital I/O Operation
About Flow Control Modes (Handshake)
Five flow control modes are available for Digital I/O operations. Some
modes use one or more of the three flow control lines: I/O Direction,
PFLG, and PCTL. Select the flow control you need for your digital input/
output applications.
Note
The polarity of the flow control lines is assumed to be positive (the
default) in the following diagrams and discussions.
Handshake
Mode
Mode
Number
Definition
4
98
Notes
1
Static mode #1
Default handshake mode.
2
Static mode #2
Read what was written.
3
Read or Write
and strobe
If you set a port to this mode, you cannot use
the port in a scan list or use card pairing
(ROUTe:CPAir).
4
Read and write
strobe
If you set a port to this mode, you cannot use
the port in a scan list or use card pairing
(ROUTe:CPAir).
5
Full handshake
If you set a port to this mode, you cannot use
the port in a scan list or use card pairing
(ROUTe:CPAir).
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Digital I/O Operation
Static Mode #1 
Static Mode #1 is the default mode. In this mode, data is transferred
statically, there is no read or write strobe pulses or handshaking. The I/O
Direction line is active and indicates direction of transfer. This is shown
in the following timing diagrams.
Write Operation
(CLOSE, DWRITE, etc.)
DATA LINES
DATA VALID
4
t1 = I/O input to data
valid (1ms minimum)
I/O DIRECTION
t1 (>1ms)
Approximately 1 ms after the I/O direction line goes to a low
state, the digital I/O module takes control of the data lines.
Read Operation
(DREAD, etc.)
DATA LINES
4
DATA VALID
I/O DIRECTION
t1
100s
t2
150s
t1 = Data bus floated
to I/O input
(100 s minimum)
t2 = I/O input to data
latched (150 s
minimum)
100 s after the 3499A/B/C is instructed to read the data lines, it releases
control of the lines and the I/O direction line goes to a high state. 150 s
later the data is actually read (latched).
Static Mode #2 
Static Mode #2 acts just like Mode #1 except the output lines are not
disabled during an input operation. This means that if a port is written
to and then read from, the data read will be that which was just written
to it. It is possible, however, that external devices might load the lines
and cause a false read.
Timing for the I/O direction line is as shown in Mode #1 for write
operations. For read operations, the I/O direction line does not change.
99
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Digital I/O Operation
Read or Write and Strobe Mode #3 
In this mode, the I/O direction line is still used to indicate direction of
transfer (input or output) but the PCTL (Peripheral control) line is used
to strobe the data.
During a write operation, where the 3499A/B/C writes the data to some
external device, the strobe pulse signifies that the data on the 16 or 32
data I/O lines is valid. This is shown in the following timing diagram.
DATA LINES
DATA VALID
Write Operation
I/O DIRECTION
STROBE (PCTL LINE)
4
t1
1ms
t2
25 s
t3
20 s
t1 = Time from I/O line
low to output enable
(1 ms minimum)
t2 = Time from output
enable to start of
strobe (25 s
minimum)
t3 = Strobe pulse width
(20 s minimum)
A Strobe pulse signifies that the data on the data lines is valid. During a
write operation, the device receiving the data is triggered by the strobe.
The Strobe pulse is used during a read operation to signify that the
3499A/B/C has completed the read operation. This is shown in the
following diagram.
DATA VALID
DATA LINES
Read Operation
I/O DIRECTION
STROBE (PCTL LINE)
t1
100 s
t2
150 s
t3
20 s
t1 = Time from output
disable to I/O line
high (100 s min)
t2 = Time from I/O line
high to start of
Strobe (150 s
minimum)
t3 = Strobe pulse width
(20 s minimum)
When used during a Read operation, the Strobe pulse signifies that the
3499A/B/C has latched (read) the data from the data lines.
100
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Digital I/O Operation
Read and Write Strobe Mode #4 
Read and Write Strobe Mode #4 uses the I/O direction line as a Strobe
pulse to indicate writing operations. The PCTL line is used to indicate
Read operations. It is thus similar to the R/W and Strobe Mode #3 except
separate control lines are used for the Strobe pulses and there is no I/O
direction line.
DATA LINES
4
DATA VALID
Write Operation
t1 = Time from data
valid to write
Strobe
(40 s minimum)
IO DIRECTION (WR)
t1
40 s
t2
20 s
t2 = Strobe pulse width
(20 s minimum)
The IO Direction line is used to indicate that the data is valid on the data bus lines.
IO Direction is used to trigger the receiving device.
DATA VALID
DATA LINES
Read Operation
PCTL (RD) LINE
t1
100 s
t2
20 s
t1 = Time from output
disable to read
Strobe (100 s
minimum)
t2 = Strobe pulse width
(20 s minimum)
As in Mode #3, the PCTL (RD) line is used to indicate to the sending
device that the 3499A/B/C has latched (read) the data.
101
4
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Digital I/O Operation
Full Handshake Mode #5 
Handshake Mode #5 provides a complete two wire handshake with a
data direction line. During write operations, the PCTL line indicates that
output data is valid; during read operations, it indicates that the digital
I/O module (i.e. N2263A) is “ready for data”. The PFLG line is used by
the peripheral device to indicate “ready for data” during write operations
or “data valid” for read operations.
For this discussion, write operations mean the plug-in digital I/O module
is controlling the data lines. Read operations mean external devices
control the data lines and the digital I/O module reads the data and
controls the PCTL/RD line.
4
t1 = Time from I/O line
low to check for
PFLG low
(1 ms minimum)
Write Operation
DATA LINES
DATA VALID
t2 = Time from PFLG
low to data valid
(40 s minimum)
I/O DIRECTION
t3 = Time from data valid
to PCTL low
(30 s minimum)
PCTL LINE
t4 = Time from PCTL low
to check for PFLG
high (40 s minimum)
PFLG LINE
t1
1 ms
t2
40 s
t3
30 s
t4
40 s
t5
35 s
t5 = Time from PFLG
to PCTL high
(35 s minimum)
The complete handshaking sequence for Mode #5 is as follows: The 3499A/B/C checks
to see if the receiving device has set the PFLG line low, this indicates the receiving
device is ready to accept data. When PFLG is low, the 3499A/B/C sets the data on the
data bus and sets PCTL low. The 3499A/B/C then waits for the receiving device to set
PFLG high, indicating that it has latched the data. To complete the handshake, the
3499A/B/C sets PCTL high.
102
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Digital I/O Operation
Read Operation
DATA VALID
LATCHED
DATA LINES
I/O DIRECTION
t1 = Time from output
disable to I/O line
high (100 s minimum)
t2 = Time from I/O line
high to check for
PFLG low
(45 s minimum)
PCTL LINE
t3 = Time from PFLG low
to check for PCTL
low (50 s minimum)
PFLG LINE
t4 = Time from PCTL low
to check PFLG
high (40 s minimum)
t1
100 s
t2
45 s
t3
t4
t5
50 s 40 s 35 s
4
t5 = Time from PFLG
high to PCTL high
and data latched
(35 s minimum)
4
As with the Write operation, the 3499A/B/C begins by testing PFLG for a
low state, indicating that the data is valid. When PFLG is low, the 
3499A/B/C sets PCTL low and waits for PFLG to go high. The 3499A/B/C
will set PCTL high to indicate that it has completed the data read operation.
Data on the data bus must remain valid until after the 3499A/B/C sets
PCTL high.
103
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Digital I/O Operation
Digital Input Operation
4
•
From the front-panel, you can read data from the built-in digital I/O
bits/port (numbered 090 through 094) or any one of the 8-bit ports on
a digital I/O module or multifunction module.
•
From the remote interface, you can read data from the individual bit
channels and 8-, 16-, or 32-bit ports on a digital I/O module or
multifunction module, as well as from the built-in digital I/O bits/port
(numbered 090 through 094).
•
Instrument reset will set all digital I/O ports in the instrument as
input ports. Pressing Card Reset or issuing a SYST:CPON command
will set all ports on the specified module as input ports (ports on other
modules are not affected).
•
Front-Panel Operation: Select an 8-bit digital I/O port, press Read to
read the data from the port. The data can be displayed as either
decimal or binary (see page 34).
•
Remote Interface Operation: Use the following command to read an
individual bit (bit 6) on a module in slot 4. A “0” (bit cleared) or a “1”
(bit set) will be returned.
SENSe:DIGital:DATA:BIT? 406
! Read the bit channel 406.
The following commands read values on 8-, 16-, and 32-bit ports:
SENSe:DIGital:DATA:BYTE:VALue? 400
! Read the 8-bit Port 400.
SENSe:DIGital:DATA:WORD:VALue? 400
! Read the 16-bit Port 400.
SENSe:DIGital:DATA:LWORD:VALue? 400
! Read the 32-bit Port 400.
The range of possible returned values is shown:
Parameter
Decimal Range
Hex range
BYTE
0 to 255
00h to FFh
WORD
-32768 to 32767
-8000h to 7FFFh
LWORD
-231 to (231 -1)
-80000000h to 7FFFFFFFh
WORD values greater then 32767 and LWORD values greater then
for (231 -1) are returned as negative numbers. These values are in 2’s
complement form.
104
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Digital I/O Operation
Digital Output Operation
•
From the front-panel, you can write data to the built-in digital I/O
bits/port (numbered 090 through 094) or any one of the 8-bit ports on
a digital I/O module or multifunction module.
•
From the remote interface, you can write data to individual bit
channels and 8-, 16-, or 32-bit ports on a digital I/O module or
multifunction module, as well as to the built-in digital I/O bits/port
4
(numbered 090 through 094).
•
Instrument reset will set all digital I/O ports in the instrument as
input ports. Pressing Card Reset or issuing a SYST:CPON command
will set all ports on the specified module as input ports (ports on other
modules are not affected).
•
Front-Panel Operation: Select an 8-bit port, press Write, the data
from the last operation (read or write) will be displayed. Edit the data
to the desired value and press Enter to write the data to the port. To
cancel the write operation, press Write again instead of Enter. You
can edit the data in either binary or decimal form (see page 34).
•
Remote Interface Operation: The following commands write an
individual bit.
SOURce:DIGital:DATA:BIT 409,1 ! Write 1 to bit channel 409.
SOURce:DIGital:DATA:BIT 409,0 ! Write 0 to bit channel 409.
The following commands write date to 8-, 16-, and 32-bit ports.
SOURCE:DIGital:DATA:BYTE 400,128
! Write decimal 128 to 8-bit
port 400.
SOURCE:DIGital:DATA:WORD 400,21845
! Write decimal 21845 to 16bit port 400.
SOURCE:DIGital:DATA:LWORD 400, -2114
! Write decimal 4294965182
to 32-bit port 400.
WORD values greater then 32767 and LWORD values greater then
for (231 -1) are sent as negative numbers. These values are in 2’s
complement form.
105
4
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
State Storage
State Storage
The 3499A/B/C provides the capability to store setups, and then recall
them to put the instrument back into a known configuration.
Information that can be stored includes:
4
•
•
•
•
•
Status of all relay channels (open or closed)
Status of digital I/O ports (input or output, flow control, etc.)
Special module configurations (2-wire, card pair, etc.)
Scan lists and configuration (arm source, trigger source, etc.)
Remote interface settings (address, baud, etc.)
Additionally, you can include a stored state in a scan list as a channel.
Firmware Revision Differences
State storage behavior differs depending upon the firmware revision of
your 3499A/B/C (see page 59).
•
Firmware revision 1.0 must be upgraded. Please contact your nearest
Agilent Technologies Office for details.
•
Firmware revisions 2.0 and 3.0 allow up to 10 states to be stored.
Firmware revision 4.0 allows up to 50 stored states.
•
Stored states are lost if power is removed for firmware revisions 2.0
and 3.0. Stored states are preserved when power is removed for
firmware revision 4.0.
•
Firmware revision 4.0 allows you store a state and apply that state
when power is applied to the instrument.
•
Storage memory locations are numbered 01 to 10 for Firmware
revision 2.0 and 3.0. Memory locations are number 01 to 50 for
Firmware revision 4.0.
•
Before recalling a stored setup, the instrument verifies that all
module types and slot assignment match the setup. If a mismatch is
detected, an error (“RECALL FAILED”) will occur.
106
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
State Storage
Firmware Revision Differences (continued)
•
An instrument reset does not affect the stored instrument setup
information.
•
All stored setups will be cleared if the system mode is changed (for
example, to 3488A mode).
•
Firmware revision 3.0 allows instrument operation in either SCPI or
3488 mode, not both. The mode is selected when the firmware is
4
loaded.
To Store an Instrument State
Firmware revision 2.0 and 3.0 allow up to 10 stored states. Firmware
revision 4.0 allows up to 50 stored states. Set the instrument to the state
you want to store.
•
Front-Panel Operation: To store an instrument setup, press 
Shift + Recall, select a memory location, and press Enter. To cancel
the store operation, press Recall again instead of Enter.
•
Remote Interface Operation:
*SAV 1
Note
! Store an instrument setup in
memory location 1.
Approximately 1 second is required to store an instrument setup into an
Agilent 3499A/B/C with Firmware REV 4.0. To avoid errors in when
programming, be sure to allow a 1 second interval between the store and
recall operations.
To Recall an Instrument State
You can recall a previously stored instrument setup.
•
Front-Panel Operation: To recall a stored setup, press Recall, select
the memory location to be recalled, and press Enter. To cancel the
recall operation, press Recall again instead of Enter.
•
Remote Interface Operation:
*RCL 1
! Recall a previously stored
setup from memory 
location 1.
107
4
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Error Conditions
Error Conditions
When an error occurs, the 3499A/B/C will beep and the ERROR
annunciator on the front-panel lights up. This indicates one or more
command syntax or hardware errors have been detected.
•
Up to 10 errors can be stored in the instrument error queue. Errors
are retrieved in a first-in-first-out (FIFO) manner, which means the
first error returned is the first error that was stored.
•
If more than 10 errors have occurred, the last error stored in the
queue (the most recent error) is replaced with “-350 QUEUE
OVERFLOW”. No additional errors are stored until you remove
errors from the queue. If no errors have occurred when you read the
error queue, the instrument responds with “NO ERROR”.
•
The error queue will be cleared automatically once you read the
queue, change the system mode, send the *CLS command, or cycle
power on the instrument. However, a module reset or an instrument
reset will not clear the error queue.
•
Front-Panel Operation: Press View, select “ERROR”, and press
Enter. The first error recorded is displayed. Use the arrow key to
scroll through the entire error message, then turn the knob to view
other errors in the error queue.
•
Remote Interface Operation: The errors can be returned as integers or
as variant values. When an integer value is returned, you need to
associate the integer value with the error (refer to “Error Messages”
on page 165). If you return a variant value, the error number and
error string are returned. To detect when errors occur using the
remote interface, use the SCPI status system (see page 148 for more
information).
4
SYSTem:ERRor?
108
! Query the error queue for the
first error.
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Self-Test
Self-Test
The 3499A/B/C can perform a self-test to verify that it is in proper
operation.
•
If the self-test is successful, “PASSED” will be displayed on the frontpanel. Otherwise, the reason of the failure will be displayed. For
details of all self-test failures, refer to “Self-Test Errors” on page 172.
4
•
Front-Panel Operation: Press Menu, use the knob to select
“SELFTEST”, and press Enter to perform a self-test.
•
Remote Interface Operation:
*TST?
! Returns zero if the test is
successful, or non-zero if it
fails.
109
4
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Display Control
Display Control
You can turn off the 3499A/B/C display (for security or increased
processing speed for example). You can also write a message of up to 13
characters to the front-panel display.
Note
4
The display cannot be turned off from the front-panel.
•
When the display is turned off, the entire front-panel display goes
blank except for the ADRS and RMT annunciators (the ERROR
annunciator will also be on if there are errors), and all keys except
Local are locked.
•
If the display is turned off, pressing Local causes the instrument to
return to local operation, the display will be turned back on.
•
The display is automatically turned on when power is cycled, or after
a *RST command.
•
When the display is on, you can send a message (up to 13 characters)
to display on the front-panel from the remote interface. If you attempt
to send more than 13 characters, only the first 13 characters can be
displayed. The characters can be letters (A-Z), numbers (0-9), and
some special characters (“ ‘ space ( ) * + - , . : ; / \).
•
Remote Interface Operation:
DIAGnostic:DISPlay:STATe OFF
! Turn off the display.
DIAGnostic:DISPlay:STATe ON
! Turn on the display.
DIAGnostic:DISPlay “Scan finished”
! Display the message on the
front-panel.
110
Chapter 4 Features and Functions
Relay Cycle Counts
Relay Cycle Counts
The Agilent 3499A/B/C can read and track the relay cycle counts on some
plug-in modules. This feature can be very useful in switching systems to
track relay failures and predict system maintenance requirements.
•
This feature is supported by the Agilent N2260A, N2261A, N2262A,
N2264A, N2265A, N2266A, N2267A, N2268A, N2270A, N2272A, 4
N2276A, and N2280A/81A/82A modules.
•
The cycle counts of the tree relays (s98 & s99) on an N2260A or
N2266A can also be queried.
•
Front-Panel Operation: Press View, use the knob to select “RELAY
CYCLES”, and press Enter. Turn the knob to select the relay channel
of interest. The display shows the channel cycle count.
•
Remote Interface Operation: Integer values are returned to indicate
the cycle count. If you request more than one value, the integers are
returned as comma separated values in the same order as the
channel in the query command.
DIAGnostic:RELay:CYCLes? (@101)
! Query relay cycle count of
channel 101.
DIAGnostic:RELay:CYCLes? (@101:112)
! Query the relay cycle count
of the range of channels
from 101 to 112.
You can also query for the maximum relay count on a module. The
returned value is the highest count on a module, but you cannot
determine which relay the count applies to with this command.
DIAGnostic:RELay:CYCLes:MAX? 1 ! Query the maximum relay
cycle count of the module in
slot 1.
111
4
To Select the System Mode
The instrument can be operated in either SCPI mode or 3488A mode
(except Firmware REV 3.0, see page 59 for more details). When shipped
from the factory, the instrument is set to the SCPI mode. Perform the
following procedure to select the desired system mode for the instrument
before any operation.
1. Press Menu, the CONFIG annunciator lights up. Turn the knob
until “SYSTEM MODE” is displayed, then press Enter.
SYSTEM MODE
2. Turn the knob until the desired system mode (i.e. 3488A MODE) is
displayed, then press Enter.
HP 3488A MODE
4
3. The instrument will be reset if the system mode has been changed.
Otherwise, it retains the current mode and you can press Menu
again to exit this operation.
Note
Switching between SCPI mode and 3488A mode will reset the
instrument to the factory default settings, except the GPIB address
which will retain its last setting.
This manual describes programming in the SCPI mode. For information
about the 3488 programming mode please visit www.agilent.com.
112
5
5
Remote Interface Reference
Remote Interface Reference
This chapter describes SCPI Commands (Standard Commands for
Programmable Instruments) and summarizes IEEE 488.2 Common
Commands applicable to the Agilent 3499A/B/C Switch/Control System.
The chapter contents include:
5
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SCPI Command Syntax, on page 115
3499A/B/C SCPI Alphabetical Reference, on page 116
3499A/B/C SCPI Commands Functionally Grouped, on page 122
Switch Commands, on page 127
Specific Plug-in Module Commands, on page 129
Scanning Commands, on page 132
Digital I/O Commands, on page 139
State Storage Commands, on page 147
Status System Commands, on page 148
System Information Commands, on page 153
System-Level Control Commands, on page 156
RS-232 Commands, on page 160
About the SCPI Language, on page 161
114
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
SCPI Command Syntax
SCPI Command Syntax
Throughout this manual, the following conventions are used for SCPI
command syntax for remote interface programming.
•
•
•
Square brackets ([ ]) indicate optional keywords or parameters.
•
A vertical bar ( | ) separates multiple parameters.
Braces ({ }) enclose parameter choices within a command string.
4
Angle brackets (< >) enclose parameters for which you must specify a
value.
Rules for Using a Channel or Scan List
Many of the SCPI commands include a channel list or scan list
parameter which allows you to specify one or more channels. The
channel number has the form (@snn), where s is the slot number and nn
is the channel number. You can specify a slot, a single channel, multiple
channels, or a range of channels as described below.
•
The following command closes a single channel (channel 11) on the
module installed in slot 1:
ROUT:CLOS (@111)
•
The following command closes multiple channels on modules in slots
1 and 2:
ROUT:CLOS (@111,112,203,204)
•
The following command closes a range of channels. When you specify
a range of channels, the range may contain invalid channels (they are
ignored), but the first and last channel in the list must be valid.
ROUT:CLOS (@101:111)
•
Additional information about channel and slot numbering is given on
page 70.
115
5
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
3499A/B/C SCPI Alphabetical Reference
3499A/B/C SCPI Alphabetical Reference
Note
Default command parameters are shown in bold.
ABORt
Abort a scan in progress regardless of the trigger source. See page 138.
ARM
:SOURce <BUS|EXTernal|IMMediate|TIMer|MIX|HOLD>
Set trigger source in ARM layer. See page 134.
:SOURce?
Query trigger source in ARM layer. See page 134.
:COUNt <number>[MIN|MAX]
Set counter in ARM layer. See page 134.
:COUNt? [MIN|MAX]
Query counter in ARM layer. See page 134.
:TIMer <seconds>|MIN|MAX
5
Set timer for sweep-to-sweep (sweeping). See page 135.
:TIMer?
Query timer in arm layer. See page 135.
CONFigure
Command Summary
:EXTernal[:TRIGger]:SOURce <number>
Select the trigger source. See page 137.
:EXTernal[:TRIGger]:SOURce?
Query the trigger source. See page 137.
:EXTernal[:TRIGger][:OUTPut] <0|1|OFF|ON>
Turn off/on the external trigger output. See page 137.
:EXTernal[:TRIGger][:OUTPut]?
Query state of external trigger output. See page 137.
116
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
3499A/B/C SCPI Alphabetical Reference
DIAGnostic
:DISPlay[:INFOrmation] <message>
Display message on front panel. See page 158.
:DISPlay:STATe <0|1|OFF|ON>
Disable/Enable display. See page 158.
:DISPlay:STATe?
Query state of display. See page 158.
:MONitor <slot>|<channel>|<port>|-1
4
Monitor a slot or a channel/port, or disable a monitor. See page 159.
:MONitor?
Query which slot or channel is monitored. See page 159.
[:RELay]:CYCLes? <channel_list>
Query relay cycle of the specified channels. See page 155.
[:RELay]:CYCLes:MAX? <slot>
Query maximum cycles of channel relays. See page 155.
[:RELay]:CYCLes:CLEar <channel_list>
Clear channel relay cycle. See page 155.
5
SPEEK? <slot>,<register>
Read a 8-bit data from the <register> specified. See page 131.
SPOKE <slot>,<register>,<data>
Write a 8-bit data to the <register> specified. See page 131.
Start a scanning cycle. See page 138.
Command Summary
INITiate
[ROUTe:]
[CHANnel:]DELay <seconds>,<channel_list>|ALL
Set channel-to-channel interval. See page 136.
[CHANnel:]DELay? <channel_list>
Query channel-to-channel interval. See page 136.
CLOSe <channel_list>
Close one or multiple channels. See page 127.
CLOSe? <channel_list>
Queries relay closed state. See page 127.
CLOSe:STATe?
Query all closed relays. See page 128.
CPAir <slot1>,<slot2>|-1
Pair two cards of the same type or cancel a pair. See page 129.
117
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
3499A/B/C SCPI Alphabetical Reference
CPAir?
Query the paired cards. See page 129.
FUNCtion <slot>,<1|2|3|4|WIRE1|WIRE2|BIWIRE2|WIRE4>
Set function mode for N2260A. See page 130.
FUNCtion? <slot>
Query the function mode for N2260A. See page 130.
[ROUTe:] (continued)
OPEN <channel_list>|ALL
Open one, multiple or all channels. See page 128.
OPEN? <channel_list>
Query channels open state. See page 128.
SCAN[:LIST] <scan_list>
Set a sequence of channels to be scanned. See page 132.
SCAN[:LIST]?
Query the scan list. See page 132.
SCAN CLEar
Clear the scan list. See page 132.
5
SCAN:SIZE?
Query the size of the scan list. See page 132.
SOURce:DIGital
Command Summary
:MODE <slot>,<mode>
Set the digital I/O mode. See page 140.
:MODE? <slot>
Query the digital I/O mode. See page 140.
:CONTrol:POLarity <slot>,<polarity>
Set the polarity of control lines. See page 141.
:CONTrol:POLarity? <slot>
Query the polarity of control lines. See page 141.
:FLAG:POLarity <slot>,<polarity>
Set the polarity of flag lines. See page 141.
:FLAG:POLarity? <slot>
Query the polarity of flag lines. See page 141.



118
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
3499A/B/C SCPI Alphabetical Reference
SOURce:DIGital (continued)
:IO:POLarity? <slot>
Query the polarity of I/O direction lines. See page 141.
:IO:POLarity <slot>,<polarity>
Set the polarity of I/O direction lines. See page 141.
:DATA[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>]:POLarity <port>,<0|1|POS|NEG>
Set the polarity of a port. See page 141.
:DATA[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>]:POLarity? <port>
4
Query the polarity of a digital I/O port. See page 141.
:DATA:BIT <bit_port>,<0|1>
:Write a 0/1 to a digital I/O bit_port. See page 143.
:DATA[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>[:VALue]] <port>,<data>
Write a data to the specified port. See page 144.
:DATA[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>]:BLOCK <port>,<block_data>
Write a block of data to the specified port. See page 144.
:DATA:[<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>:]TRACE <port>,<sys_mem_name>
Write the data block in system memory to the specified digital I/O port.
See page 145.
5
:TRACe:DEFine <sys_mem_name>,<size>[,<fill>]
Define the size of data block. See page 145.
:TRACe:DEFine? <sys_mem_name>
Command Summary
Query the size of data block. See page 145.
:TRACe:CATalog?
Query the defined system memory name. See page 145.
:TRACe[:DATA] <sys_mem_name>,<block_data>
Write data to the data block in memory. See page 145.
:TRACe:DELete[:NAME] <sys_mem_name>
Remove one data block in system memory. See page 145.
:TRACe:DELete:ALL
Remove all data block in system memory. See page 145.
119
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
3499A/B/C SCPI Alphabetical Reference
SENSe:DIGital
:DATA:BIT? <bit_port>
Read the specified bit_port. See page 146.
:DATA[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>][:VALue]? <port>
Read data from the specified port. See page 146.
:DATA[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>]:BLOCK? <port>,<size>
Read a block of data from the specified port. See page 146.
:DATA:[<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>:]TRACE <port>,<sys_mem_name>
Read a block of data from the specified port to the predefined memory
block. See page 146.
:TRACe[:DATA]? <sys_mem_name>
Get the data block being read. See page 146.
STATus
:OPERation:CONDition?
Query the Operation Condition register. See page 150.
:OPERation:ENABle <unmask>
Set the Operation Enable register. See page 150.
5
:OPERation:ENABle?
Query the Operation Enable register. See page 150.
:OPERation[:EVENt]?
Command Summary
Query the Operation Event register. See page 150.
:PRESet
Clear the Standard Operation enable register. See page 150.
SYSMODE <0|1|SCPI|HP3488A>
Specify a system mode for the instrument. See page 159.
SYSMODE?
Query the system mode for the instrument. See page 159.
120
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
3499A/B/C SCPI Alphabetical Reference
SYSTem
:CPON <slot|ALL>
Reset the module to its power-on state. See page 157.
:CTYPe? <slot>
Query the card type and the serial number. See page 153.
:ERRor?
Query the error queue. See page 153.
4
:LOCal
Set the instrument to local mode. See page 160.
:REMote
Set the instrument to remote mode. See page 160.
:RWLock
Lock all keys on the front panel. See page 160.
:STATe:DELete <1-10>|ALL
Clear one or all the previously stored instrument states. See page 147.
:VERSion?
Query the firmware version of the instrument. See page 153.
5
TRIGger
[:IMMediate]
Software trigger for HOLD off triggering. See page 138.
:SOURce <BUS|EXTernal|IMMediate|TIMer|MIX|HOLD>
Command Summary
Select trigger source in trigger layer. See page 135.
:SOURce?
Query trigger source in trigger layer. See page 135.
:TIMer <seconds>|MINimum|MAXimum
Set timer for channel-to-channel (scanning). See page 136.
:TIMer? <MINimum|MAXimum>
Query timer in trigger layer. See page 136.
121
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
3499A/B/C SCPI Commands Functionally Grouped
3499A/B/C SCPI Commands Functionally
Grouped
Note
Default command parameters are shown in bold.
Switch
Commands
(see page 127 for more information)
Specific Plug-in
Commands
(see page 129 for more information)
5
Scan List
Commands
[ROUTe:]
CLOSe <channel_list>
CLOSe? <channel_list>
CLOSe:STATe?
OPEN <channel_list>|ALL
OPEN? <channel_list>
[ROUTe:]
CPAir <slot1>,<slot2>|-1
CPAir?
FUNCtion <slot>,<1|2|3|4|WIRE1|WIRE2|BIWIRE2|WIRE4>
FUNCtion? <slot>

DIAGnostic
:SPEEK? <slot>,<register>
:SPOKE <slot>,<register>,<data>
(see page 132 for more information)
[ROUTe:]
SCAN[:LIST] <scan_list>
SCAN[:LIST]?
SCAN CLEar
SCAN:SIZE?
122
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
3499A/B/C SCPI Commands Functionally Grouped
Scan
Configuration
Commands
(see page 134 for more information)
ARM
:SOURce <BUS|EXTernal|IMMediate|TIMer|MIX|HOLD>
:SOURce?
:COUNt <number>|MIN|MAX|INFinity
:COUNt? [MIN|MAX|INFinity]
:TIMer <seconds>|MIN|MAX
:TIMer? [MINimum|MAXimum]

TRIGger
:SOURce <BUS|EXTernal|IMMediate|TIMer|MIX|HOLD>
:SOURce?
:TIMer <seconds>|MIN|MAX
:TIMer? [MIN|MAX]

[ROUTe:]
[CHANnel:]DELay <seconds>,<channel_list>|ALL
[CHANnel:]DELay? <channel_list>

CONFigure
:EXTernal[:TRIGger]:SOURce <slot>
:EXTernal[:TRIGger]:SOURce?
:EXTernal[:TRIGger][:OUTPut] <0|1|OFF|ON>
:EXTernal[:TRIGger][:OUTPut]?
Scanning
Commands
(see page 138 for more information)
Digital Input
Commands
(see page 142 for more information)
4
5
INITiate

ABORt

TRIGger
[:IMMediate]

*TRG
SENSe:DIGital:DATA
:BIT? <bit_port>
[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>][:VALue]? <port>
[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>]:BLOCK? <port>,<size>
123
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
3499A/B/C SCPI Commands Functionally Grouped
5
Digital Output
Commands
(see page 143 for more information)
Digital
Configuration
Commands
(see page 140 for more information)
Digital I/O
Memory
Commands
SOURce:DIGital:DATA
:BIT <bit_port>,<0|1>
[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>][:VALue] <port>,<data>
[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>]:BLOCK <port>,<block_data>
SOURce:DIGital
:MODE <slot>,<mode>
:MODE? <slot>
:CONTrol:POLarity <slot>,<0|1|POS|NEG>
:CONTrol:POLarity? <slot>
:FLAG:POLarity <slot>,<0|1|POS|NEG>
:FLAG:POLarity? <slot>
:IO:POLarity <slot>,<0|1|POS|NEG>
:IO:POLarity? <slot>

SOURce:DIGital:DATA
[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>]:POLarity <port>,<0|1|POS|NEG>
[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>]:POLarity? <port>
(see page 145 for more information)
SOURce:DIGital:DATA
[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>]:TRACe <port>,<sys_mem_name>

SOURce:DIGital:TRACe
:DEFine <sys_mem_name>,<size>[,<fill>]
:DEFine? <sys_mem_name>
:DEFine:CATalog?
[:DATA] <sys_mem_name>,<block_data>
:DELete[:NAME] <sys_mem_name>
:DELete:ALL

SENSe:DIGital:DATA
[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>]:TRACe <port>,<sys_mem_name>

SENSe:DIGital
:TRACE[:DATA]? <sys_mem_name>
124
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
3499A/B/C SCPI Commands Functionally Grouped
State Storage
Commands
(see page 147 for more information)
Status System
Commands
(see page 148 for more information)
System
Information
Commands
*SAV <mem>

*RCL <mem>

SYSTem
:STATe:DELete <mem>|ALL
4
*CLS

*ESE <value>
*ESE?

*SRE <value>
*SRE?

*STB?

STATus
:OPERation:CONDition?
:OPERation:ENABle <unmask>
:OPERation:ENABle?
:OPERation[:EVENt]?
:PRESet
5
(see page 153 for more information)
*IDN?

SYSTem
:CTYPE? <slot>
:ERRor?
:VERSion?

DIAGnostic
[:RELay]:CYCLes? <channel_list>
[:RELay]:CYCLes:MAX? <slot>
[:RELay]:CYCLes:CLEar <channel_list>
125
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
3499A/B/C SCPI Commands Functionally Grouped
System-Level
Control
Commands
5
RS-232
Commands
(see page 156 for more information)
*OPC
*OPC?

*RST

*TST?

*WAI

SYSTem
:CPON <slot|ALL>

DIAGnostic
:DISPlay[:INFOrmation] <message>
:DISPlay:STATe <0|1|OFF|ON>
:DISPlay:STATe?
:MONitor <slot>|<channel>|<port>|-1
:MONitor?

SYSMODE <0|1|SCPI|HP3488>
SYSMODE?
(see page 160 for more information)
SYSTem
:LOCal
:REMote
:RWLock
126
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Switch Commands
Switch Commands
These ROUTe commands are intended for use with all switching plug-in
modules. You cannot use these commands to change the state of bits in a
digital I/O module.
[ROUTe:]
CLOSe <channel_list>
CLOSe? <channel_list>
4
This command closes the switching channels specified in the
channel_list. The channel_list has the form @snn, where s is the slot
number and nn is the channel number. For all mainframes, slot 0 refers
to the 3499A/B/C control board. Valid slot numbers are:
3499A
slots 0 through 5
3499B
slots 0 through 2
3499C
slots 0 through 9
The channel number, nn, is plug-in module dependent. Channel
numbers for plug-in modules are listed on page 70.
5
To close:
•
•
•
•
•
a single channel, use CLOS (@snn);
multiple channels, use CLOS (@snn,snn...);
sequential channels, use CLOS (@snn:snn);
groups of sequential channels, use CLOS (@snn:snn,snn:snn);
or any combination of the above.
Channels in a channel_list may not close simultaneously. The order in
which the channels close when operated by a single command is not
guaranteed. Use sequential CLOSe commands if needed.
The CLOS? query returns a “1” for a closed channel and a “0” for an open
channel. If you specify a list of channels, the query returns a comma
separated list of 0’s and 1’s, in the same order as the channel_list. The
returned values indicate the programmed state of the relay. This query
does not physically monitor a relay and cannot report a failed relay.
127
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Switch Commands
[ROUTe:]
CLOSe:STATe?
This query returns a comma-delineated list of the closed channel relays
for all relays on all installed plug-in modules. The returned values will
be in the form snn, where s is the slot number and nn is the channel
number. The returned values indicate the programmed state of the relay.
This query does not physically monitor a relay and cannot report a failed
relay.
[ROUTe:]
OPEN <channel_list>|ALL
OPEN? <channel_list>
This command opens all the switching channels specified in the
channel_list. The channel_list has the form @snn, where s is the slot
number and nn is the channel number. See the CLOSe command
description for a description of channel_list.
5
The OPEN? query returns a “1” for open channels and a “0” for a closed
channel. If you specify a list of channels, the query returns a comma
separated list of 0’s and 1’s, in the same order as the channel_list. The
returned values indicate the programmed state of the relay. This query
does not physically monitor a relay and cannot report a failed relay.
128
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Specific Plug-in Module Commands
Specific Plug-in Module Commands
[ROUTe:]
CPAir <slot1>,<slot2>|-1
CPAir?
This command is used to group two cards of the same type together effectively assigning both cards to both slot numbers. When a command
is sent to one of the paired cards, that command is executed on both 4
cards in succession - lowest slot number first. The card pair feature is
especially useful when doing 4-wire scanning. Only two identical plug-in
modules can be paired. Modules that can be paired include the switching
modules (MUX, GP and Matrix), the digital I/O modules, and the
multifunction modules.
The slot 0 refers to the 3499A/B/C control board. Valid slot numbers are:
3499A
slots 1 through 5
3499B
slots 1 through 2
3499C
slots 1 through 9
After two switching modules are paired, opening/closing/scanning one or
more channels on either one of the paired modules will result in the same
operation on the respective channels on the other module being
performed at the same time.
The N2260A and N2266A are configurable MUX modules. Only when
both modules are configured to the same function, can the two modules
be paired. Once paired, changing the function of one module will be
duplicated on the other module in the pair. Page 130 gives additional
details about the N2260A and N2266A configuration.
You can pair DIO modules if they are used in handshake Mode #1 or #2
(but not in Mode #3 or #4 or #5). Once paired, writing data on either one
of the paired modules will write the data on the other module.
You can cancel a card pair by specifying a “-1” for the second <slot>
parameter. There will be no paired cards after an instrument power-on
or reset.
The ROUTe:CPAir? query returns a list of four numbers separated with
commas, indicating the four slots in which two pairs of modules are
plugged. If there is only one pair, “0,0” will be returned for the last two
numbers. 0,0,0,0 is returned if no cards are paired.
129
5
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Specific Plug-in Module Commands
For example, using a 3499C mainframe, if you send ROUT:CPA 1,3 to
pair the modules in slots 1 and 3, the ROUT:CPA? query will return:
1,3,0,0
[ROUTe:]
FUNCtion <slot>,<1|2|3|4|WIRE1|WIRE2|BIWIRE2|WIRE4>
FUNCtion? <slot>
[ROUTe:]FUNCtion is used to configure a N2260A (see page 176) or
N2266A (see page 200) 40-channel MUX module. Four configurations
are possible:
•
•
•
•
80-channel 1-wire MUX
40-channel 2-wire MUX
two 20-channel 2-wire MUXs
20-channel 4-wire MUX
After an instrument power on or reset, the module will return to the
default 40-channel 2-wire MUX mode. Changing function mode will open
all the switching channels on a module.
5
1-Wire Mode (1|WIRE1) configures the MUX as an 80-channel singleended (1-wire) MUX module. The valid channel numbers are s00 to s79.
The Low (L) terminals form channels 00 through 39, the High (H)
terminals form channels 40 through 79. Only one channel can be closed
at a time when in 1-wire mode.
2-Wire Mode (2|WIRE2) configures the MUX as a 40-channel 2-wire
MUX module. The valid channel numbers are s00-s39. To close/open/scan
one channel is actually to close/open/scan a 2-wire pair.
Dual 2-Wire Mode (3|BIWIRE2) configures the MUX as two
independent 20-channel 2-wire MUX modules. The valid channel
numbers are s00-s39 (s00-s19 for the first MUX and s20-s39 for the
second).
4-Wire Mode (4|WIRE4): This mode configures the N2260A or N2266A
as a 20-channel 4-wire MUX module. Channels 20 through 39 (2-wire)
are automatically paired with Channels 00 through 19. The valid
channel numbers are s00-s19. To close/open/scan a channel is actually
closing/opening/scanning a 4-wire connection in this mode.
If two modules are paired, changing the configuration on one module will
result in the other module being changed to the same configuration. Two
modules CANNOT be paired if they are configured differently.
130
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Specific Plug-in Module Commands
The [ROUTe:]FUNCtion? query returns the current configuration of the
module in the specified slot. The returned string will be one of WIRE1,
WIRE2, BIWIRE2, or WIRE4. An error is generated if no module is
installed.
[ROUTe:]
DIAGnostic
:SPEEK? <slot>,4
:SPOKE <slot>,0,<data>
These commands read and write an 8-bit data register on the 44475A
Breadboard Module (see page 251).
4
Using these commands with newer modules (models beginning with
N22xxx) will generate an error.
Valid slot numbers are:
3499A
slots 1 through 5
3499B
slots 1 through 2
3499C
slots 1 through 9
DIAG:SPEEK? returns a decimal number representing the binary
weighted values of the bits in the register connected to the DI lines of the
breadboard. 4 is the register number. Any other register number will not
generate an error and will return the value 255.
DIAG:SPOKE writes a decimal number (<data>) representing the binary
weighted values of the bits to the register connected to the DO lines of
the breadboard. 0 is the register number. Any other register number will
not generate an error but will have no effect.
In the form of the value returned or written as data, a “1” represents a
TTL high and a “0” represents a TTL low on the DI or DO line.
131
5
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Scanning Commands
Scanning Commands
The Agilent 3499A/B/C can scan switching channels, digital I/O bit
channels, and even the stored channel setups in a scan list. You can
combine scanned channels with an external measurement device or
source and synchronize the scan with the measurements.
To perform scanning you must:
1. create a scan list
2. configure the scan
3. initiate the scan
4. trigger the arm layer
5. trigger the trigger layer
The rules for scanning are described on page 85.
5
Scan List Commands
[ROUTe:]
SCAN[:LIST] <scan_list>
SCAN[:LIST]?
SCAN CLEar
SCAN:SIZE?
The ROUTe:SCAN:LIST command creates a scan list. A scan list can
contain any combination of switch channels, digital bits, or stored
channel states (see page 106).
The scan_list has the form @snn, where s is the slot number and nn is a
specific channel number. For all mainframes, slot 0 refers to the 
3499A/B/C control board. Valid slot numbers are:
3499A
slots 0 through 5
3499B
slots 0 through 2
3499C
slots 0 through 9
The channel numbers, nn, are plug-in module dependent. Channel
numbers for specific plug-in modules are listed on page 70.

132
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Scanning Commands
To create a scan list using:
•
•
•
•
•
a single channel, use SCAN (@snn);
multiple channels, use SCAN (@snn,snn...);
sequential channels, use SCAN (@snn:snn);
groups of sequential channels, use SCAN (@snn:snn,snn:snn);
or any combination of the above.
4
Any digital I/O lines included in scan_list must be operating in
handshake Mode #1 or #2. The 4-bit built-in digital I/O bits (091-094) can
be included in a scan_list.
N2260A and N2266A: The configuration must be specified before
defining the channels or channel range to be scanned. Page 130 describes
the configuration. The two tree relays (s98 and s99) can not be included
in a scan_list.
A scan list may contain up to 200 entries. One channel setup, regardless
of its channel number, is counted as one “channel” in a scan_list.
The ROUTe:SCAN:LIST? query returns the sequence of channels
included in the scan_list. A comma-delineated channel list is returned.
The list is in same order as in the scan_list and in the form of
(snn,snn,mm,...), where snn is the channel number and mm is a stored
channel setup.
The ROUTe:SCAN CLEar command clears the scan list. This command
has no effect on the scan configurations except clearing all the channels/
bits or the stored channel setups included in the <scan_list>.
The ROUTe:SCAN:SIZE? query returns the number of channels in the
scan_list. The returned value is an integer number between 0 and 200. A
stored setup in the scan is counted as one “channel”.
133
5
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Scanning Commands
Scan Configuration Commands
These command set the arm and trigger layer parameters. See “The Scan
Process” on page 86 for a complete description of the layers and scan
configuration process.
ARM
:SOURce <BUS|EXTernal|IMMediate|TIMer|MIX|HOLD>
:SOURce?
This command specifies the event control source for the arm layer. A
complete description of the arm layer and how it relates to scanning
begins on page 85. The ARM source can be specified to be one of the
following:
•
•
5
BUS - the sweep of the scan list starts after a *TRG or GET is received.
EXTernal - the sweep of scan list starts after an external trigger is
received.
•
IMMediate - the sweep of scan starts immediately after INITiate
(or the end of a scan if multiple scans are specified).
•
•
•
TIMer - the sweep of the scan list starts after the timer interval.
MIX - the scan will continue after a BUS or EXTernal event occurs.
HOLD - the sweep of the scan list starts when a
TRIGger[:IMMediate] command is received.
After the power is applied or a reset (*RST) command is received, the
default ARM source is IMMediate.
The ARM:SOURce? query returns a string. Possible values retuned
include: BUS, EXTernal, IMMediate, TIMer, MIX, or HOLD.
ARM
:COUNt <number>|MIN|MAX|INFinity
:COUNt? [MIN|MAX|INFinity]
This command sets the number of times the scan list is performed. MIN
specifies a single sweep, MAX specifies 99,999 sweeps, and INF continues
sweeping the scan list indefinitely (until an ABORt command is received).
Following power on or a reset (*RST) command, the ARM:COUNt is set to
1 (MIN).
The ARM:COUNt? query returns the number of scanning cycles set by
ARM:COUNt. The optional parameters MIN and MAX allow you to query
the module for these values instead of looking them up in the command
reference. MIN returns “1”, MAX returns “99999”, and INF returns “-1”.
134
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Scanning Commands
ARM
:TIMer <seconds>|MIN|MAX
:TIMer? [MIN|MAX]
This command sets the sweep-to-sweep interval in the arm layer (the
TRIGger:TIMer command sets the channel-to-channel interval in the
trigger layer). This timer is valid only if the TIMer is set using the
ARM:SOURce command.
You can set seconds to any value between 0.000 (MIN) and 99999.999 4
(MAX) in increments of 0.001 seconds. When power is applied the value is
set to 0 (MIN).
The ARM:TIMer? query returns the sweep-to-sweep interval in seconds.
The returned number is a value between 0 and 99999.999 (seconds). The
optional parameters MIN and MAX allow you to query the module for
these values instead of looking them up in the command reference. MIN
returns “0” and MAX returns “99999”.
TRIGger
:SOURce <BUS|EXTernal|IMMediate|TIMer|MIX|HOLD>
:SOURce?
This command specifies the event control source for the trigger layer. A
complete description of the trigger layer and how it relates to scanning
begins on page 85. The TRIGger source can be specified to be one of the
following:
•
•
BUS - the scan advances after a *TRG or GET is received.
•
IMMediate - the scan advances immediately after the previous
channel is closed (if no ROUTe:CHANnel:DELay value is set).
•
•
•
TIMer - the scan advances after the timer interval.
EXTernal - the scan list advances after an external trigger is
received.
MIX - the scan advances after a BUS or EXTernal event occurs.
HOLD - the sweep of the scan list starts when a
TRIGger[:IMMediate] command is received.
After the power is applied or a reset (*RST) command is received, the
default TRIGger source is IMMediate.
The TRIGger:SOURce? query returns a string. Possible values retuned
include: BUS, EXTernal, IMMediate, TIMer, MIX, or HOLD.
135
5
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Scanning Commands
TRIGger
:TIMer <seconds>|MIN|MAX
:TIMer? [MIN|MAX]
This command sets the channel-to-channel interval in the trigger layer
(the ARM:TIMer command sets the sweep-to-sweep interval in the
trigger layer). This timer is valid only if the TIMer is set using the
TRIGger:SOURce command.
You can set seconds to any value between 0.000 (MIN) and 99999.999
(MAX) in increments of 0.001 seconds. When power is applied, the value is
set to 0 (MIN).
The TRIGger:TIMer? query returns the channel-to-channel interval in
seconds. The returned number is a value between 0 and 99999.999
(seconds). The optional parameters MIN and MAX allow you to query the
module for these values instead of looking them up in the command
reference. MIN returns “0” and MAX returns “99999”.
[ROUTe:]
[CHANnel:]DELay <seconds>,<channel_list>|ALL
[CHANnel:]DELay? <channel_list>
5
This command specifies a delay time (from 0 to 99999.999 seconds, with
1 ms resolution) between when a channel in the scan list is closed and
the next operation begins (and, if configured, a trigger out pulse is sent).
The delay time can be set individually for each channel in the scan list,
or one delay can be set for all channels in the scan list. Note that, even if
the trigger source is set to IMMediate, the scan list will not advance until
the delay time is met. Following power on or a reset (*RST) command,
the delay time is set to “0”.
The channel_list can be:
•
•
•
•
•
a single channel, use DEL (@snn);
multiple channels, use DEL (@snn,snn...);
sequential channels, use DEL (@snn:snn);
groups of sequential channels, use DEL (@snn:snn,snn:snn);
or any combination of the above.
The ROUTe:CHANnel:DELay? query returns the delay time of each
channel included in the channel_list. A comma-delineated set of values is
returned. The values are in same order as in the channel_list and in the
form of (snn,snn,mm,...), where snn is the channel number and mm is a
stored channel setup.
136
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Scanning Commands
CONFigure
:EXTernal[:TRIGger]:SOURce <slot>
:EXTernal[:TRIGger]:SOURce?
:EXTernal[:TRIGger][:OUTPut] <0|1|OFF|ON>
:EXTernal[:TRIGger][:OUTPut]?
These commands select and enable external triggers. Two possible
source are available: the built-in source available at the rear-panel miniDIN connector or the EI/CC lines in a 44474A DIO Module. For
additional information about external triggering see “Using External 4
Triggering” on page 93.
The slot parameter in the command sets the location of the external
trigger lines. The built-in trigger lines are on slot “0”. If a 44474A is
installed, slot can be set to the corresponding slot number. After power
on or a reset (*RST) command, the slot is set to “0”.
The CONFigure:EXTernal:TRIGger:SOURce? query returns a
number indicating the external trigger source.
The CONFigure:EXTernal:TRIGger:OUTPut command enables or
disables the external trigger out pulse. This pulse is output after a
channel is closed during a scan operation when enabled. The output
pulse timing may be delayed after the channel is closed if the
ROUTe:CHANnel:DELay command has been set for the channel. After
power on or a reset (*RST) command is received, the output pulse is
disabled (OFF).
The CONFigure:EXTernal:TRIGger:OUTPut? query returns either a
“0” (disabled) or “1” (enabled) indicating the status of the external trigger
output.
137
5
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Scanning Commands
Scanning Commands
These commands enable the scan, stop the scan, and provide triggers for
arm and trigger layer sources.
INITiate
This command takes the instrument out of the idle state and moves it to
the arm layer. If the ARM:SOURce is set to IMMediate, the instrument
moves directly to the trigger layer. If the TRIGger:SOURce is set to
IMMediate, the scan begins.
You must always send the INITiate command to move the instrument
out of the idle state, regardless of the arm and trigger sources used. For
example, if you set the arm source to EXTernal, the instrument will not
move to the trigger layer until the INITiate command is received and
then an external trigger occurs.
ABORt
This command stops a scan in progress. This command does not affect
the scan configuration or the scan list. A reset (*RST) command will also
stop a scan in progress, but the scan configuration and scan list are lost.
5
When a scan is aborted, the channel last scanned before the interruption
will remain closed. A scan cannot resume from where it is interrupted.
TRIGger[:IMMediate]
This command is used as a trigger source in the arm or trigger layer
when the SOURce is set to HOLD.
*TRG
This IEEE-488.2 common command is used as a trigger source in the
arm or trigger layer when the SOURce is set to BUS.
138
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Digital I/O Commands
Digital I/O Commands
You may use the built-in digital I/O bits or port, one or more digital I/O
modules, or a multifunction modules with a DIO function. In the
following context, multifunction modules refer to those with a DIO
function.
•
The built-in digital I/O (control board) consists of four bits which can
4
be operated either independently as four bit channels (numbered 091
through 094) or as one 4-bit port (numbered 090).
•
The plug-in digital I/O modules and multifunction modules usually
consist of several 8-, 16-, and/or 32-bit ports. These ports can be
operated independently, which means one port can be used for output
operation, while others can be used for input. However, all bits within
a same 8-bit port are dependent. If one bit of a port is used for input
or output operation, then all other bits of the same port can only be
used for the same operation.
For a complete discussion of digital I/O operation refer to “Digital I/O
Operation” on page 95.
5
139
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Digital I/O Commands
Digital Configuration Commands
These commands set the digital I/O handshake mode, handshake line
polarities, and data line polarities. The port parameter is in the form
snn, where s is the slot number and nn is the first channel on the digital
port. The port parameter is plug-in module dependent. Valid port
numbers for each plug-in module are shown beginning on page 70.
SOURce:DIGital
:MODE <port>,<mode>
:MODE? <port>
This command sets the handshake mode to use. Five handshake modes
are available and are specified as an integer from 1 to 5. See “About Flow
Control Modes (Handshake)” on page 98. The modes are shown below.
Handshake
Mode
Mode
Number
Definition
5
Notes
1
Static mode #1
Default handshake mode.
2
Static mode #2
Read what was written.
3
Read or Write
strobe
If you set a port to this mode, you cannot use the
port in a scan list or use card pairing
(ROUTe:CPAir).
4
Read and write
strobe
If you set a port to this mode, you cannot use the
port in a scan list or use card pairing
(ROUTe:CPAir).
5
Full handshake
If you set a port to this mode, you cannot use the
port in a scan list or use card pairing
(ROUTe:CPAir).
Only the first port on a digital I/O module can be set to mode #3, mode
#4, or mode #5. When set to modes 3, 4, or 5, the three control lines are
valid for the port used. Other ports on the same module can be used in
modes #1 or #2 (the three control lines do not apply to these ports).
This command cannot be used with the built-in 4-bit digital I/O port.
The SOURce:DIGital:MODe? query returns an integer ranging from 1
to 5.
140
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Digital I/O Commands
SOURce:DIGital
:CONTrol:POLarity <slot>,<0|1|POS|NEG>
:CONTrol:POLarity? <slot>
:FLAG:POLarity <slot>,<0|1|POS|NEG>
:FLAG:POLarity? <slot>
:IO:POLarity <slot>,<0|1|POS|NEG>
:IO:POLarity? <slot>
These commands set the polarity of the three handshake lines. The
CONTrol portion of the command works with the PCTL (Peripheral 4
control) line. The FLAG portion of the command works with the PFLG
(peripheral flag) line. The IO portion of the command works with the I/O
direction line.
The slot parameter is a decimal ranging from 1 to 5. These commands do
not work with the built-in 4-bit digital I/O port (0).
Following power on or a reset (*RST) command, the polarities are set to 0
or POSitive.
The query versions of these commands return one of two strings: POS or
NEG.
5
SOURce:DIGital:DATA
[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>]:POLarity <port>,<0|1|POS|NEG>
[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>]:POLarity? <port>
This command sets the data line polarity for the specified port. The
current state of the data lines is not changed by this command.
Following power on or a reset (*RST) command, the polarity is set to 0 or
POS.
141
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Digital I/O Commands
Digital Input Commands
These commands read individual bits or complete ports. Some digital I/O
configuration commands may affect how these bits are read. The port
parameter is in the form snn, where s is the slot number and nn is the
first channel on the digital port. The port parameter is plug-in module
dependent. Valid port numbers for each plug-in module are shown
beginning on page 70.
SENSe:DIGital:DATA
:BIT? <bit_port>
This query reads a bit from the specified bit_port and returns either a “0”
or a “1”. bit_port is in the form of snn, where s is the slot number and nn
is the bit number. The built-in 4-bit digital I/O port has bit numbers 091
to 094. The plug-in module bit numbers are module dependent (see page
70).
SENSe:DIGital:DATA
[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>][:VALue]? <port>
5
This query reads data from the specified port and returns an integer
representing the binary-weighted value of the bits. The value returned
depends upon the first parameter as follows:
• BYTE - reads 8 bits and returns an integer between 0 and 255 (00h
and FFh).
• WORD - reads 16 bits and returns an integer between -32768 and
+32767 (-8000h and +7FFFh). Negative numbers returned are 2’s
complement numbers.
• LWORD - reads 32 bits and returns an integer between -231 and
+(231-1) (-80000000h and 7FFFFFFFh). Negative numbers returned
are 2’s complement numbers.
Numbers greater than +32767 (WORD) and +(231-1) (LWORD) will be
returned as negative numbers. When the returned data is negative, you
must calculate the actual bit state from the 2’s complement form.
142
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Digital I/O Commands
SENSe:DIGital:DATA
[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>]:BLOCK? <port>,<size>
This query returns block data. Block data has the form:
<#digits><length><block>, where:
•
<#digits> decides how many decimal digits are used to define
<length>;
•
•
<length> decides how many bytes are to be transferred in <block>;
<block> contains the actual data to be transferred. <block> may
contain from 1 to 2048 bytes.
4
The returned block will contain the number bytes specified in <size>. The
value of size will be the value of length in the returned block.
Set port to 090 to read blocks on the built-in 4-bit digital I/O port.
The first parameter sets the value returned. If you omit the parameter,
BYTE data is assumed. 
Digital Output Commands
These commands set individual bits or complete ports. Some digital I/O
configuration commands may affect how these bits are implemented. The
port parameter is in the form snn, where s is the slot number and nn is
the first channel on the digital port. The port parameter is plug-in
module dependent. Valid port numbers for each plug-in module are
shown beginning on page 70.
SOURce:DIGital:DATA
:BIT <bit_port>,<0|1>
This command sets a bit in the specified bit_port. bit_port is in the form
of snn, where s is the slot number and nn is the bit number. The built-in
4-bit digital I/O port has bit numbers 091 to 094. The plug-in module bit
numbers are module dependent (see page 70).
143
5
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Digital I/O Commands
SOURce:DIGital:DATA
[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>][:VALue] <port>,<data>
This command sets a value on the specified port. data is a decimal value
representing the desired bit pattern. The value of data depends upon the
first parameter as follows:
• BYTE - writes 8 bits to the specified port. 16- or 32-bit modules will be
used as two or four 8-bit ports respectively. data can range from 0 to
255 (00h and FFh). If writing to the built-in 4-bit digital I/O port 
(port = 090), data can range from 0 to 15.
• WORD - writes 16 bits to the specified port. 16- or 32-bit modules will
be used as one or two 16-bit ports respectively. data can range from 
-32768 to +32767 (-8000h and +7FFFh). Values above 32767 must be
converted to the 2’s complement form and sent as negative numbers.
• LWORD - writes 32 bits to the specified port. This parameter is only
valid on 32-bit modules. data can range from -231 and +(231-1) 
(-80000000h and 7FFFFFFFh). Values above +(231-1) must be
converted to the 2’s complement form and sent as negative numbers.
5
SOURce:DIGital:DATA
[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>]:BLOCK <port>,<block_data>
This writes block data to the specified port. Block data has the form:
<#digits><length><block>, where:
•
<#digits> decides how many decimal digits are used to define
<length>;
•
•
<length> decides how many bytes are to be transferred in <block>;
<block> contains the actual data to be transferred. <block> may
contain from 1 to 2048 bytes.
Set port to 090 to write blocks to the built-in 4-bit digital I/O port.
The first parameter sets how the value of block_data is interpreted. If
you omit the parameter, BYTE data is assumed.
For example, the command below sends a block of data, “ABCDEFGHIJ”,
to 16-bit port 100. Since the ASCII characters A and B have decimal
values of 65 and 66, respectively, the binary equivalent of 65 and 66 are
written to port 100. A is written to the upper 8 bits and B to the lower 8
bits; then the C and D are written, and so on.
SOUR:DIG:DATA:WORD:BLOCK 100,#210ABCDEFGHIJ
144
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Digital I/O Commands
Digital I/O Memory Commands
You can use the Agilent 3499A/B/C internal memory to store digital
data. After defining the memory, you can put data in memory for later
writing to a digital port, or you can read digital port data directly into
memory. Two independent blocks of memory can be used. A power on or
reset (*RST) command clears all defined memory blocks.
SOURce:DIGital:TRACe
:DEFine <sys_mem_name>,<size>[,<fill>]
:DEFine? <sys_mem_name>
:DEFine:CATalog?
4
The SOURce:DIGital:TRACe:DEFine command defines a memory
block for use.
The sys_mem_name parameter is a string containing up to 12 characters
that names the memory block.
size defines the number of bytes to use for the block memory. You can
specify memory size from 1 to 32768 bytes. If two memory blocks are
being defined (using two SOURce:DIGital:TRACe:DEFine commands)
the total memory size defined must not exceed 32768 bytes.
If the fill parameter is used, it puts a value into each of the bytes defined
in size. The value of fill can range from 0 to 255 (0 to FFh).
The SOURce:DIGital:TRACe:DEFine? query returns the size of the
memory data block (in bytes). The returned value can range from 1 to
32768.
The SOURce:DIGital:TRACe:CATalog? query returns a string
containing the name(s) of defined memory blocks. If two memory blocks
are defined, the sting contains both names separated by a comma.
SOURce:DIGital:TRACe
:DELete[:NAME] <sys_mem_name>
:DELete:ALL
These commands remove a memory block previously defined. With the
sys_mem_name parameter, only one block is removed. The ALL form of
the command removes all defined memory blocks.
145
5
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Digital I/O Commands
SOURce:DIGital:TRACe
[:DATA] <sys_mem_name>,<block_data>
This command loads a memory block with data. The sys_mem_name
parameter must have been previously defined. The block_data is in the
form: <#digits><length><block>, where:
•
<#digits> decides how many decimal digits are used to define
<length>;
•
•
<length> decides how many bytes are to be transferred in <block>;
<block> contains the actual data to be transferred. <block> may
contain from 1 to 2048 bytes.
SOURce:DIGital:DATA
[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>]:TRACe <port>,<sys_mem_name>
This command writes a block of data, stored in a memory location, to the
specified port. The memory location must have been defined using the
SOURCe:DIGital:TRACe:DEFine command and the data written to the
memory location using the SOURCe:DIGital:TRACe command.
5
SENSe:DIGital:DATA
[:<BYTE|WORD|LWORD>]:TRACe <port>,<sys_mem_name>
This command reads a block of data from a digital I/O port and puts the
data in memory. The port parameter is in the form snn, where s is the
slot number and nn is the first channel on the digital port. The port
parameter is plug-in module dependent. Valid port numbers for each
plug-in module are shown beginning on page 70.
The BYTE, WORD, or LWORD forms of this command specify 8-, 16-, and 32bit operations, respectively. If omitted, BYTE is assumed.
SENSe:DIGital
:TRACE[:DATA]? <sys_mem_name>
This query returns a block of data from the specified memory location.
the data is returned in the form: <#digits><length><block>, where:
•
<#digits> decides how many decimal digits are used to define
<length>;
•
•
<length> decides how many bytes are to be transferred in <block>;
<block> contains the actual data to be transferred. <block> may
contain from 1 to 2048 bytes.
146
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
State Storage Commands
State Storage Commands
The 3499A/B/C provides the capability to store setups, and then recall
them to put the instrument back into a known configuration. The
operation of state storage is dependent upon the instrument’s firmware
revision. Refer to “State Storage” on page 106 for more details.
The mem parameter specifies memory locations. Storage memory
4
locations are numbered 01 to 10 for Firmware revisions 1.0, 2.0, and 3.0.
Memory locations are number 01 to 50 for Firmware revision 4.0.
Saved states can be used as a channel in scan lists. Saved states are not
affected by the reset (*RST) command.
*SAV <mem>
This IEEE488.2 common command saves the current instrument setup
in the memory location specified. A saved memory location can be used in
a scan list as a channel.
*RCL <mem>
This IEEE488.2 common command restores the instrument to a saved
instrument state.
SYSTem:STATe:DELete <mem>|ALL
This command deletes a single instrument state or all stored states.
147
5
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Status System Commands
Status System Commands
This section describes the structure of the SCPI status system for the
Agilent 3499A/B/C and describes the commands used to work with the
status system. The status system records various conditions, events, and
states of the instrument in three register groups. The three groups are
shown below.
Set by *OPC
Related commands
are *OPC? and *WAI
5
Waiting in Arm Layer
Waiting in Trigger Layer
148
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Status System Commands
Each register group has one or more low-level registers. These low-level
registers are called condition, event, or enable registers and control the
action of specific bits in the registers. You read or write to the registers
using binary-weighted decimal numbers.
A condition register continuously monitors the state of the instrument.
The bits in the condition register are updated in real time (they are not
latched). The 3499A/B/C uses a condition register as a part of the
Operation Status Register.
4
An event register latches events from the condition register. The 
3499A/B/C has an event register as a part of the Operation Status
Register and the Standard Event Register.
An enable register defines the bits in the event register that are reported
to the Status Byte Register. You can read or write to an enable register.
You read and write to the Standard Event Register and Status Byte
Register using IEEE488.2 common commands. The Operation Status
Register uses SCPI commands.
You can read the status registers to determine the current operating
state of the instrument. You can use a technique called serial polling to
periodically read the Status Byte Register and determine the operating
state of the instrument. You can also set the status system to generate
an interrupt (on the GPIB SRQ line) when one or more specific events
occur (called SRQ interrupt). Not all GPIB cards support SRQ enabled
interrupts.
*CLS
This command clears all the event registers and the Status Byte register.
It does not affect the enable registers. It also clears the error queue.
149
5
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Status System Commands
The Operation Status Register
The 3499A/B/C uses only three of the bits in this 16-bit register. Bit 0
indicates the instrument is waiting in the trigger layer (the next trigger
event will advance the scan list). Bit 1 indicates the instrument is
waiting in the arm layer (the next trigger event will move the instrument
to the trigger layer). Bit 4 indicates a scan has started.
STATus
:OPERation:CONDition?
Since the condition register is updated in real time, you will generally
not use this register query. For example, bit 4 will never appear to be set
since you cannot read the register at the time a scan starts.
STATus
:OPERation[:EVENt]?
This query returns the binary weighted sum of the values in the event
register. These bits are latched from the condition register and indicate
that an event has occurred (at some time since the register was last
cleared).
5
Sending this query clears all bits in the register.
STATus
:OPERation:ENABle <unmask>
:OPERation:ENABle?
These commands work with the enable register. The enable register is a
mask used to determine which bits in the event register can be recorded
in the OPR summary bit (bit 7) of the Status Byte register.
unmask can range from 0 to 16348, but is only applicable to the 
3499A/B/C with the values 1, 2, and 16. For example sending:
STATus:OPERation:ENABle 16
sets the OPR summary bit in the Status Byte Register to be true (1)
when a scan has started.
The query form of this command returns a decimal weighted value
indicating the currently set bits in this register.
STATus
:PRESet
This command clears the Operation Status Register enable register bits.
All Enable bits are set to 0. This command does not affect the other
register groups and does not clear the event register.
150
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Status System Commands
The Standard Event Register
The Standard Event Register reports instrument events, errors, and the
*OPC command. The Standard Event Register reports through the ESB
bit (bit 5) in the Status Byte Register.
*ESR?
This query returns a decimal weighted value of the event register. The
values in this register are as follows:
Bit Number
4
Decimal
Definition
Value
0 Power On
1
Power has been turned on since the last
time the register was cleared (read).
1 Not Used
2
Returns “0”.
2 Command Error
4
A command syntax error occurred (error
numbers in the -100 range).
3 Execution Error
8
An execution error occurred 
(error numbers in the -200 range).
4 Device Error
16
A self test error occurred
(error numbers in the -300 range).
5 Query Error
32
An error during a query 
(error numbers in the -400 range).
6 Not Used
64
Returns “0”.
7 Operation Complete
128
All commands prior to and including *OPC
have been executed.
5
*ESE <unmask>
*ESE?
These commands work with the enable register. The enable register is a
mask used to determine which bits in the event register can be recorded
in the ESB bit (bit 5) of the Status Byte Register.
unmask can range from 1 to 128. The query form of this command
returns a decimal weighted value indicating the currently set bits in this
register.
151
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
Status System Commands
The Status Byte Register
The Status Byte Register reports conditions from the other register
groups. Data in the 3499A/B/C output buffer is reported on the MAV bit
(bit 4). If an event is cleared in one of the other registers, it is also cleared
in the Status Byte register. The *CLS command clears the Status Byte
register.
*STB?
This query reads the status byte. The returned value is a 
decimal-weighted summary of the bits in the register.
*SRE <value>
*SRE?
These commands work with the enable register. The enable register is a
mask used to determine which bits in the event register can be
summarized to the RQS bit (bit 6) of the Status Byte Register.
value can range from 1 to 128. The query form of this command returns a
decimal-weighted value indicating the currently set bits in this register.
5
152
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
System Information Commands
System Information Commands
These commands are used to obtain system-level information.
*IDN?
This IEEE488.2 Common Command queries the instrument for the
identification string. The returned string will contain the manufacturer
identification, the model number, the serial number, and the firmware4
revision.
SYSTem:ERRor?
This query returns a variant of the instrument’s error queue. Errors are
retrieved in first-in-first-out (FIFO) order. The first error returned is the
first error stored. See the “Error Messages” chapter on page 165 for the
error numbers and messages.
Depending upon your programming environment, this query may return
an integer containing the error number, or a variant containing the error
number and error message.
When all the errors from the queue are read, the errors are cleared and
the ERROR annunciator turns off. When the queue is empty, each
following SYSTem:ERRor? query returns: +0, “No error”. To clear all
error numbers/messages in the queue, execute the *CLS command or
power-on the instrument.
The queue holds a maximum of 10 error number/message pairs. If the
queue overflows, the last error number/message in the queue is replaced
by: -350, “Queue overflow”. The least recent error numbers/messages
remain in the queue, and the most recent are discarded.
SYSTem:VERSion?
This query returns a string indicating the SCPI version implemented on
the mainframe control board. The string is in the form: “Version A.02.00”
SYSTem:CTYPE? <slot>
This query returns a string containing the module identification in the
specified slot. The slot parameter is a decimal ranging from 0 to 9
(mainframe dependent). Valid slot numbers are:
3499A
slots 0 through 5
3499B
slots 0 through 2
3499C
slots 0 through 9
153
5
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
System Information Commands
The string returned has one of the following forms:
5
Module
Returned String
Empty Slot
Mainframe
N2260A
N2261A
N2262A
N2263A
N2264A
N2265A
N2266A
N2267A
N2268A
N2270A
N2272A
N2276A/B
N2280A
N2281A
N2282A
44470A
44470D
44471A
44471D
44472A
44473A
44474A
44475A
44476A/B
44477A
44478A/B
NO CARD
Built-in DIO
40CH MUX
40CH GP
4X8 MATRIX
32BIT DIO
12+3 (5A) CH GP+16BIT DIO
4X4 MATRIX +16BIT DIO
20CH MUX
8(8A)CH GP
DUAL 1X4 RF MUX
10(1000V)CH MUX
RF MUX
Dual MICROWV MUX
QUAD 1X2 OPTICAL
DUAL 1X4 OPTICAL
1X8 OPTICAL MUX
RELAY MUX
RELAY MUX
GP RELAY
GP RELAY
VHF SW
MATRIX SW
DIGITAL IO
BREADBOARD
GP RELAY
GP RELAY
VHF SW
a.
b.
c.
154
00000
3499, Serial #
N2260A, Serial #
N2261A, Serial #
N2262A, Serial #
N2263A, Serial #
N2264A, Serial #
N2265A, Serial #
N2266A, Serial #
N2267A, Serial #
N2268A
N2270A, Serial #
N2272A
N2276A/B, Serial #
N2280A, Serial #
N2281A, Serial #
N2282A, Serial #
44470a
44470a
44471b
44471b
44472c
44473
44474
44475
44471b
44471b
44472c
Both the 44470A/D return “RELAY MUX 44470”. You must physically check the
module to determine which one is present.
All the 44471A/D, 44476A/B and 44477A return “GP RELAY 44471”. To determine if
the module is an 44471A/D, 44476A/B or 44477A, check the switching channels. For
44471A/D and 44476A/B, you must physically check the modules to determine which
one is present.
Both the 44478A/B return “VHF SW 44472”. You must physically check the module to
determine which one is present.
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
System Information Commands
DIAGnostic
[:RELay]:CYCLes? <channel_list>
[:RELay]:CYCLes:MAX? <slot>
[:RELay]:CYCLes:CLEar <channel_list>
The switching plug-in modules count the number of cycles on each relay
on the module and store this total count in non-volatile memory on each
switch module. Use this feature to track relay failures and predict
system maintenance requirements.
4
This feature is supported by the Agilent N2260A, N2261A, N2262A,
N2264A, N2265A, N2266A, N2267A, N2268A, N2270A, N2272A,
N2276A, and N2280A/81A/82A modules.
The channel_list parameter has the form @snn, where s is the slot
number and nn is the channel number. The actual channel numbers are
module dependent. Channel number for plug-in modules are listed on
page 70. The parameter can contain one or more channels as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
a single channel, use (@snn);
multiple channels, use (@snn,snn...);
sequential channels, use (@snn:snn);
5
groups of sequential channels, use (@snn:snn,snn:snn);
or any combination of the above.
The channel_list parameter may also contain the tree switching relays
(numbered as s98 and s99) for the N2260A and N2266A modules.
The DIAGnostic:RELay:CYCLes? query returns the number of cycles
for the specified channel or channels. For modules or channels that
cannot respond to the query, -1 is returned. For multiple channels, the
returned value is a series of comma-separated integers in the same order
as the channel_list.
The DIAGnostic:RELay:CYCLes:MAX? query returns the maximum
relay cycle count for a module in the specified slot. The returned integer
value is the maximum relay cycle count among all the relays on the
specified module. The returned value does not indicate the channel
number with the maximum count.
The DIAGnostic[:RELay]:CYCLes:CLEar command resets the relay
cycle counter of the specified channel(s). This command resets the relay
cycle count back to zero. Use this command when replacing a relay with
a new one.
155
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
System-Level Control Commands
System-Level Control Commands
These commands allow you to synchronize the instrument to the bus
controller, reset the instrument, and control the display.
*OPC
*OPC?
This command and query are used to synchronize the instrument with
the bus controller. Use the *OPC command to set the bit in the Standard
Event Register (see page 151) if you are using the SCPI status system.
The bit is set when the command has finished executing.
5
Use the *OPC? query to synchronize the instrument with the bus
controller without using the SCPI status system. Append the query to a
command. The instrument returns a +1 in response to the query. For
example, if you send:

ROUTe:CLOSe (@101);*OPC?

the instrument will return a +1 when the command has finished
executing. Note that if you use this on a scan command, the return will
not happen until the scan is complete (and depending upon your bus
controller and the length of the scan list, may cause a time-out).
*RST
This command resets the instrument and returns parameters to their
default settings. System memory is cleared, digital configuration returns
to the default state, and the error queue is cleared. Refer to page 74 for a
complete list of the reset conditions.
156
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
System-Level Control Commands
*TST?
This query begins a self-test and returns a code to indicate the test
status. One of the following codes can be returned:
Returned
Value
Meaning
+0
all tests have passed.
+1
ROM test failed.
+2
GPIB test failed.
+3
RS-232 test failed.
+4
front-panel test failed.
4
Note that the self test requires several seconds to run. This query will
‘hang’ the bus until the self test completes.
SYSTem:CPON <slot|ALL>
This command resets a specific module or all modules in the mainframe.
This command will open all switching channels on a module or set all
digital I/O ports to input ports. This command has no affect on card
pairing or scan configurations.
You can use this command to return a specific module to the power on
state. Unlike the *RST command, this command will not reset the
mainframe (changing scan lists, scan configurations, digital I/O
configurations, or card pairing).
157
5
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
System-Level Control Commands
DIAGnostic
:DISPlay[:INFOrmation] <message>
:DISPlay:STATe <0|1|OFF|ON>
:DISPlay:STATe?
These commands control the front-panel display.
The DIAGnostic:DISPlay:INFOrmation command is used to write
messages to the display. The message parameter is a string that can
contain up to 13 characters. You can enter the string in lower case
characters, but the display only shows upper case characters. In
addition, each character (except the 13th) can be trailed by any one of
four special characters (, . : ;). These “trailer” special character are not
counted as one of the thirteen characters. Valid characters include:.
5
Type
Supported Characters
Numeric
0-9
Alphabetic
A-Z
Symbolic
“ ‘ (space) ( ) * + - , . : ; / \
The DIAGnostic:DISPlay:STATe command turns the front-panel
display on or off. The ADRS, RMT, and ERROR annunciators may turn
on even when the front-panel display is turned off. After an instrument
power-on or a reset command (*RST), the display will be turned on.
The DIAGnostic:DISPlay:STATe? query returns the display status.
The returned value is either a “0” or a “1”, indicating the display is
turned off or on, respectively.
158
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
System-Level Control Commands
DIAGnostic
:MONitor <slot>|<channel>|<port>|-1
:MONitor?
The DIAGnostic:MONitor command enables the monitor mode for a
plug-in module, channel, or port on the specified module. Send the -1
value to disable the monitor mode. Only one slot, one channel, or one
port can be monitored each time. More information about monitoring is
given on page 80.
4
For the built-in 4-bit Digital I/O, you may monitor the port (090) or bits
(091 to 094). For the plug-in DIO modules, you may only monitor the 8bit ports.
The Tree Relays (s98, s99) on an N2260A or N2266A cannot be
monitored.
The monitor is disabled after an instrument power-on or a reset
command.
The DIAGnostic:MONitor? query returns the slot, channel, or port
being monitored. The returned value will be a valid slot number or
channel address. A “-1” is returned if monitor is inactive.
5
SYSMODE <0|1|SCPI|HP3488>
SYSMODE?
The 3499A/B/C can be operated in either one of the two system modes:
SCPI mode and 3488A mode. The SYSMODE command specifies the
system mode to use. Changing the mode will reset the 3499A/B/C 
(see page 74), but the RS232 or GPIB settings will not be affected.
If you change modes with this command, you must allow a minimum 5
second interval before performing other operations.
The SYSMODE? query returns a string containing either “SCPI” or
“HP3488A”.
For information about the 3488 programming mode please visit
www.agilent.com.
159
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
RS-232 Commands
RS-232 Commands
These commands only apply to operations with the RS-232 interface.
SYSTem
:LOCal
:REMote
:RWLock
The SYSTem:LOCal command sets the local mode for RS-232 operation.
All keys on the front-panel are fully functional in this mode.
The SYSTem:REMote command sets the instrument to the remote mode
for RS-232 operation. All keys on the front-panel, except Local, View,
Mon, Enter, the knob, and the two arrow keys, are disabled.
When the 3499A/B/C has been addressed to listen, the RMT and ADRS
annunciators turn on to indicate the instrument is in the Remote mode.
The ERROR annunciator turns on whenever an error occurs.
5
The SYSTem:RWLock command sets the instrument to the remote mode
of operation. All keys on the front-panel are disabled in this mode. This
command is the same as the SYSTem:REMote command except that all
keys on the front-panel are disabled.
160
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
About the SCPI Language
About the SCPI Language
Common Commands
The IEEE 488.2 standard defines the common commands that perform
functions such as reset, self-test, status byte query, and so on. Common
commands are four or five characters in length, always begin with an
asterisk (*), and may include one or more parameters. The command 4
keyword is separated from the first parameter by a space character.
Some examples of common commands are shown below:
*RST
*ESE 32
*STB?
SCPI Command Format
The SCPI commands perform functions like closing/opening switches,
making measurements, querying instrument states or retrieving data. A
subsystem command structure is a hierarchical structure that usually
consists of a top level (or root) command, one or more lower level
commands, and their parameters. The following example shows part of a
typical subsystem:
[ROUTe:]
CLOSe <channel_list>
SCAN <scan_list>
SCAN:SIZE?
[ROUTe:] is the root command, CLOSe and SCAN are second level
commands with parameters, and :SIZE? is a third level command.
Command Separator
A colon (:) always separates a command from the next lower level
command, as shown below:
ROUTe:SCAN:SIZE?
Colons separate the root command from the second level command
(ROUTe:SCAN) and the second level from the third level (SCAN:SIZE?).
161
5
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
About the SCPI Language
Abbreviated Commands
The command syntax shows most commands as a mixture of upper and
lower case letters. The upper case letters indicate the abbreviated
spelling for the command. For shorter program lines, send the
abbreviated form. For better program readability, you may send the
entire command. The instrument will accept either the abbreviated or
the entire command.
For example, if the command syntax shows CHANnel, then CHAN and
CHANNEL are both acceptable forms. Other forms of CHANnel, such as
CHANN or CHANNE will generate an error. You may use upper or lower
case letters. Therefore, CHANNEL, channel, and ChAnNeL are all
acceptable.
Implied Commands
5
Implied commands are those which appear in square brackets ([ ]) in the
command syntax. (Note that the brackets are not part of the command
and are not sent to the instrument.) Suppose you send a second level
command but do not send the preceding implied command. In this case,
the instrument assumes you intend to use the implied command and it
responds as if you had sent it. Examine the partial [ROUTe:] subsystem
shown below:
[ROUTe:]CLOSe <channel_list>
CLOSe? <channel_list>
SCAN <scan_list>
[:LIST]
:SIZE?
The root command [ROUTe:] is an implied command. To close relays in
a channel list, you can send either of the following command statements:
ROUT:CLOS (@100:107, 201, 205)
or 
CLOS (@100:107, 201, 205)

These commands function the same: closing Channels 0 through 7 in 
Slot 1 and Channels 1 and 5 in Slot 2.
162
Chapter 5 Remote Interface Reference
About the SCPI Language
Parameters
These are parameter types used with the SCPI language:
Parameter Type
Description
Numeric
Accepts all commonly used decimal representations of number including 
optional signs, decimal points, and scientific notation.
123, 123E2, -123, -1.23E2, .123, 1.23E-2, 1.23000E-01. 
Special cases include MINimum, MAXimum, and DEFault.
Boolean
4
Represents a single binary condition that is either true or false.
ON, OFF, 1, 0
Discrete
Selects from a finite number of values. These parameters use mnemonics to
represent each valid setting.
An example is the TRIGger:SOURce <source> command 
where source can be BUS, EXT, HOLD, or IMM.
Parameters shown within square brackets ([ ]) are optional. (Note that
the brackets are not part of the command and are not sent to the
instrument.) If you do not specify a value for an optional parameter, the
instrument uses the default value. For example, consider the
ARM:COUNt?[<MIN|MAX>] command. If you send the command without
specifying a parameter, the present ARM:COUNt setting is returned. If
you send the MIN parameter, the command returns the minimum count
available. If you send the MAX parameter, the command returns the
maximum count available. Be sure to place a space between the
command and the parameter.
Linking Commands
To link IEEE 488.2 Common Commands with SCPI Commands, use a
semicolon between the commands. For example:
*RST;CONF:EXT:OUTP ON
or
TRIG:SOUR HOLD;*TRG
To link multiple SCPI commands, use both a semicolon and a colon
between the commands. For example:
ARM:COUN 1;:TRIG:SOUR EXT
163
5
5
164
6
6
Error Messages
Error Messages
•
Errors are retrieved in first-in-first-out (FIFO) order. The first error
returned is the first error that was stored. Errors are cleared as you
read them. When you have read all errors from the queue, the
ERROR annunciator turns off and the errors are cleared. The
instrument beeps once each time an error is generated.
•
If more than 10 errors have occurred, the last error stored in the
queue (the most recent error) is replaced with -350, “Queue overflow”.
No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the
queue. If no errors have occurred when you read the error queue, the
instrument responds with +0, “No error”.
•
The error queue is cleared by the *CLS (clear status) command or
when power is cycled. The errors are also cleared when you read the
queue. The error queue is not cleared by an instrument reset (*RST
command) or a card/module reset (SYSTem:CPON command).
•
Front-Panel Operation: 

If the ERROR annunciator is on, press View, select ERROR, and
press Enter. Use the knob to scroll through the error numbers. Press
the arrow key (right) to view the text of the error message. All errors
are cleared when you exit the menu.
01:ERR
6
First error in queue
•
-113
Error code
Remote Interface Operation: 

SYSTem:ERRor? Read and clear one error from the error queue. 

Errors have the following format (the error string may contain up to
80 characters): 

-113, “Undefined header”
166
Chapter 6 Error Messages
Execution Errors
Execution Errors
-101
Invalid character
An invalid character was found in the command string. You may have
used an invalid character such as #, {, $, or % in the command header or
within a parameter.
Example: OPEN {@101)
-102
4
Syntax error
Invalid syntax was found in the command string. You may have inserted
a blank space before or after a colon in the command header, or before a
comma. Or you may have omitted the ‘‘@’’ character in the channel list
syntax.
Examples: ROUT:CHAN: DEL 1 or ROUT:OPEN ( 101:102)
-103
Invalid separator
An invalid separator was found in the command string. You may have
used a comma instead of a colon, semicolon, or blank space. You omitted
a blank space between the SCPI command the first parameter.
Example: TRIG:COUNT,1
-105
GET not allowed
A Group Execute Trigger (GET) is not allowed within a command string.
-108
Parameter not allowed
More parameters were received than expected for this command. You may
have entered an extra parameter or added a parameter to a command
that does not require a parameter. 
Example: ROUT:CLOS:STAT? 2
-109
Missing parameter
Fewer parameters were received than were expected for this command.
You have omitted one or more parameters that are required for this
command. 
Example: ROUT:CHAN:DEL 10,
-112
Program mnemonic too long
A command header was received which contained more than the
maximum 12 characters allowed. 
Example: CONFIGURE:EXTERNAL:TRIGGER:SOURCE 2
-113
Undefined header
A command was received that is not valid for this instrument. You may
have misspelled the command or it may not be a valid command. If you
are using the short form of this command, remember that it may contain
up to four letters.
Examples: TRIGG:SOUR TIM
167
6
Chapter 6 Error Messages
Execution Errors
-121
Invalid character in number
An invalid character was found in the number specified for a parameter.
Example: TRIG:TIMER 12..34
-123
Exponent too large
A numeric parameter was found whose exponent was large than 32,000.
-124
Too many digits
A numeric parameter was found whose mantissa contained more than
255 digits, excluding leading zeros.
-128
Numeric data not allowed
The wrong parameter type was found in the command string. You may
have specified a number where a string or expression was expected, or
vice versa. 
Examples: DISP:TEXT 5.0 or ROUT:CLOSE 101
-131
Invalid suffix
A suffix was incorrectly specified for a numeric parameter. You may have
misspelled the suffix.
-134
Suffix too long
A header suffix is the number that can be appended to the end of some
command headers. This error is generated if the header suffix contains
more than 12 characters.
-138
Suffix not allowed
A suffix was received following a numeric parameter. You may have
misspelled the suffix.
-148
Character data not allowed
A discrete parameter was received but a character string or a numeric
parameter was expected. Check the list of parameters to verify that you
have used a valid parameter type. 
Examples: ROUTE:CLOSE CH101 or DIAG:DISP TEXT123 
(the string must be enclosed in quotes)
-151
Invalid string data
An invalid character string was received. Check to see if you have
enclosed the character string in quotation marks and verify that the
string contains valid ASCII characters.
Example: DIAG:DISP ’TESTING (the ending quote is missing)
-158
String data not allowed
A character string was received but is not allowed for this command.
Check the list of parameters to verify that you have used a valid
parameter type.
6
168
Chapter 6 Error Messages
Execution Errors
-161
Invalid block data
For a definite-length block, the number of types of data sent does not
match the number of bytes that you specified in the block header
-168
Block data not allowed
Data was sent to the instrument in SCPI definite length block format but
this command does not accept this format.
-178
Expression data not allowed
A channel list was received but is not allowed for this command.
Example: SYST:CTYPE? (@100)
4
-222
Data out of range
A numeric parameter value is outside the valid range for this command.
Example: ARM:COUNT -3
-223
Too much data
A character string was received but could not be executed because the
string length was more than 13 characters. This error can be generated
by the DIAGnostic:DISPlay command.
-224
Illegal parameter value
A discrete parameter was received which was not a valid choice for this
command. You may have used an invalid parameter choice.
Example: TRIG:SOURCE ALARM (ALARM is not a valid choice)
-310
System error
A firmware defect has been found. This is not a fatal error but you should
contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Service Center (see page 8) if
this error is reported.
-350
Queue overflow
The error queue is full because more than 10 errors have occurred. No
additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue. The
error queue is cleared by the *CLS (clear status) command or when power
is cycled. The errors are also cleared when you read the queue.
-410
Query INTERRUPTED
A command was received which sends data to the output buffer, but the
output buffer contained data from a previous command (the previous data
is not overwritten). The output buffer is cleared when power has been off
or after a bus Device Clear.
169
6
Chapter 6 Error Messages
Instrument Errors
-420
Query UNTERMINATED
The instrument was addressed to talk (i.e., send data over the interface)
but a command has not been received which sends data to the output
buffer. For example, you may have executed a ROUTe command (which
does not generate data) and then attempted to read data from the remote
interface.
-430
Query DEADLOCKED
A command was received which generates too much data to fit in the
output buffer and the input buffer is also full. Command execution
continues but all data is lost.
-440
Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response
The *IDN? command must be the last query command within a command
string. The *IDN? command returns an indefinite length string which
cannot be combined with any other query command.
Example: *IDN?;*STB?
Instrument Errors
6
100
Number of SAV/RCL out of range
This error will occur if a number included in *SAV or *RCL is out of range.
Up to 50 instrument setups can be stored using Firmware REV 4.0
(numbered 1 to 50). Up to 10 setups can be stored using Firmware REV
1.0/2.0/3.0 (numbered 1 to 10).
Examples: *SAV 52 or *RCL 0
101
Unable to recall - scan is running
102
Unable to recall - memory is empty
103
Unable to recall - modules were changed
Before recalling a stored channel setup, the instrument verifies the same
module types are installed in each slot. This error indicates that the
instrument has detected one or more modules have been replaced with
other module types or have been removed from the instrument.
104
Unable to store - scan is running
110
Slot number out of range
The specified slot number is invalid. The channel number has the form
(@snn), where s is the slot number and nn is the channel number. 
Example: OPEN (@604)
111
Data out of range
The data for some commands is invalid.
Example: SOUR:DIG:DATA:BYTE:VAL 266 (valid data should be 0-255)
170
Chapter 6 Error Messages
Instrument Errors
112
Not able to perform requested operation
The requested operation is not valid for the instrument.
Example: FUNC 3,BIWIRE2 (the module in Slot 3 is not an N2260A).
113
Block name not exist
In the 3499A/B/C a maximum two blocks can be defined. The two defined
blocks can be read and written, etc. If you read or write a block that has
not been previously defined, this error occurs.
114
Block name already exist
4
The instrument has detected a defined block name, while you are to define
it once more.
115
Two Blocks already exist
The instrument has detected two defined block names while you are to
define them once more.
116
Channel number out of range
The specified channel number is invalid for the module in the selected
slot. The channel number has the form (@snn), where s is the slot number
and nn is the channel number.
Example: ROUT:CLOSE (@156)
201
Scan list is empty
202
Scan initiated
203
Scan init ignored
204
Trig ignored
205
Hardware trigger too fast
206
Too many channels
207
Card in use
208
N2282A execution error
300
Unable to execute this command in local mode
501
RS232 data receiving error
502
Internal command error
503
RS232 only - unable to execute on GPIB
There are three commands which are allowd only with the RS-232
interface:
SYSTem:LOCal, SYSTem:REMote, SYSTem:RWLock.




6
171
Chapter 6 Error Messages
Self-Test Errors
Self-Test Errors
The errors listed below indicate failures that may occur during a self-test
(in SCPI mode).
Error Number
Note
Description
+1
ROM test failed.
+2
GPIB test failed.
+3
RS-232 test failed.
+4
Front-panel test failed.
The string “+0” returned from a *TST? command indicates that all the
tests have passed. In this case, “PASSED” displays on the front-panel of
the instrument.
6
172
7
7
Plug-in Modules
Plug-in Modules
This chapter provides a general description, simplified schematic, and
wiring information for each plug-in module. This chapter contains the
following sections:
7
•
N2260A 40-Channel MUX Module, on page 176
•
N2261A 40-Channel GP Relay Module, on page 182
•
N2262A 4 x 8 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module, on page 185
•
N2263A 32-bit Digital I/O Module, on page 188
•
N2264A Multifunction Module, on page 192
•
N2265A Multifunction Module, on page 196
•
N2266A 40-Channel MUX Module, on page 200
•
N2267A 8-Channel High Current GP Module, on page 206
•
N2268A 50 3.0 GHz Dual 1-to-4 MUX Module, on page 210
•
N2270A 10-Channel High Voltage MUX Module, on page 212
•
N2272A 1 GHz RF 1-to-9 MUX Module, on page 214
•
N2276A Dual 1-to-6(4) Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module, on page 217
•
N2276B Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module, on page 221
•
N2280A Quadruple 1-to-2 Optical Switch Module, on page 225
•
N2281A Dual 1-to-4 Optical Switch Module, on page 226
•
N2282A 1-to-8 Optical Switch Module, on page 228
•
44470A 10-Channel MUX Module, on page 230
•
44470D 20-Channel MUX Module, on page 233
•
44471A 10-Channel GP Relay Module, on page 236
174
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
Note
•
44471D 20-Channel GP Relay Module, on page 239
•
44472A Dual 4-Channel VHF Switch Module, on page 242
•
44473A 4 x 4 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module, on page 245
•
44474A 16-Bit Digital I/O Module, on page 248
•
44475A Breadboard Module, on page 251
•
44476A Microwave Switch Module, on page 257
•
44476B Microwave Switch Module, on page 260
•
44477A Form-C Relay Module, on page 265
•
44478A/B 1.3 GHz Dual 4-to-1 MUX Modules, on page 267
•
Protection Networks, on page 272
•
Terminals and Connections Information, on page 275
4
You should not remove or install modules while the instrument is power
on. If a module is accidentally removed or installed while the instrument
power is on, the instrument will preform a reset. Reset conditions are
described beginning on page 74.
7
175
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2260A 40-Channel MUX Module
N2260A 40-Channel MUX Module
The Agilent N2260A is a configurable multiplexer (MUX) module. It
contains 40 2-wire latching relays for switching, and two non-latching
tree relays for configuration.
The N2260A can be configured as:
•
•
•
•
an 80-channel 1-wire multiplexer,
a 40-channel 2-wire multiplexer (default),
two independent, 20-channel 2-wire multiplexers, or
a 20-channel 4-wire multiplexer.
These modes can be selected from the front-panel or with a SCPI
command (see page 83).
An instrument power-on or reset will set the N2260A to its default
configuration (as a 40-channel 2-wire MUX module).
The N2260A can be operated in either SCPI mode or 3488A mode, but
configuration is only possible in the SCPI mode. In 3488A mode, the
N2260A can only be used as a 40-channel 2-wire MUX module.
7
A parallel switching feature makes the N2260A well suited for high
speed switching. The 40 2-wire relays on the N2260A can be separated
into four groups and up to 10 relays in the same group can be closed
simultaneously (parallel switching). The groups are: group 1 (channel 00
through channel 09), group 2 (channel 10 through channel 19), group 3
(channel 20 through channel 29) and group 4 (channel 30 through
channel 39). Additional information about parallel switching is given on
page 84.
Specifications for the N2260A are given on page 303.
176
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2260A 40-Channel MUX Module
N2260A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic of the N2260A is shown below. The 40 2-wire
channel relays (CH00-CH39) are divided into two banks: BANK 0 and
BANK 1. Each bank consists of 20 2-wire switching channels and a
common bus (COM0 & COM1). There is also a single-ended common
terminal (SE-COM) used when the multiplexer is configured to 80channel 1-wire mode. The two tree relays, T98 and T99, are used to
configure the N2260A.
4
N2260A MUX Module
L
H CH00
L
H CH09
COMMON BUS
L
H CH10
L
H CH19
T98
Terminal Block
L
CH00
H
L
CH09
H
L
COM0
H
BANK 0
L
CH10
H
L
CH19
H
SE-COM
T99
L
H CH20
L
H CH29
COMMON BUS
L
H CH30
L
H CH39
L
CH20
H
7
L
CH29
H
L
COM1
H
BANK 1
L
CH30
H
L
CH39
H
177
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2260A 40-Channel MUX Module
1-Wire Mode In this mode, either the High (H) or Lo (L) terminal of a
channel is switched to the single-ended (SE-COM) terminal. The Lo
terminals form the first 40 1-wire channels (00-39), and the Hi terminals
form the second 40 1-wire channels (40-79). Only one channel can be
closed at a time in the 1-wire mode.
2-Wire Mode This is the default mode of the N2260A and provides 40 2wire channels. In this mode, the Hi and Lo terminals of a channel are
switched to Hi and Lo common terminals (COM0 and COM1). The
channels are numbered 00 through 39.
Dual 2-Wire Mode In this mode, the N2260A is separated into two
independent banks (BANK 0 & BANK 1). Each bank consists of 20 2wire channels and a corresponding common bus, COM0 and COM1. The
channels in BANK 0 are numbered 00 through 19, and the channels in
BANK 1 are numbered 20 through 39.
Note
You must modify the PC board to use this mode of operation. The
modification is described in the next section.
4-Wire Mode In this mode, the two banks (BANK 0 & BANK 1) are
paired to form a 20-channel 4-wire multiplexer. The first channels of
each bank (CH00 & CH20) form Channel 00, the second channels of the
each bank (CH01 & CH21) form Channel 01, and so on.
Note
An instrument power-on or reset will set the N2260A to its default
configuration as a 40-channel 2-wire MUX module.
7
178
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2260A 40-Channel MUX Module
Dual 2-Wire Mode - PC Board Modification
To operate the module in the Dual 2-wire mode, you must make
modifications to the module’s printed circuit board. Specifically, you
must unsolder and remove relay T99. On the PC board, T99 has a
reference designator of K340. The location of K340 is shown below.
Caution
You must use proper anti-static procedures, de-soldering techniques, and
equipment to prevent damage to the PC board.
4
7
K340
179
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2260A 40-Channel MUX Module
N2260A Wiring Information
There are four methods available to connect to the N2260A:
•
•
A screw terminal block, the N2290A (described on page 277).
•
•
A DIN96 to twin D50 Cable, the N2297A (described on page 279).
A direct wiring (insulation displacement) connector, the N2296A
(described on page 278).
A DIN96 to four D25 Cable, the N2299A (described on page 281).
The screw terminal block (N2290A) is shown below. To use the other
connection options, you will need to use the module pinout information
on page 181.
Connect to P401
(CO N N ECT TO P401)
7
180
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2260A 40-Channel MUX Module
N2260A Pinout P401 is a 96-pin male DIN connector mounted on the
N2260A. The connector and pin assignments are shown below.
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
5 4 3
2 1
C
B
A
C
B
A
View from the Pin Side of the Connector
Pin #
A
B
C
Pin #
A
B
C
4
1
CH0_L
CH1_L
CH2_L
17
CH20_L
CH21_L
CH22_L
2
CH0_H
CH1_H
CH2_H
18
CH20_H
CH21_H
CH22_H
3
CH3_L
CH4_L
CH5_L
19
CH23_L
CH24_L
CH25_L
4
CH3_H
CH4_H
CH5_H
20
CH23_H
CH24_H
CH25_H
5
CH6_L
CH7_L
CH8_L
21
CH26_L
CH27_L
CH28_L
6
CH6_H
CH7_H
CH8_H
22
CH26_H
CH27_H
CH28_H
7
CH9_L
Not used
COM0_L
23
CH29_L
Not used
COM1_L
8
CH9_H
Not used
COM0_H
24
CH29_H
Not used
COM1_H
9
CH10_L
CH11_L
CH12_L
25
CH30_L
CH31_L
CH32_L
10
CH10_H
CH11_H
CH12_H
26
CH30_H
CH31_H
CH32_H
11
CH13_L
CH14_L
CH15_L
27
CH33_L
CH34_L
CH35_L
12
CH13_H
CH14_H
CH15_H
28
CH33_H
CH34_H
CH35_H
13
CH16_L
CH17_L
CH18_L
29
CH36_L
CH37_L
CH38_L
14
CH16_H
CH17_H
CH18_H
30
CH36_H
CH37_H
CH38_H
15
CH19_L
Not used
SE-COM
31
CH39_L
Not used
Not used
16
CH19_H
Not used
SE-COM
32
CH39_H
Not used
Not used
181
7
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2261A 40-Channel GP Relay Module
N2261A 40-Channel GP Relay Module
The Agilent N2261A GP Relay Module contains 40 independent Single
Pole - Single Throw (SPST, Form A) latching relays.
If necessary, you can pair two N2261A modules to provide 2-wire
switching.
The N2261A can be operated in one of two modes: single channel 
break-before-make (BBM) or multiple channels in a closed position.
A parallel switching feature makes the N2261A well suited for high
speed switching. The 40 2-wire relays on the N2261A can be separated
into four groups and up to 10 relays in the same group can be closed
simultaneously (parallel switching). The groups are: group 1 (channel 00
through channel 09), group 2 (channel 10 through channel 19), group 3
(channel 20 through channel 29) and group 4 (channel 30 through
channel 39). Additional information about parallel switching is given on
page 84.
Specifications for the Agilent N2261A are given on page 305.
N2261A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic is shown below. The N2261A contains 40
independent Single Pole-Single Throw (SPST, Form A) latching relays. A
channel refers to an individual relay on the module. Channels are
numbered 00 through 39 for the N2261A.
N2261A GP Relay Module
L
H CH39
7
L
H CH20
L
H CH19
L
H CH00
182
Terminal Block
L
CH39
H
L
CH20
H
L
CH19
H
L
CH00
H
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2261A 40-Channel GP Relay Module
N2261A Wiring Information
There are four methods available to connect to the N2261A:
•
•
A screw terminal block, the N2291A (described on page 277).
•
•
A DIN96 to twin D50 Cable, the N2297A (described on page 279).
A direct wiring (insulation displacement) connector, the N2296A
(described on page 278).
4
A DIN96 to four D25 Cable, the N2299A (described on page 281).
The screw terminal block (N2291A) is shown below. To use the other
connection options, you will need to use the pinout information on page
184.
7
183
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2261A 40-Channel GP Relay Module
N2261A Pinout P401 is a 96-pin male DIN connector mounted on the
N2261A. The connector and pinout assignments are shown below.
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
5 4 3
2 1
C
B
A
C
B
A
View from the Pin Side of the Connector
Pin #
7
A
B
C
Pin #
A
B
C
1
CH0_L
CH1_L
CH2_L
17
CH20_L
CH21_L
CH22_L
2
CH0_H
CH1_H
CH2_H
18
CH20_H
CH21_H
CH22_H
3
CH3_L
CH4_L
CH5_L
19
CH23_L
CH24_L
CH25_L
4
CH3_H
CH4_H
CH5_H
20
CH23_H
CH24_H
CH25_H
5
CH6_L
CH7_L
CH8_L
21
CH26_L
CH27_L
CH28_L
6
CH6_H
CH7_H
CH8_H
22
CH26_H
CH27_H
CH28_H
7
CH9_L
Not used
Not used
23
CH29_L
Not used
Not used
8
CH9_H
Not used
Not used
24
CH29_H
Not used
Not used
9
CH10_L
CH11_L
CH12_L
25
CH30_L
CH31_L
CH32_L
10
CH10_H
CH11_H
CH12_H
26
CH30_H
CH31_H
CH32_H
11
CH13_L
CH14_L
CH15_L
27
CH33_L
CH34_L
CH35_L
12
CH13_H
CH14_H
CH15_H
28
CH33_H
CH34_H
CH35_H
13
CH16_L
CH17_L
CH18_L
29
CH36_L
CH37_L
CH38_L
14
CH16_H
CH17_H
CH18_H
30
CH36_H
CH37_H
CH38_H
15
CH19_L
Not used
Not used
31
CH39_L
Not used
Not used
16
CH19_H
Not used
Not used
32
CH39_H
Not used
Not used
184
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2262A 4 x 8 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module
N2262A 4 x 8 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module
The Agilent N2262A 4 x 8 Matrix module contains 32 2-wire nodes
(crosspoints) organized in a 4-row by 8-column configuration. Each node
in the matrix contains a 2-wire latching relay for switching both Hi (H)
and Lo (L) terminals of a signal line. Multiple switches can be closed,
allowing any combination of row-to-column connections.
4
The parallel switching feature makes it well suited for high speed
switching applications. Up to 8 2-wire node/crosspoint relays in the same
row can be closed all at once (parallel switching).
The N2262A provides a convenient way to connect multiple test
instruments to multiple test points on a device or to multiple devices.
Multiple N2262A modules can be connected together, or used in
conjunction with other modules such as the N2260A 40-Channel MUX to
provide a wide variety of switching combinations.
Specifications for the Agilent N2262A are given on page 307.
N2262A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic is shown below. The N2262A contains 
32 2-wire crosspoints organized in a 4-row by 8-column configuration.
Each crosspoint relay has a unique two digit channel number mn, 
where m = row number (0-3) and n = column number (0-7).
COL0
COL1
COL7
H L
H L
H L
00
10
20
30
01
11
21
31
H
L
ROW0
H
L
ROW1
H
L
ROW2
H
L
ROW3
07
17
Channel 31 represents the relay
at the crosspoint of Row 3
(ROW3) and Column 1 (COL1).
27
37
CHANNEL 31
(ROW 3, COLUMN 1)
185
7
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2262A 4 x 8 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module
N2262A Wiring Information
There are three methods available to connect to the N2262A:
•
•
A screw terminal block, the N2292A (described on page 277).
•
A DIN96 to twin D25 Cable, the N2298A (described on page 280).
A direct wiring (insulation displacement) connector, the N2296A
(described on page 278).
The screw terminal block (N2292A) is shown below. To use the other
connection options, you will need to use the pinout information on page
187.
(CO N N ECT TO P300)
7
186
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2262A 4 x 8 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module
N2262A Pinout P300 is a 96-pin male DIN connector mounted on the
N2262A. The connector and pinout assignments are shown below. Note
that the A and B rows in the connector are not used.
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
5 4 3
C
B
A
2 1
C
B
A
4
View from the Pin Side of the Connector
Pin #
C
Pin #
C
Pin #
C
Pin #
C
1
COL0_L
9
Not used
17
Not used
25
COL4_L
2
COL0_H
10
ROW0_L
18
ROW2_L
26
COL4_H
3
COL1_L
11
ROW0_H
19
ROW2_H
27
COL5_L
4
COL1_H
12
Not used
20
Not used
28
COL5_H
5
COL2_L
13
Not used
21
Not used
29
COL6_L
6
COL2_H
14
ROW1_L
22
ROW3_L
30
COL6_H
7
COL3_L
15
ROW1_H
23
ROW3_H
31
COL7_L
8
COL3_H
16
Not used
24
Not used
32
COL7_H
7
187
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2263A 32-bit Digital I/O Module
N2263A 32-bit Digital I/O Module
The Agilent N2263A is a 32-bit digital I/O module. It provides 32
bidirectional data lines (bits) and 3 handshake lines (used for control and
handshaking). All lines are TTL compatible. The 32 I/O bits can be
addressed as 32 individual 1-bit ports, four independent 8-bit ports, two
independent 16-bit ports, or one 32-bit port.
The four 8-bit ports are completely independent of each other and may be
used separately. For example, two of the ports can be used for output
operations, while the other two ports are used for input operations.
However, all 8 bits in a given port must be either input or output bits
(not a combination of input and output).
Five handshaking modes are available for this module. The handshaking
modes are described beginning on page 98. Handshaking uses up to
three control lines:
•
Peripheral Control (PCTL)
•
I/O direction (I/O)
•
Peripheral Flag (PFLG)
Port and bit numbering is show in the table below. Note that the ports
are numbered differently if you are using the 3488 System mode.
System
Mode
32-Bit Port #
16-Bit Port #
PORT 00
7
SCPI mode
PORT 00
PORT 02
PORT 04
3488A Mode
PORT 06
PORT 05
8-Bit Port #
Bit #
PORT 00
Bits 0-7
PORT 01
Bits 8-15
PORT 02
Bits 16-23
PORT 03
Bits 24-31
PORT 00
Bits 0-7
PORT 01
Bits 8-15
PORT 02
Bits 16-23
PORT 03
Bits 24-31
Specification for the N2263A are given on page 309.
188
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2263A 32-bit Digital I/O Module
N2263A Simplified Schematic
The N2263A consists of 32 bidirectional I/O channels, each of which
includes digital in and digital out circuits as shown in the simplified
schematic below. Each input has its own pull-up resistor, allowing easy
detection of external termination (grounded or open-circuited) status.
Each output driver is capable of sinking an externally-supplied current
up to 600 mA, making it possible to control relays without the need for
additional driver circuitry.
4
OPEN COLLECTOR/
CURRENT SINK
(VMOS FET)
ONE I/O LINE
+5V
10K
TERMINAL
CONNECTION
BLOCK
DRIVER OUTPUT
60V
INPUT SENSE
REFERENCE
VOLTAGE
+5V
PCTL or I/O
Handshake Signal
+5V
Resetable fuse
215
10K
TERMINAL
CONNECTION
BLOCK
7
PFLG Handshake Signal
215
+5V
+5V
Resetable fuse
10K
TERMINAL
CONNECTION
BLOCK
189
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2263A 32-bit Digital I/O Module
N2263A Wiring Information
There are four methods available to connect to the N2263A:
•
•
A screw terminal block, the N2293A (described on page 277).
•
•
A DIN96 to twin D50 Cable, the N2297A (described on page 279).
A direct wiring (insulation displacement) connector, the N2296A
(described on page 278).
A DIN96 to four D25 Cable, the N2299A (described on page 281).
The screw terminal block (N2293A) is shown below. To use the other
connection options, you will need to use the pinout information on page
191.
(CON N ECT TO P702)
7
190
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2263A 32-bit Digital I/O Module
N2263A Pinout P702 is a 96-pin male DIN connector mounted on the
N2263A. The connector and pinout assignments are shown below.
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
5 4 3
2 1
C
B
A
C
B
A
View from the Pin Side of the Connector
4
Pin #
A
B
C
Pin #
A
B
C
1-2
Not used
Not used
Not used
19
BIT16
BIT17
BIT18
3
BIT0
BIT1
BIT2
20
GND
GND
GND
4
GND
GND
GND
21
BIT19
BIT20
BIT21
5
BIT3
BIT4
BIT5
22
GND
GND
GND
6
GND
GND
GND
23
BIT22
BIT23
GND
7
BIT6
BIT7
GND
24
GND
GND
GND
8
GND
GND
GND
25
BIT24
BIT25
BIT26
9
BIT8
BIT9
BIT10
26
GND
GND
GND
10
GND
GND
GND
27
BIT27
BIT28
BIT29
11
BIT11
BIT12
BIT13
28
GND
GND
GND
12
GND
GND
GND
29
BIT30
BIT31
GND
13
BIT14
BIT15
GND
30
GND
GND
GND
14
GND
GND
GND
31
I/O
PCTL
PFLG
15-18
Not used
Not used
Not used
32
GND
GND
GND
7
191
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2264A Multifunction Module
N2264A Multifunction Module
The Agilent N2264A multifunction module combines a GP relay
function, a high-current GP relay function, and a digital input/output
function on a single module. It consists of:
•
•
12-Channel GP relays (non-latching Form-A)
•
16-bit Digital I/O
3-Channel High-current GP relays (non-latching Form-A), capable of
switching up to 5 amps.
The parallel switching feature makes the module well suited for high
speed switching applications. Any 10 of the 15 GP relays on the N2264A
can be closed all at once (parallel switching). Additional information
about parallel switching is given on page 84.
Five handshaking modes are available for the digital I/O function. The
handshaking modes are described beginning on page 98. Handshaking
uses up to three control lines:
•
Peripheral Control (PCTL)
•
I/O direction (I/O)
•
Peripheral Flag (PFLG)
Port and bit numbering is show in the table below. Note that the ports
are numbered differently if you are using the 3488 System mode.
7
Operating Mode
16-Bit Port #
SCPI mode
PORT 30
3488A Mode
PORT 32
8-Bit Port #
Bit #
PORT 30
Bits 30-37
PORT 31
Bits 38-45
PORT 30
Bits 30-37
PORT 31
Bits 38-45
Specifications for the N2264A are given on page 310.
192
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2264A Multifunction Module
N2264A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic is shown below. There are three independent
functions on the N2264A: the 12-channel GP Relay (CH00-11), the 3channel High-current GP Relay (CH20-22), and the 16-bit Digital I/O
(bits 30-45).
Terminal Block
4
Terminal Block
CH20
CH21
CH22
OPEN COLLECTOR/
CURRENT SINK
(VMOS FET)
ONE I/O LINE
+5V
10K
TERMINAL
CONNECTION
BLOCK
DRIVER OUTPUT
60V
INPUT SENSE
REFERENCE
VOLTAGE
+5V
PCTL or I/O
Handshake Signal
Resetable fuse
215
10K
TERMINAL
CONNECTION
BLOCK
+t
PFLG Handshake Signal
215
7
+5V
+5V
+5V
Resetable fuse
+t
10K
TERMINAL
CONNECTION
BLOCK
193
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2264A Multifunction Module
N2264A Wiring Information
There are four methods available to connect to the N2264A:
•
•
A screw terminal block, the N2294A (described on page 277).
•
•
A DIN96 to twin D50 Cable, the N2297A (described on page 279).
A direct wiring (insulation displacement) connector, the N2296A
(described on page 278).
A DIN96 to four D25 Cable, the N2299A (described on page 281).
The screw terminal block (N2294A) is shown below. To use the other
connection options, you will need to use the pinout information given on
page 195.
CONNECT TO P601
7
Caution
12 pins (6 H and 6 L) are provided for each channel of the 3-Channel
High-current GP Relay. Make sure to use ALL 12 pins whenever the
switched current exceeds 1 amp.
194
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2264A Multifunction Module
N2264A Pinout P601 is a 96-pin male DIN connector mounted on the
N2264A. The connector and pinout assignments are shown below.
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
5 4 3
2 1
C
B
A
C
B
A
View from the Pin Side of the Connector
Pin #
Pin #
A
4
A
B
C
B
C
1
BIT30
BIT31
BIT32
17
CH6_L
CH7_L
CH8_L
2
GND
GND
GND
18
CH6_H
CH7_H
CH8_H
3
BIT33
BIT34
BIT35
19
CH9_L
CH10_L
CH11_L
4
BIT36
BIT37
GND
20
CH9_H
CH10_H
CH11_H
5
GND
GND
GND
21
CH20_L
CH20_L
CH20_L
6
BIT38
BIT39
BIT40
22
CH20_L
CH20_L
CH20_L
7
GND
GND
GND
23
CH20_H
CH20_H
CH20_H
8
BIT41
BIT42
BIT43
24
CH20_H
CH20_H
CH20_H
9
BIT44
BIT45
GND
25
CH21_L
CH21_L
CH21_L
10
I/O
PCTL
PFLG
26
CH21_L
CH21_L
CH21_L
11
GND
GND
GND
27
CH21_H
CH21_H
CH21_H
12
Not used
Not used
Not used
28
CH21_H
CH21_H
CH21_H
13
CH0_L
CH1_L
CH2_L
29
CH22_L
CH22_L
CH22_L
14
CH0_H
CH1_H
CH2_H
30
CH22_L
CH22_L
CH22_L
15
CH3_L
CH4_L
CH5_L
31
CH22_H
CH22_H
CH22_H
16
CH3_H
CH4_H
CH5_H
32
CH22_H
CH22_H
CH22_H
195
7
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2265A Multifunction Module
N2265A Multifunction Module
The Agilent N2265A is a multifunction module which consists of:
•
A 4 x 4 2-wire Matrix module (16 latching relays) and;
•
A 16-bit digital I/O module.
The parallel switching feature makes the matrix portion of this module
well suited for high-speed switching applications. Up to eight 2-wire
node/crosspoint relays in the same row can be closed all at once (parallel
switching). Additional information about parallel switching is given on
page 84.
Five handshaking modes are available for the digital I/O function. The
handshaking modes are described beginning on page 98. Handshaking
uses up to three control lines:
•
Peripheral Control (PCTL)
•
I/O direction (I/O)
•
Peripheral Flag (PFLG)
Port and bit numbering is show in the table below. Note that the ports
are numbered differently if you are using the 3488 System mode.
7
Operating Mode
16-Bit Port #
SCPI mode
PORT 40
3488A Mode
PORT 42
8-Bit Port #
Bit #
PORT 40
Bits 40-47
PORT 41
Bits 48-55
PORT 40
Bits 40-47
PORT 41
Bits 48-55
Specifications for the N2265A are shown on page 313.
N2265A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic of the N2265A is shown on the next page. The
N2265A is separated into two sections: the 4 x 4 2-wire matrix and the
16-bit digital I/O. A channel on the N2265A refers to an individual
crosspoint on the matrix, or an individual bit on the 16-bit digital I/O.
196
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2265A Multifunction Module
COL0
HL
COL1
COL2
COL3
HL
HL
HL
00
02
01
10
11
30
ROW0
H
L
ROW1
H
L
ROW2
H
L
ROW3
03
12
21
20
H
L
4
13
22
23
31
33
CHANNEL 32
(ROW 3, COLUMN 2)
OPEN COLLECTOR/
CURRENT SINK
(VMOS FET)
ONE I/O LINE
+5V
10K
TERMINAL
CONNECTION
BLOCK
DRIVER OUTPUT
60V
INPUT SENSE
REFERENCE
VOLTAGE
+5V
PCTL or I/O
Handshake Signal
+5V
Resetable fuse
215
TERMINAL
CONNECTION
BLOCK
+t
PFLG Handshake Signal
215
+5V
7
10K
+5V
Resetable fuse
+t
10K
TERMINAL
CONNECTION
BLOCK
197
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2265A Multifunction Module
N2265A Wiring Information
There are four methods available to connect to the N2265A:
•
•
A screw terminal block, the N2295A (described on page 277).
•
•
A DIN96 to twin D50 Cable, the N2297A (described on page 279).
A direct wiring (insulation displacement) connector, the N2296A
(described on page 278).
A DIN96 to four D25 Cable, the N2299A (described on page 281).
The screw terminal block (N2295A) is shown below. To use the other
connection options, you will need to use the pinout information on page
199.
(CO N N ECT TO P600)
7
198
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2265A Multifunction Module
N2265A Pinout P600 is a 96-pin male DIN connector mounted on the
N2265A. The connector and pinout assignments are shown below.
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
5 4 3
2 1
C
B
A
C
B
A
View from the Pin Side of the Connector
4
Pin #
A
B
C
Pin #
A
B
C
1
Not used
Not used
COL0_L
17
Not used
Not used
Not used
2
Not used
Not used
COL0_H
18
Not used
Not used
Not used
3
Not used
Not used
COL1_L
19
BIT40
BIT41
BIT42
4
Not used
Not used
COL1_H
20
GND
GND
GND
5
Not used
Not used
COL2_L
21
BIT43
BIT44
BIT45
6
Not used
Not used
COL2_H
22
GND
GND
GND
7
Not used
Not used
COL3_L
23
BIT46
BIT47
GND
8
Not used
Not used
COL3_H
24
GND
GND
GND
9
Not used
Not used
ROW0_L
25
BIT48
BIT49
BIT50
10
Not used
Not used
ROW0_H
26
GND
GND
GND
11
Not used
Not used
ROW1_L
27
BIT51
BIT52
BIT53
12
Not used
Not used
ROW1_H
28
GND
GND
GND
13
Not used
Not used
ROW2_L
29
BIT54
BIT55
GND
14
Not used
Not used
ROW2_H
30
GND
GND
GND
15
Not used
Not used
ROW3_L
31
I/O
PCTL
PFLG
16
Not used
Not used
ROW3_H
32
GND
GND
GND
7
199
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2266A 40-Channel MUX Module
N2266A 40-Channel MUX Module
The Agilent N2266A is a configurable multiplexer (MUX) module. It
contains 40 2-wire non-latching relays for switching and two nonlatching tree relays for configuration applications.
The N2266A can be configured as:
•
•
•
•
an 80-channel 1-wire multiplexer,
a 40-channel 2-wire multiplexer (default),
two independent 20-channel 2-wire multiplexer,
or a 20-channel 4-wire multiplexer.
These modes can be selected from the front-panel or with a SCPI
command (see page 83).
An instrument power-on or reset will set the N2266A to its default
configuration as a 40-channel 2-wire MUX module. When instrument
power is removed, all relays will open on the multiplexer.
The N2266A can be operated in either SCPI mode or 3488A mode, but
configuration is only possible in the SCPI mode. In 3488A mode, the
N2266A can only be used as a 40-channel 2-wire MUX module.
A parallel switching feature makes the N2266A well suited for high
speed switching. The 40 2-wire relays on the N2266A can be separated
into four groups and up to 10 relays in the same group can be closed
simultaneously (parallel switching). The groups are: group 1 (channel 00
through channel 09), group 2 (channel 10 through channel 19), group 3
(channel 20 through channel 29) and group 4 (channel 30 through
channel 39). Additional information about parallel switching is given on
page 84.
7
Specifications for the N2266A are given on page 315.
Caution
In order to stay within the 20W power limit set for convection cooling, no
more than three (3) N2266A 40-Channel MUX Modules should be
installed in an Agilent 3499A mainframe; the remaining two slots must
remain empty. Other module combinations are acceptable; for example,
two N2266A MUX modules plus any combination of other Agilent
modules is permissible. This limitation does not apply to the 3499B or
3499C mainframes.
200
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2266A 40-Channel MUX Module
N2266A Simplified Schematic
The 40 2-wire channel relays (CH00-CH39) are divided into two banks:
BANK 0 and BANK 1. Each bank consists of 20 2-wire switching
channels and a common bus (COM0 & COM1). There is also a singleended common terminal (SE-COM) used when the multiplexer is
configured to 80-channel 1-wire mode. The two tree relays, T98 and T99,
are used to configure the N2260A.
4
N2266A MUX Module
L
H CH00
L
H CH09
COMMON BUS
L
H CH10
L
H CH19
T98
Terminal Block
L
CH00
H
L
CH09
H
L
COM0
H
BANK 0
L
CH10
H
L
CH19
H
SE-COM
T99
L
H CH20
L
H CH29
COMMON BUS
L
H CH30
L
H CH39
L
CH20
H
7
L
CH29
H
L
COM1
H
BANK 1
L
CH30
H
L
CH39
H
201
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2266A 40-Channel MUX Module
1-Wire Mode In this mode, either the High (H) or Low (L) terminal of a
channel is switched to the single-ended (SE-COM) terminal. The Low
terminals form the first 40 1-wire channels (00-39), and the High
terminals form the second 40 1-wire channels (40-79). Only one channel
can be closed at a time in the 1-wire mode.
Note
Only one channel can be closed at a time in the 1-wire mode.
2-Wire Mode This is the default mode of the N2266A and provides 40 2wire channels. In this mode, the Hi and Lo terminals of a channel are
switched to Hi and Lo common terminals (COM0 and COM1). The
channels are numbered 00 through 39.
Dual 2-Wire Mode In this mode, the N2266A is separated into two
independent banks (BANK 0 & BANK 1). Each bank consists of 20 2wire channels and a corresponding common bus, COM0 and COM1. The
channels in BANK 0 are numbered 00 through 19, and the channels in
BANK 1 are numbered 20 through 39.
Note
You must modify the PC board to use this mode of operation. The
modification is described in the next section.
4-Wire Mode In this mode, the two banks (BANK 0 & BANK 1) are
paired to form a 20-channel 4-wire multiplexer. The first channels of
each bank (CH00 & CH20) form Channel 00, the second channels of the
each bank (CH01 & CH21) form Channel 01, and so on.
Note
An instrument power-on or reset will set the N2266A to its default
configuration as a 40-channel 2-wire MUX module. When powered off, all
channels are opened.
7
202
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2266A 40-Channel MUX Module
Dual 2-Wire Mode - PC Board Modification
To operate the module in the Dual 2-wire mode, you must make
modifications to the module’s printed circuit board. Specifically, you
must unsolder and remove relay T99. On the PC board, T99 has a
reference designator of KT240. The location of KT240 is shown below.
Caution
You must use proper anti-static procedures, de-soldering techniques, and
equipment to prevent damage to the PC board.
4
7
KT240
203
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2266A 40-Channel MUX Module
N2266A Wiring Information
There are four methods available to connect to the N2266A:
•
•
A screw terminal block, the N2296A (described on page 277).
•
•
A DIN96 to twin D50 Cable, the N2297A (described on page 279).
A direct wiring (insulation displacement) connector, the N2296A
(described on page 278).
A DIN96 to four D25 Cable, the N2299A (described on page 281).
The screw terminal block (N2290A) is shown below. To use the other
connection options, you will need to use the pinout information on page
205.
(CO N N ECT TO P401)
7
204
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2266A 40-Channel MUX Module
N2266A Pinout P401 is a 96-pin male DIN connector mounted on the
N2266A. The connector and pin assignments are shown below.
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
5 4 3
2 1
C
B
A
C
B
A
View from the Pin Side of the Connector
Pin #
A
B
C
Pin #
A
B
C
4
1
CH0_L
CH1_L
CH2_L
17
CH20_L
CH21_L
CH22_L
2
CH0_H
CH1_H
CH2_H
18
CH20_H
CH21_H
CH22_H
3
CH3_L
CH4_L
CH5_L
19
CH23_L
CH24_L
CH25_L
4
CH3_H
CH4_H
CH5_H
20
CH23_H
CH24_H
CH25_H
5
CH6_L
CH7_L
CH8_L
21
CH26_L
CH27_L
CH28_L
6
CH6_H
CH7_H
CH8_H
22
CH26_H
CH27_H
CH28_H
7
CH9_L
Not used
COM0_L
23
CH29_L
Not used
COM1_L
8
CH9_H
Not used
COM0_H
24
CH29_H
Not used
COM1_H
9
CH10_L
CH11_L
CH12_L
25
CH30_L
CH31_L
CH32_L
10
CH10_H
CH11_H
CH12_H
26
CH30_H
CH31_H
CH32_H
11
CH13_L
CH14_L
CH15_L
27
CH33_L
CH34_L
CH35_L
12
CH13_H
CH14_H
CH15_H
28
CH33_H
CH34_H
CH35_H
13
CH16_L
CH17_L
CH18_L
29
CH36_L
CH37_L
CH38_L
14
CH16_H
CH17_H
CH18_H
30
CH36_H
CH37_H
CH38_H
15
CH19_L
Not used
SE-COM
31
CH39_L
Not used
Not used
16
CH19_H
Not used
SE-COM
32
CH39_H
Not used
Not used
205
7
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2267A 8-Channel High Current GP Module
N2267A 8-Channel High Current GP Module
The Agilent N2267A is an 8-Channel High Current GP module typically
used in mobile phone battery test applications. It can switch up to 8 A at
250 Vac or 5 A at 30 Vdc, with decreasing current to 1 A at 125 Vdc.
The module includes temperature control and protection circuitry,
designed to prevent the module temperature from rising too high. The
N2267A can potentially be switching up to 64 A (8 channels at 8 A). The
temperature control circuitry prevents dangerous overheating.
The 8 channels of the N2267A are independent, more than one channel
can be closed or opened at the same time.
Caution
Exceeding the maximum switching current of 8 Ampere on any channel
will damage the N2267A module and possibly the system.
Specifications for the N2267A are given on page 317.
Temperature Control
The temperature control circuitry includes two sensor ICs and a cooling
fan. When the temperature of the N2267A reaches 45o C (113o F), the
cooling fan on the module turns on. If the temperature drops below 
40o C (104o F), the fan turns off.
Over-temperature Protection
7
If the module temperature rises to 75o C (167o F), all channels on the
module are opened and a TTL-level warning output (connected via SMB)
on the rear panel will change from high to low. This output can be used
to drive an external LED or buzzer. The warning output will reset
(change from low to high) when the module temperature drops below 
59o C (138o F).
The over-temperature protection is controlled by hardware logic on the
module. Therefore, if the over-temperature protection has opened all the
channels on the module, the mainframe front-panel and system memory
will still indicate the original state of the channels. To regain control of
the channels, you must cycle the power to the module (reset and channel
commands will not work). Note that cycling power to regain control will
only work if the module temperature has dropped below 59o C (138o F)
otherwise the protection circuitry will be activated again.
206
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2267A 8-Channel High Current GP Module
Protection Network
The module circuit board contains provisions to allow you to mount relay
protection circuits. Inductive loads may exhibit large transient currents
that can damage the relay contacts. The type of protection and
component values are determined by the loads being switched. More
detailed information about protection circuits is given on page 272.
VARISTOR
4
RELAY
CONTACT
RC
NETWORK
The N2267A circuit board has a provision to allow you to install
protection networks in the relay paths. The figure below shows the
locations on the main circuit board.
Channel 00
Channel 07
Protection
Networks
7
207
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2267A 8-Channel High Current GP Module
N2267A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic is shown below. The N2267A consists of 
eight independent high current channels, each containing a Single PoleSingle Throw (SPST) Normally Open (Form A) relay.
Agilent N2267A Module
Connector
L
L
H
H
L
L
H
H
L
H
L
H
N2267A Wiring Information
The N2267A rear panel has two connectors: an SMB for the overtemperature warning signal, and a 16-pin male connector for connections
to the relay contacts.
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
The 16-pin connector on the rear-panel is an AMP Metrimate In-Line
Connector: Right Angle Header 207544-1.
7
An Agilent N2327A terminal block can be used to make the connections
to the N2267A. Included in the N2327A are an AMP Metrimate In-Line
Connector: Plug, 207542-1 and an AMP Contact Type III Socket AWG1814, 66360-2. Refer to page 282 for more information about the N2327A.
WARNING
Voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42 Vpk or 60 Vdc present an electric shock
hazard. Disconnect source voltages before removing or connecting the
source-to-module I/O connector or wiring the connector. All field wiring
must be rated for the highest voltage applied to any single channel.
208
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2267A 8-Channel High Current GP Module
N2267A Pinout J200 is a 16-pin male connector mounted on the rear
panel of the N2267A. The pinout assignments are shown below.
Pin#
Signal Name
Pin#
Signal Name
1
CH7_H
9
CH3_H
2
CH7_L
10
CH3_L
3
CH6_H
11
CH2_H
4
CH6_L
12
CH2_L
5
CH5_H
13
CH1_H
6
CH5_L
14
CH1_L
7
CH4_H
15
CH0_H
8
CH4_L
16
CH0_L
4
Over-temperature Pinout J103 is an SMB connector mounted on the
rear panel of the N2267A. The center conductor is a TTL signal. The
shield is connected to the module ground.
7
209
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2268A 50 3.0 GHz Dual 1-to-4 MUX Module
N2268A 50 3.0 GHz Dual 1-to-4 MUX Module
The Agilent N2268A consists of two, independent, 1-to-4 MUX switches
(GROUP 00 and GROUP 10) that provide bidirectional switching. The
latching relays in this module are configured in a “tree” structure to
provide isolation and low VSWR (voltage standing wave ratio). Each
channel in this module can switch up to 30 Vdc or peak ac at frequencies
from dc to 3.0 GHz.
Specifications for the N2268A are given on page 319.
N2268A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic is shown on the next page. The N2268A contains
two 1-to-4 MUXs, designated as GROUP 00 and GROUP 10. The two
groups are isolated from each other. Each 1-to-4 multiplexer consists of
three form-C relays. A tree relay is connected to the common channel.
The two channel relays allow selection of one of the four channel in each
group. Channels in each group are break-before-make and are numbered
as 00 through 03 for GROUP 00 and 10 through 13 for GROUP 10.
7
210
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2268A 50 3.0 GHz Dual 1-to-4 MUX Module
One channel in each group is connected to the common terminals. By
default, COM00 is connected to CH00 and COM10 is connected to CH10.
CH00
CH01
COM00
GROUP 00
4
CH02
CH03
CH10
CH11
COM10
GROUP 10
CH12
CH130
N2268A Wiring Information
The rear panel of the N2268A is shown below. Use male SMA connectors
to connect external signals to the N2268A module.
CHANNEL 02
CHANNEL 03
CHANNEL 10
CHANNEL 11
CHANNEL 12
CHANNEL 13
7
CHANNEL 01
COMMON 10
Group 10
CHANNEL 00
COMMON 00
Group 00
00
01 COM00 02
03
10
11 COM10 12
13
211
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2270A 10-Channel High Voltage MUX Module
N2270A 10-Channel High Voltage MUX Module
The Agilent N2270A is a 10-Channel 2-wire High Voltage multiplexer
typically used in the semiconductor test field. The Maximum Switching
Voltage is 1000 V peak, and the Maximum Switching Power is 10 W.
The module has a metal shell to minimize interference while switching
high voltage.
Specifications for the N2270A are given on page 321.
WARNING
Hazardous voltages may exist on the wiring and connectors. DO NOT
remove or install the module or the module connector until all external
voltages have been removed.
N2270A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic is shown below. The N2270A consists of 10 2-wire
channels and a common bus. The 10 channels of the N2270A are
numbered from 00 through 09 (CH0 through CH9).
L
H CH0
L
H CH1
7
L
H CH9
L
H
212
L
CH0
H
L
CH1
H
L
CH9
H
L
C
H
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2270A 10-Channel High Voltage MUX Module
N2270A Wiring Information
The 28-pin connector on the rear panel is an AMP 1800V Plug Connector
205689-2.
4
An Agilent N2320A terminal block can be used to wire external high
voltage signals to the N2270A. Included in the N2320A are an AMP
1800V Receptacle Connector, 205690-2 and an AMP AWG24-20 Socket
66399-4. The connector has a metal strain relief and you must make sure
to use additional insulation around the wires to prevent the wire
insulation being cut, broken or otherwise damaged at the strain relief
clamp. Refer to page 283 for more information about the N2320A.
WARNING
Voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42 Vpk or 60 Vdc present an electric shock
hazard. Disconnect source voltages before removing or connecting the
source-to-module I/O connector or wiring the connector. All field wiring
must be rated for the highest voltage applied to any channel.
N2270A Pinout The pinout assignments are shown below.
Column
1
Column
2
Column
3
Column
4
Column
5
Column
6
Column
7
Row1
CH2_H
CH3_H
CH4_H
Not Used
CH5_H
CH6_H
CH7_H
Row2
CH2_L
CH3_L
CH4_L
Not Used
CH5_L
CH6_L
CH7_L
Row3
CH0_H
CH1_H
Not Used
COM_H
Not Used
CH8_H
CH9_H
Row4
CH0_L
CH1_L
Not Used
COM_L
Not Used
CH8_L
CH9_L
213
7
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2272A 1 GHz RF 1-to-9 MUX Module
N2272A 1 GHz RF 1-to-9 MUX Module
The Agilent N2272A is a 1 GHz RF 1-to-9 Multiplexer well suited for use
in RF test and measurement applications. Seven channels are standard
branch channels. One channel, CH08, has smaller insertion loss and
lower VSWR and can be used either as standard branch channel or an
auxiliary channel.
Using the auxiliary channel, CH08, multiple N2272A modules can be
cascaded to form larger RF multiplexers while minimizing performance
degradation. For example, by connecting CH08 to the COM of a second
N2272A, a 17:1 multiplexer can be configured. Adding another N2272A
to channel 8 of the second N2272A allows a 25:1 multiplexer to be
configured, and so on.
Only one channel can be closed at a time. The Agilent N2272A does not
support the OPEN command (one channel must always be closed).
Closing a channel opens any other closed channel.
Note
The Agilent N2272A can only be used with the SCPI Mode of 3499
Firmware Revision 3.0 or later. See page 59 for details about the
firmware revisions.
Specifications for the N2272A are given on page 323.
7
214
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2272A 1 GHz RF 1-to-9 MUX Module
N2272A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic is shown below. The N2272A consists of series of
latching RF relays arranged in a tree structure. One common channel
(COM) and nine branch channels (numbered as CH00 through CH08)
are included in the N2272A. CH08 is also called an auxiliary channel
and can be used to expand channel count by connecting to another
N2272A. CH08 passes through only one relay and has a very short PC
board trace to provide smaller insertion loss and lower VSWR than the4
other channels. Only one channel can be closed at a time. In addition to
the channel relays, you can also query the relay cycle count of the tree
relays (T96, T97, T98, and T99).
Ch00
Ch01
T96
Ch02
Ch03
T98
T99
Ch04
Ch05
T97
Ch06
Ch07
AUX/Ch08
COM
7
N2272A Wiring Information
The rear panel of the N2272A contains 10 female BNC connectors.
00
01
02
03
AUX/ 08
COM
04
05
06
07
N2272A RF MUX
215
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2272A 1 GHz RF 1-to-9 MUX Module
Connecting Multiple N2272A’s
The figure below illustrates how to connect two or more N2272A’s
together to form larger channel count multiplexers. Additional N2272A’s
are added by connecting each COM to the low insertion loss/low VSWR
auxiliary channel on the first N2272A.The example below, shows a 1-to16 multiplexer. Channel 00 through 07 are on the first N2272A, and
channel 08 through 15 are on the second N2272A. Switch the first
N2272A COM to AUX/08 to access the second bank of multiplexer
channels. Additional multiplexers can be added as necessary.
COM Channel of chained N2272As
00
01
02
03
AUX/ 08
COM
04
05
06
07
N2272A RF MUX
00
01
02
03
AUX/ 08
COM
04
05
06
07
N2272A RF MUX
To next N2272A’s COM Channel if needed
You can also connect multiple N2272A’s in a tree structure to implement
high channel count multiplexers, however, this configuration will cause
signal delays.
COM Channel of tree-combined N2272As
00
01
02
03
AUX/ 08
COM
04
05
06
07
N2272A RF MUX
00
7
01
02
03
AUX/ 08
COM
04
05
06
07
N2272A RF MUX
00
01
02
03
AUX/ 08
COM
04
05
06
07
N2272A RF MUX
......
00
01
02
03
AUX/ 08
COM
N2272A RF MUX
216
04
05
06
07
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2276A Dual 1-to-6(4) Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module
N2276A Dual 1-to-6(4) Microwave MUX/
Attenuator Module
The Agilent 2276A contains microwave switch and attenuator driver
circuits. The microwave switches or attenuators can be mounted to the
rear panel of the module or connected with an auxiliary cable for
convenience. Several microwave switches and attenuators are available
4
for use with the module.
The N2276A is preconfigured in one of two options:
Option
Configuration
Switches Used
204
206 (default)
Dual 1-to-4 up to 20 GHz
Dual 1-to-6 up to 20 GHz
87104B
87106B
The N2276A is a three slot module and cannot be used in the 3499B 
two-slot mainframe.
Due to the drive circuitry, each N2276A causes about 0.5 second’s delay
during power up. Your 3499A/C may seem to turn on slower after you
add N2276A modules.
An 8-bit DIP switch on the module sets the configuration for the switches
and attenuators. Four connectors are located on the module; two 16-pin
connectors (labeled as switch0 & switch1) for connecting switches and
two 10-pin connectors (labeled as attenuator0 & attenuator1) for
connecting attenuators.
Note
Caution
The Agilent N2276A can only be used with the SCPI Mode of 3499A/C
Firmware Revision 3.0 or later. See page 59 for details about the
firmware revisions.
The driving circuitry of the module is capacitive. Turn off power before
installing or removing the module, switches, or attenuators.
Specifications for the N2276A are given on page 325.
217
7
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2276A Dual 1-to-6(4) Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module
Up to two attenuators can be added to the N2272A using provided 
ribbon cables. The following attenuators (user provided) are available
from Agilent:
External Attenuators (up to two may be used)
0 to 11 dB in 1 dB steps
Agilent 84904K
Agilent 84904L
0 to 90 dB in 10 dB steps
Agilent 84906K
Agilent 84906L
0 to 70 dB in 10 dB steps
Agilent 84907K
Agilent 84907L
up to 26.5 GHz
up to 40 GHz
up to 26.5 GHz
up to 40 GHz
up to 26.5 GHz
up to 40 GHz
N2276A Simplified Schematic
The simplified schematic below shows the Agilent 87106B 
1-to-6 microwave switch (option 206) as used in the Agilent N2276A.
Please refer to the switch or attenuator data sheets for information
specific to each switch and attenuator.
Only one channel in a switch may be closed at a time. Closing a channel
will open any previously closed channel.
87106A/B/C
7
6
5
218
4
3
2
1
C
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2276A Dual 1-to-6(4) Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module
Configuration
An 8-bit DIP switch (labeled S100) on the N2276A is used to configure
the switches and optional attenuators. The following table shows specific
configurations. If the 8-bit DIP switch’s configuration does not match the
switches or attenuators installed, errors or unexpected results will occur.
4
Attenuator 1
Attenuator 0
Switch 1
Switch 0
Bit 7- 6
Bit 5- 4
Bit 3- 2
Bit 1- 0
00
None
None
None
None
01
84904K/L
84904K/L
87104A/B/C
87104A/B/C
10
84906K/L
84906K/L
87106A/B/C
87106A/B/C
11
84907K/L
84907K/L
Reserved
Reserved
Bit Setting
7
219
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2276A Dual 1-to-6(4) Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module
N2276A Wiring Information
All the microwave switches for the N2276A have SMA female connectors.
For the attenuators, each standard 84904/6/7L model offers two female
2.4 mm connectors and each 84904/6/7L model with option 006 has two
female 2.92 mm connectors (compatible with SMA connectors). When
using 84904/6/7L series attenuators, be sure to order them with option
006 (SMA compatible) for wiring convenience.
The default ribbon cable for connecting attenuators to N2276A/B is 1.5 m
in length. A 1.5 m length ribbon cable for connecting microwave switches
to the switch connectors on the N2276A is available as Agilent part
number N2276-61003. This cable permits the microwave switches to be
placed in a convenient location.
7
220
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2276B Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module
N2276B Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module
The Agilent N2276B contains microwave switch and attenuator driver
circuits. The microwave switches or attenuators can be mounted to the
rear panel of the module or connected with an auxiliary cable for
convenience.
The N2276B is shipped without any switches, allowing for custom
4
configuration. Several microwave switches and attenuators are available
for use with the module.
The N2276B is a three slot module and cannot be used in the 3499B twoslot mainframe.
Due to the drive circuitry, each N2276B causes about 0.5 second’s delay
during power up. Your 3499A/C may seem to turn on slower after you
add N2276B modules.
An 8-bit DIP switch on the module sets the configuration for the switches
and attenuators. Four connectors are located on the module; two 16-pin
connectors (labeled as switch0 & switch1) for connecting switches and
two 10-pin connectors (labeled as attenuator0 & attenuator1) for
connecting attenuators.
Note
The Agilent N2276B can only be used with the SCPI Mode of 3499A/B/C
Firmware Revision 3.0 or later. See page 59 for details about the
firmware revisions.
Caution
The driving circuitry of the module is capacitive. Turn off power before
installing or removing the module, switches, or attenuators.
7
Specifications for the N2276B are given on page 325.
221
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2276B Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module
The following switches and attenuators are available from Agilent:
Switches (1x4) SP4T
Agilent 87104A
Agilent 87104B
Agilent 87104C
dc to 4 GHz
dc to 20 GHz
dc to 26.5 GHz
Switches (1x6) SP6T
Agilent 87106A
Agilent 87106B
Agilent 87106C
dc to 4 GHz
dc to 20 GHz
dc to 26.5 GHz
External Attenuators (up to two may be used)
0 to 11 dB in 1 dB steps
Agilent 84904K
Agilent 84904L
0 to 90 dB in 10 dB steps
Agilent 84906K
Agilent 84906L
0 to 70 dB in 10 dB steps
Agilent 84907K
Agilent 84907L
7
222
up to 26.5 GHz
up to 40 GHz
up to 26.5 GHz
up to 40 GHz
up to 26.5 GHz
up to 40 GHz
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2276B Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module
Configuration
An 8-bit DIP switch (labeled S100) on the N2276B is used to configure
optional switches and attenuators. The following table shows specific
configurations. If the 8-bit DIP switch’s configuration does not match the
switches or attenuators installed, errors or unexpected results will occur.
4
Attenuator 1
Attenuator 0
Switch 1
Switch 0
Bit 7- 6
Bit 5- 4
Bit 3- 2
Bit 1- 0
00
None
None
None
None
01
84904K/L
84904K/L
87104A/B/C
87104A/B/C
10
84906K/L
84906K/L
87106A/B/C
87106A/B/C
11
84907K/L
84907K/L
Reserved
Reserved
Bit Setting
7
223
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2276B Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module
N2276B Wiring Information
All the microwave switches for the N2276B have SMA female connectors.
For the attenuators, each standard 84904/6/7L model offers two female
2.4 mm connectors and each 84904/6/7L model with option 006 has two
female 2.92 mm connectors (compatible with SMA connectors). When
using 84904/6/7L series attenuators, be sure to order them with option
006 (SMA compatible) for wiring convenience.
The default ribbon cable for connecting attenuators to N2276B is 1.5 m
in length. The default ribbon cable for connecting switches to N2276B is
1.5 m in length. A 1.5m length ribbon cable for connecting microwave
switches to the switch connectors on the N2276B is available as Agilent
part number N2276-61003. This cable permits the microwave switches to
be placed in a convenient location.
7
224
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2280A Quadruple 1-to-2 Optical Switch Module
N2280A Quadruple 1-to-2 Optical Switch
Module
The Agilent N2280A Module contains four 1-to-2 optical switches. All
four optical switches are non-latching. For each switch, only one channel
can be closed at a time. Closing a channel will open the other channel in
the same switch. After power on or a reset, the common channel of each
4
1-to-2 optical switch is connected to the second channel by default.
Specifications for the N2280A are given on page 326.
N2280A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic is shown below. The N2280A consists of four
independent 1-to-2 optical switches. Each optical switch has one COMx
and two branch channels named Chx0 and Chx1.
Ch10
Ch00
COM1
COM0
COM2
Ch01Normally c losed
Ch11Normally closed
Ch20
Ch30
COM3
Ch21Normally c losed
Ch31Normally closed
N2280A Wiring Information
Use SC/APC connectors to connect external optical signals to the
N2280A module. The rear panel of the N2280A is shown below.
7
225
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2281A Dual 1-to-4 Optical Switch Module
N2281A Dual 1-to-4 Optical Switch Module
The Agilent N2281A Module consists of two 1-to-4 optical switches. The
two optical switches are non-latching. For each switch, only one channel
can be closed at a time. Closing one channel will open the other channel
in the same switch. After power on or a reset, the common channel of
each 1-to-4 optical switch is connected to the third channel by default.
Specifications for the N2281A are given on page 327.
N2281A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic is shown below. The Agilent N2281A consists of
two independent 1-to-4 optical switches. Channels are numbered as 00,
01, 02, 03 for COM0 and 10, 11, 12, 13 for COM1. The third channel of
each 1-to-4 optical switch is connected to the common channel by default.
7
COM0
Ch00
Ch01
Ch02 Normally closed
Ch03
COM1
Ch10
Ch11
Ch12 Normally closed
Ch13
226
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2281A Dual 1-to-4 Optical Switch Module
N2281A Wiring Information
Use SC/APC connectors to connect external optical signals to the
N2281A module. The rear panel is shown below.
4
7
227
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2282A 1-to-8 Optical Switch Module
N2282A 1-to-8 Optical Switch Module
The Agilent N2282A Optical Switch contains a latching 1-to-8 optical
switch. Only one channel at a time may be closed. The N2282A does not
support the OPEN command. Closing a channel will open any previously
closed channels. A special, virtual channel is included that allows all
channels in the switch to be opened.
Channels are numbered as CH00 through CH08. CH00 through CH07
are standard channels. CH08 is a special channel used when
programming to open all other channels (CH00 through CH07). The
latching characteristic of the optical switch makes it hold its most
recently state after powered off.
Specifications for the N2282A are given on page 328.
Note
The Agilent N2282A can only be used with the SCPI Mode of 3499
Firmware Revision 3.0 or later. See page 59 for details about the
firmware revisions.
N2282A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic is shown on the next page. The N2282A consists
of one 1-to-8 optical switch whose channels are numbered as CH00
through CH07 and a special channel, CH08, with no external connection.
7
228
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
N2282A 1-to-8 Optical Switch Module
CH00 through CH07 are opened when a ROUTe:CLOSe (@x08)
command is sent (where x is the slot number containing the N2282A).
COM
Ch00
Ch01
Ch02
Ch03
4
Ch04
Ch05
Ch06
Ch07
N2282A Wiring Information
Use SC/APC connectors for wiring external optical signals to the N2282A
module. The rear panel is shown below.
7
Note
The Agilent N2282A module extends an additional 8.5 cm beyond the
rear panel of the 3499A/B/C mainframe.
229
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44470A 10-Channel MUX Module
44470A 10-Channel MUX Module
The Agilent 44470A Relay Multiplexer (MUX) provides 10 2-wire
channels (latching relays) to switch both Hi (H) and Lo (L) input signal
lines to a common bus. Relays on this module are rated at a maximum
voltage of 250 volts with a maximum current of 2 amps dc or ac rms.
The module exhibits low thermal offset characteristics, making it ideal
for precision low-level measurements. However, since no thermocouple
compensation is included, temperature measurement errors may occur if
you use this module to switch thermocouples.
The 44470A can be operated in either of two modes, single channel
break-before-make (BBM), or multiple channels closed at the same time.
Specifications for the 44470A are given on page 329.
44470A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic of the 44470A is shown below. The 44470A
consists of 10 2-wire relay channels that may be connected to a common
bus. Channels on the 44470A are numbered as 00 through 09 (CH00
through CH09).
7
230
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44470A 10-Channel MUX Module
44470A Relay MUX
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
CH09
CH08
CH07
CH06
CH05
Common Bus
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
CH04
CH03
CH02
CH01
CH00
Terminal Block
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
CH09
CH08
CH07
4
CH06
CH05
Common Bus
CH04
CH03
CH02
CH01
CH00
Custom Signal Conditioning
The 44470A circuit board has provision that allow you to install simple
attenuators or filter networks. Three circuit pads in each relay path are
provided that allow you to install components in the signal Hi path, Lo
path, or as a shunt from Hi to Lo. The figure below shows the 44470A
circuit board locations where components can be installed.
LOW SERIES
HIGH SERIES
SHUNT
231
7
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44470A 10-Channel MUX Module
Creating attenuators An attenuator is composed of two resistors that act
as a voltage divider. A typical attenuator circuit is also shown below.
(series element)
SIGNAL
INPUT
Vin
R1
R2
(shunt element)
SIGNAL
OUTPUT
Vout
Vout = Vin * (R2/(R1 + R2))
To select the attenuator components, use the following equation:
Vo = Vi  R2   R1 + R2 
One typical use for the shunt component is to convert the output of 4 to
20 mA transducers to a voltage that can be measured using a DMM. 
A 50 , ±1%, 0.5 watt resistor can be installed in the R2 (shunt) location
and the resultant voltage drop (transducer current through the resistor)
measured. The 50  resistor converts the 4 - 20 mA current to an 0.2 - 1
volt signal. No series element (R1) is needed.
44470A Wiring Information
Use the Agilent 44480A Terminal Block to make connections to the
44470A. One 44480A is supplied with the module.
The terminal block includes a screw terminal that connects external
wiring to the 44470A. The screw terminal is shown below. Additional
information about the terminal block is given on page 285.
7
232
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44470D 20-Channel MUX Module
44470D 20-Channel MUX Module
The Agilent 44470D Relay MUX Module provides 20 2-wire channels
(latching relays) to switch both High (H) and Low (L) input signals to a
common bus. The individual relays on this module are rated at a
maximum voltage of 250 volts with a maximum current of 2 amps dc or
ac rms.
4
The module exhibits low thermal offset characteristics, making it ideal
for precision low-level measurements. However, since no thermocouple
compensation is included, temperature measurement errors may occur if
you use this module to switch thermocouples.
The 44470D can be operated in one of two modes: single channel breakbefore-make (BBM) or multiple channels closed at the same time.
Specifications for the 44470D are given on page 331.
44470D Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic is shown below. The 44470D consists of 20 2-wire
relays connected to a common bus. Channels on the 44470D are
numbered as 00 through 19 (CH00 through CH19).
44470D Relay MUX
L
H CH19
L
H CH18
L
H CH11
L
H CH10
Common Bus
L
H CH09
L
H CH08
L
H CH01
L
H CH00
Terminal Block
L
CH19
H
L
CH18
H
L
CH11
H
L
CH10
H
L
Common Bus
H
7
L
CH09
H
L
CH08
H
L
CH01
H
L
CH00
H
233
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44470D 20-Channel MUX Module
44470D Wiring Information
Use the Agilent 44480B Terminal Block to make connections to the
44470D. One 44480B is supplied with the module. The terminal block
connectors are shown below. Additional information about the terminal
block is given on page 287.
J101 (Connect to J901)
7
234
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44470D 20-Channel MUX Module
44470D J901 Pinout
J901 is a 3-row, 48-pin male connector mounted on the 44470D. The pin
assignments in this connector are shown below.
E32
E4
E30
E2
C32
4
C2
A32
J901 A2
C2
E2
E4
A4
C4
A6
C6
E6
E8
E14
C16
CH00 L
CH00 H
CH01 L
CH01 H
CH02 L
CH02 H
CH03 L
CH03 H
CH04 L
CH04 H
NC
NC
J901 (on 44470D)
A30
A8
C8
A10
C10
E10
E12
A12
C12
A14
C14
E30
A32
CH05 L
CH05 H
CH06 L
CH06 H
CH07 L
CH07 H
CH08 L
CH08 H
CH09 L
CH09 H
NC
NC
A18
C18
E18
E20
A20
C20
A22
C22
E22
E24
A16
E16
A4
CH10 L
CH10 H
CH11 L
CH11 H
CH12 L
CH12 H
CH13 L
CH13 H
CH14 L
CH14 H
L COM
H COM
A2
A24
C24
A26
C26
E26
E28
A28
C28
A30
C30
C32
E32
CH15 L
CH15 H
CH16 L
CH16 H
CH17 L
CH17 H
CH18 L
CH18 H
CH19 L
CH19 H
NC
7
NC
A32, C16, C32, E14, E30, E32 NOTCONNECTED (NC)
235
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44471A 10-Channel GP Relay Module
44471A 10-Channel GP Relay Module
The Agilent 44471A GP Relay Module provides 10 independent Single
Pole - Single Throw (SPST, Form A) latching relays. The individual
relays on this module are rated for a maximum open circuit voltage of
250 volts dc or ac rms. Maximum current per relay is 2 amps dc or ac
rms, and maximum power per relay is 60 watts dc or 125 VA ac.
Maximum closed channel resistance is less than 2 .
The 44471A exhibits low thermal characteristics, which make it ideal for
independent (non-multiplexed) signal switching. It can be operated in
either single channel break-before-make (BBM), or multiple channels
closed at the same time.
Specifications for the 44471A are given on page 333.
44471A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic is shown below. The 44471A consists of 10
independent Single Pole-Single Throw (SPST, Form A) relays. Channels
on the 44471A are numbered as 00 through 09 (CH00 through CH09).
44471A GP Relays
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
7
CH09
CH08
CH07
CH06
CH05
CH04
CH03
CH02
L
H CH01
L
H CH00
236
Terminal Block
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
CH09
CH08
CH07
CH06
CH05
CH04
CH03
CH02
CH01
CH00
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44471A 10-Channel GP Relay Module
Custom Signal Conditioning
The 44471A circuit board has a provision to allow you to install simple
attenuators or filters in the relay paths. There is also a place to install
relay contact protection networks. The figure below shows the locations
on the main circuit board.
LOW SERIES
4
PROTECTION
NETWORK
HIGH SERIES
SHUNT
Protection Networks An RC protection network and a varistor can be
installed in each relay path. More detailed information about protection
circuits is given on page 272.
VARISTOR
RELAY
CONTACT
7
TERMINAL
BLOCK
RC
NETWORK
237
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44471A 10-Channel GP Relay Module
44471A Wiring Information
Use the Agilent 44481A Terminal Block to make connections to the
44471A. One 44481A is supplied with the module.
The terminal block includes a screw terminal that connects external
wiring to the 44471A. The screw terminal is shown below. Additional
information about the terminal block is given on page 285.
7
238
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44471D 20-Channel GP Relay Module
44471D 20-Channel GP Relay Module
The Agilent 44471D GP Relay module provides 20 independent Single
Pole - Single Throw (SPST, Form A) latching relays. Typically used as an
actuator assembly, its low thermal characteristics make it ideal for
independent (non-multiplexed) signal switching.
The individual relays on this module are rated for a maximum open 4
circuit voltage of 250 volts dc or ac rms. Maximum current per relay is 1
amp dc or ac rms, and maximum power per relay is 60 watts dc or 125
VA ac. Maximum closed channel resistance is less than 2 .
Specifications for the 44471D are given on page 335.
44471D Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic is shown below. The 44471D GP Relay Module
consists of 20 independent SPST (Single Pole - Single Through) relays.
Channels are numbered as 00 through 19 (CH00 through CH19).
7
239
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44471D 20-Channel GP Relay Module
44471D Wiring Information
Use the Agilent 44481B Terminal Block to make connections to the
44471D. One 44481B is supplied with the module. The terminal block
connectors are shown below. Additional information about the terminal
block is given on page 287.
J101 (Connect to J901)
7
240
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44471D 20-Channel GP Relay Module
44471D J901 Pinout
J901 is a 3-row, 48-pin male DIN connector mounted on the 44471D. The
pin assignments are shown in the figure below
.
E32
E4
E30
E2
4
C32
C2
A32
J901 A2
C2
E2
E4
A4
C4
A6
C6
E6
E8
E14
A16
CH00 L
CH00 H
CH01 L
CH01 H
CH02 L
CH02 H
CH03 L
CH03 H
CH04 L
CH04 H
NC
NC
J901 (on 44471D)
A30
A8
C8
A10
C10
E10
E12
A12
C12
A14
C14
C16
E16
CH05 L
CH05 H
A18
C18
CH06 L
E18
CH06 H
CH07 L
CH07 H
E20
A20
C20
CH08 L
CH08 H
A22
C22
CH09 L
E22
CH09 H
NC
E24
A4
CH10 L
CH10 H
CH11 L
CH11 H
CH12 L
CH12 H
CH13 L
CH13 H
CH14 L
CH14 H
E30
NC
A32
NC
NC
A2
A24
C24
A26
C26
E26
E28
A28
C28
A30
C30
C32
E32
CH15 L
CH15 H
CH16 L
CH16 H
CH17 L
CH17 H
CH18 L
CH18 H
CH19 L
CH19 H
7
NC
NC
E14, A16, C16, E16, E30, A32, C32, E32 NOTCONNECTED (NC)
241
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44472A Dual 4-Channel VHF Switch Module
44472A Dual 4-Channel VHF Switch Module
The Agilent 44472A VHF Switch Module provides two independent 
4-to-1 coaxial multiplexers. These multiplexers are specifically designed
for broadband signal switching up to 300 MHz. This module is the ideal
choice for wide dynamic range measurements with spectrum and
distortion analyzers.
Connections to the module are made through 10 BNC (coaxial)
connectors mounted directly on the 44472A. Characteristic impedance 
is 50 .
Note
The 44472A is not recommended for use with instruments that require
high DC isolation from earth ground (such as a DMM).
Specifications for the 44472A are given on page 337.
7
242
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44472A Dual 4-Channel VHF Switch Module
44472A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic is shown below. The 44472A VHF Switch module
contains of two groups (GROUP 0 & GROUP 1) of 4-to-1 coaxial MUXs.
The two groups are isolated from each other and also from the
mainframe chassis ground to eliminate ground loops. Furthermore, the
shield (or low) of each channel is NOT switched; the shields of the four
channels in each group are in common. A tree relay scheme is used to
provide higher isolation between channels and from open channels to 4
common. Channels are numbered as 00 through 03 for group 0, and 10
through 13 for group 1.
CHANNEL 3
COMMON 0
CHANNEL 2
GROUP 0
CHANNEL 1
CHANNEL 0
NOTE: GROUNDS ARE NOT COMMO
BETWEEN GROUP 0 AND GROUP 1.
CHANNEL 13
7
COMMON 1
CHANNEL 12
GROUP 1
CHANNEL 11
CHANNEL 10
243
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44472A Dual 4-Channel VHF Switch Module
44472A Wiring Information
Regardless of the topology (configuration) you are using, always use 50 
shielded coaxial cables to maintain both characteristic impedance and
isolation. Keep cables as short as possible, especially in high frequency
circuits or pulse circuits where a rise/fall time of less than 50 nsec is
critical. Long cables can add considerable delay time which may cause
timing problems. All test equipment (counters, spectrum analyzers,
oscilloscopes, etc.) must be terminated with a 50 impedance to
minimize reflection loss. The rear panel is shown below.
Switch Group 0
7
244
Switch Group 1
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44473A 4 x 4 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module
44473A 4 x 4 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module
The Agilent 44473A Matrix Switch provides a 4 x 4 matrix of 2-wire
switches. Each node (crosspoint) in the matrix contains a latching relay
that connects a row to a column. Both Hi (H) and Lo (L) lines are
switched. More than one switch can be closed at a time, allowing any
combination of rows and columns to be connected.
Matrix switching provides a convenient way to connect a group of test
instruments to multiple test points on a device or to multiple devices.
This matrix switch offers highly flexible switching for testing devices
over a frequency range of dc to 100 kHz.
4
Multiple 44473A modules may be connected together to form a larger
matrices. The 44473A can also be used in conjunction with other modules
(such as the 44470A 10-Channel MUX) to provide a wide variety of
switching combinations. When wiring between multiple modules, keep
wire length as short as possible to minimize noise and signal
degradation.
Specifications for the 44473A are given on page 339.
7
245
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44473A 4 x 4 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module
44473A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic is shown below. The 44473A consists of 16 2-wire
relays (nodes/crosspoints) organized in a 4-row by 4-column matrix.
Channels in this matrix module are numbered in the Row-Column
format. For example, channel 32 represents the crosspoint connection
between row 3 and column 2; while the channel 23 represents the
crosspoint connection between row 2 and column 3, and so on.
COL0
HL
00
10
20
30
COL1
COL2
COL3
HL
HL
HL
01
11
21
31
02
12
22
H
L
ROW0
H
L
ROW1
H
L
ROW2
H
L
ROW3
03
13
23
33
CHANNEL 32
(ROW 3, COLUMN 2)
7
246
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44473A 4 x 4 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module
44473A Wiring Information
Use the Agilent 44483A Terminal Block to make connections to the
44473A. One 44483A is supplied with the module.
The terminal block includes a screw terminal that connects external
wiring to the 44473A. The screw terminal is shown below. Additional
information about the terminal block is given on page 285.
4
7
247
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44474A 16-Bit Digital I/O Module
44474A 16-Bit Digital I/O Module
The Agilent 44474A Digital I/O module provides 16 bidirectional data
lines (bits) plus 4 lines used for control and handshaking. All lines are
TTL compatible. The 16 I/O lines or bits can be addressed individually
(bit-by-bit), as two independent 8-bit ports, or as one 16-bit word.
The two 8-bit ports are completely independent of each other and may be
used separately. For instance, one port can be used for output operations,
while the other for input. However, all 8 bits in a given port must be
either input or output bits (not a combination of input and output).
Five handshaking modes are available for this module. The handshaking
modes are described beginning on page 98. Handshaking uses up to
three control lines:
•
Peripheral Control (PCTL)
•
I/O direction (I/O)
•
Peripheral Flag (PFLG or EI)
Additionally, the 44474A provides an additional Channel Closed (CC)
line that changes state to indicate a channel has been closed. The
External Increment (EI) and Channel Closed (CC) lines can be used to
control an external instrument such as a DMM. For example, Agilent
DMMs have a Voltmeter Complete line that indicates when a
measurement has completed. This line is connected to the 44474A EI
input and the Channel Closed output is connected to the DMM External
Trigger. When properly configured, a scan list can then be executed and
measured without external computer control.
7
Port and bit numbering is show in the table below. Note that the ports
are numbered differently if you are using the 3488 System mode.
System Mode
16-Bit Port #
SCPI mode
PORT 00
3488A Mode
PORT 02
8-Bit Port #
Bit #
PORT 00
Bits 0-7 (LO BYTE)
PORT 01
Bits 0-7 (HI BYTE)
PORT 00
Bits 0-7 (LO BYTE)
PORT 01
Bits 0-7 (HI BYTE)
Specifications for the 44474A are given on page 341.
248
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44474A 16-Bit Digital I/O Module
44474A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic is shown below. Note that all 16 I/O lines and 4
control lines share a common Lo connection. The 16 bits (I/O lines) are
numbered as bits 0 through 15 when the module is addressed
individually. The bits 0-7 refer to the bits 0-7 of the LO BYTE, and the
bits 8-15 refer to the bits 0-7 of the HI BYTE.
OPEN COLLECTOR/
CURRENT SINK
(VMOS FET)
ONE I/O LINE
4
+5V
10K
0.25A
DRIVER OUTPUT
TERMINAL
CONNECTION
BLOCK
47V
INPUT SENSE
REFERENCE
VOLTAGE
+5V
CHAN CLOSED
PCTL/RD
IO/WR
47
+5V
TERMINAL
CONNECTION
BLOCK
+5V
7
10K
47
PFLG/EXT. INC
TERMINAL
CONNECTION
BLOCK
249
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44474A 16-Bit Digital I/O Module
44474A Wiring Information
Use the Agilent 44484A Terminal Block to make connections to the
44474A. One 44484A is supplied with the module.
The terminal block includes a screw terminal that connects external
wiring to the 44474A. The screw terminal is shown below. Additional
information about the terminal block is given on page 285.
7
250
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44475A Breadboard Module
44475A Breadboard Module
The Agilent 44475A Breadboard module provides a means to mount
custom designed circuits for use in the mainframe. If a desired function
is not be available on a standard plug-in module, the 44475A provides
the ideal solution.
Components are specified (but not supplied with the Breadboard module)
4
for interfacing the Breadboard to the 3499A/B/C backplane. When these
components are used, the Breadboard then provides 8 static input and 8
static output lines.
Two commands are used to control the Breadboard; DIAG:SPEEK? reads
data from the input port and DIAG:SPOKE writes data to the output
port. These commands are described on page 131.
Specifications for the 44475A are given on page 342.
7
251
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44475A Breadboard Module
The 44475A circuit board is shown below.
Connection to backplane (connector supplied)
Backplane interface circuitry
(user supplied)
Component mounting area
7
Connection to screw terminal block (connector supplied)
252
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44475A Breadboard Module
44475A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic of the breadboard interface is shown below. The
44475A is divided into two areas. They are:
1. Breadboarding Grid consisting of holes on 0.10 inch centers. There is
0.030 inch spacing between foil pads. Bus traces for power supply and
ground, and provisions for the screw terminal block edge connector
are provided.
4
2. Built-in design for providing an 8-bit digital input port and an 8-bit
digital output port.
LS374
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
18
17
14
13
8
7
4
3
1
DO7
DO6
DO5
DO4
DO3
DO2
DO1
DO0
19
16
15
12
9
6
5
2
11
3-STATE
LS244
LS138
+5
6
R/W
1
CS
2
3
4
5
8
3
5
7
9
12
14
16
18
1
15
14
A1
+5
B-GND
17
15
13
11
8
6
4
2
19
LS157
12
9
7
4
1
0.01
DI7
DI6
DI5
DI4
DI3
DI2
DI1
DI0
14
11
5
2
15
13
3
6
10
7
1.0
+5
253
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44475A Breadboard Module
44475A Wiring Information
Use the Agilent 44485A Terminal Block to make connections to the
44475A. One 44485A is supplied with the module. Included with the
terminal block is a numbered label you can apply for slot identification.
The terminal block includes a screw terminal that connects external
wiring to the 44475A. The screw terminal is shown below. Additional
information about the terminal block is given on page 285.
Assembling the Breadboard
Assemble the 44475A Breadboard using the following steps:
1 Load the components for the 8-bit Input and 8-bit Output ports.
Components were not supplied (but are listed in the table below). You
can obtain these components from any supplier. The figure on page 252
shows where these components are to be mounted on the Breadboard.
Quantity
Component
Description
1
SN 74LS138
3 to 8 line decoder
1
SN 74LS157
Quad 2 to 1 line data selector/multiplexer
(noninverted data outputs)
1
SN 74LS244
Octal Butters, line drivers, line receivers
(noninverted 3-state outputs)
1
SN 74LS374
Octal D-Type Flip-Flops (3-state outputs)
7
254
1
0.01 uF Capacitor, 10 volts
1
1 uF Capacitor, 10 volts
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44475A Breadboard Module
2 Install your custom circuitry.
Component height restrictions and how far the component leads extend
through the circuit board are limited by the top and bottom shields.
These shields provide RF shielding as well as structural strength and
must never be eliminated. 

The maximum component height allowed is 12.7 mm (0.50 in.). However,
if the height of any component exceeds 10 mm, the conductive surface of
4
the component must be insulated. On the circuit side of the Breadboard,
the lead lengths are limited to 3.2 mm (0.125 in.) from the circuit board.
3 Assemble the hardware.
The table below lists the hardware parts that are supplied with the
44475A. An assembly diagram is given on the next page.
Part Number
Description
44475-26501
Breadboard circuit board
03488-00602
Bottom shield
03488-00603
Top shield (component side)
1251-8645
2 rows x 15 pins right angle connector (small connector)
44475-62102
2 rows x 11 pins right angle connector (large connector)
44475-62101
Terminal Block, keyed for the breadboard connector
5040-5193
Connector Housing
0515-5194
Cable Clamp
0515-0063
Pan Head screw, 2.5 x 12 (metric)
0515-0843
Flat Head screw, 2.5 x 20 Lock (metric)
0515-0045
Pan Head screw, 3 x 18 Lock (metric)
0535-0004
Hex Nut, 3 x 0.5
0535-0008
Hex Nut, 2.5 x 0.45
2190-0583
Lock Washer
2190-0584
Lock Washer
7
255
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44475A Breadboard Module
7
256
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44476A Microwave Switch Module
44476A Microwave Switch Module
The 44476A contains three Microwave Switches. These switches have
the following features:
•
Broad bandwidth (dc to 18 GHz)
•
High isolation (> 90 dB to 18 GHz)
•
Excellent repeatability (typically 0.03 dB after 1,000,000 switchings)
•
Internal 50  terminations
4
The Agilent 8762B is a break-before-make switch controlled by a
latching solenoid. Once switched, coil voltage can be removed and the
switch remains in the switched position. Internal coil contacts open and
remove coil voltage after a switching operation to minimize the amount
of heat dissipated near the switch contacts. The Agilent 8762B uses SMA
connectors for ease in cable connections
The 3499A/B/C identifies this module as a 44471A on the front-panel
display. Changing the state of channels other than channels 00 through
02 does not generate an error, but has no effect.
Specifications for the 44476A are given on page 344.
7
257
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44476A Microwave Switch Module
44476A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic is given below. The 44476A contains three 8762B
Microwave Switches. Each microwave switch is referred to as a channel.
The channels on the 44476A are numbered as 00, 01, and 02.
MODULE *
PANEL
DESIGNATORS
DRIVE
JUMPERS
FORM C
DRIVE RELAYS
33311B
W1
ORG
2
NO
+5
2
YEL
C
3
ORG
1
ORG
2
COM
NC
50
2
T
PIVO
E
TUR
A
M
AR
1
RELAY
K901
1 = PORT 1
2 = PORT 2
NO = NORMALLY OPEN
NC = NORMALLY CLOSED
C = COMMON
C
50
1
50
2
1
NO
C
C
2
NC
1
NO
C
C
2
NC
1
NO
C
C
2
NC
CHANNEL 00
NO
RELAY
K902
+5
2
YEL
C
3
ORG
1
ORG
2
COM
NC
T
PIVO
URE
T
A
ARM
W2
C
50
1
50
2
T
PIVO
E
ATUR
ARM
33311B
1
C
CHANNEL 01
33311B
1
7
W3
NO
RELAY
K903
+5
2
YEL
C
3
ORG
1
COM
NC
50
+5V
L901
1
+5 TO DRIVE JUMPERS (YEL)
C906
* NOTE :
TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS INSIDE THE DASHED BOXES REFER TO THE
33311B ONLY. MODULE PANEL DESIGNATORS OUTSIDE THE DASHED
BOXES ARE THOSE SILKSCREENED ON THE 44476A PANEL. ANY
REFERENCE IN THIS MANUAL TO A PORT REFERS TO THE MODULE
PANEL DESIGNATORS.
258
CHANNEL 02
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44476A Microwave Switch Module
44476A Wiring Information
The 44476A provides nine 50  SMA connectors.
4
7
259
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44476B Microwave Switch Module
44476B Microwave Switch Module
The 44476B is not supplied with microwave switches. You must provide
your own microwave switches, mount them on the assembly, and connect
one of the module’s Form C relay drive circuits to each switch.
The 44476B panel has two 53.8 X 9.6 mm cutouts for a set of microwave
switches. The recommended Agilent microwave switches are listed
below.
Microwave Switch
Ports
Frequency
8762A
3
DC-4 GHz
8762B
3
DC-18 GHz
8762C
3
DC-26.5 GHz
8762Fa
3
DC-4 GHz
8763B
4
DC-18 GHz
8763C
4
DC-26.5 GHz
8764B
5
DC-18 GHz
8764C
5
DC-26.5 GHz
a. Except the 8762F Microwave Switch with 75 characteristic impedance, all
others are 50 
The 3499A/B/C identifies this module as a 44471A on the front-panel
display. Changing the state of channels other than channels 00 through
02 does not generate an error, but has no effect.
7
Specifications for the 44476B are dependent upon the switches used.
Refer to the switch data sheets for more information.
260
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44476B Microwave Switch Module
The 44476B is shown below.
4
7
261
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44476B Microwave Switch Module
44476B Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic of the 44476B is shown below. You must provide
your own microwave switches and mount them on the assembly. The
channel are numbered channels 00 and 01.
DRIVE
JUMPERS
FORM C
DRIVE RELAYS
W1
1
RELAY
K901
ORG
NO
+5
2
YEL
3
ORG
COM
NC
W1
1
RELAY
K902
USER
INSTALLED
MICROWAVE
SWITCH
CHANNEL 00
USER
INSTALLED
MICROWAVE
SWITCH
CHANNEL 01
ORG
NO
+5
2
YEL
3
ORG
COM
NC
1
7
RELAY
K903
NO
CHANNEL 02
AVAILABLE
BUT NOT
USED
2
+5
COM
NC
3
+5V
262
L901
+5 TO DRIVE JUMPERS (YEL)
C906
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44476B Microwave Switch Module
Configuration
Mount user-supplied microwave switches on the module after connecting
the channels 00 and 01 drive jumpers (W1 and W2). The figure below
shows the drive jumper orientation.
4
7
263
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44476B Microwave Switch Module
The figure below shows an Agilent 8764B 5-port switch mounted on the
44476B.
M2.5 X 18
Panhead Screws
Lay drive jumpers flat
against PC board
66 mm
Max Mounting
Area
(D=14.1 mm)
55.58 44.44 30.1
11.2
55.58 44.44 30.1
11.2
7.01
16.42
62 mm
All mounting holes
threaded for M2.5
screws
44476B Wiring Information
The user-provided switches use 50  SMA connectors (except the Agilent
8762F which uses 75  SMA connectors).
7
44476B
MICROWAVE SWITCH
CHANNEL
00
2
1
NO
264
3
C
4
NC
5
1
2
NO
3
C
4
NC
5
7VDC = MAX
1WCW / CHAN
CHANNEL
01
!
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44477A Form-C Relay Module
44477A Form-C Relay Module
The Agilent 44477A consists of seven independent, break-before-make,
SPDT Form-C latching relays (one contact normally open, one contact
normally closed).
The 44477A can be used for signal switching or power applications
(250V, 2A). Additionally, this module is ideally suited for driving remote
4
RF, coaxial, and microwave devices such as the Agilent 8761, 8762A/B/C, 
8763B/C, and 8764B/C switches or programmable step attenuators like
the 876xx series.
You can use the 3499A/B/C +5 V power supply available on the module or
provide an external supply to use as pull-ups on either the NO or NC
paths.
The 3499A/B/C identifies this module as a 44471A on the front-panel
display. Changing the state of channels other than channels 00 through
06 does not generate an error, but has no effect.
Specifications for the 44477A are given on page 345.
44477A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic is given on the next page. The 44477A consists of
seven independent Form-C relays (K901-K907) which are numbered as
channels 00 through 06. Closing a channel (relay) will connect the
normally open (NO) contact to the common port (C). After power-on or a
reset, the Form C relays on the 44477A have their normally open (NO)
contacts open and normally closed (NC) contacts closed.
Each relay circuit has mounting holes (JM901 - JM914) used to add a
pull-up resistor from the NO (normally open) and/or NC (normally
closed) contacts to the +5V power supply. Also, there are mounting holes
(JM921 and JM922) at the +5V supply for the addition of a protection
resistor or inductor if the internal supply is to be used. If the internal
supply is not used, an external power supply can be applied through the
screw terminal block via the “H” terminal. The addition of pull-up
resistors can be useful when driving logic circuits where the common (C)
terminal is connected to ground and used to pull either the NO or the NC
line low.
265
7
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44477A Form-C Relay Module
44477A FORM-C RELAYS
JM901
NO
K901
JM902
C
CH00
NC
JM903
NO
K902
JM904
C
CH01
NC
JM905
NO
K903
JM906
C
CH02
NC
JM907
NO
K904
JM908
C
CH03
NC
JM909
NO
K905
JM910
C
CH04
NC
JM911
NO
K906
JM912
C
CH05
NC
JM913
NO
K907
JM914
JM922
TERMINAL BLOCK
C
CH06
NC
JM921
+5V
H
44477A Wiring Information
7
Use the Agilent 44487A Terminal Block to make connections to the
44477A. One 44487A is supplied with the module. Included with the
terminal block is a numbered label you can apply for slot identification.
The terminal block includes a screw terminal that connects external
wiring to the 44477A. The screw terminal is shown below. Additional
information about the terminal block is given on page 285.
266
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44478A/B 1.3 GHz Dual 4-to-1 MUX Modules
44478A/B 1.3 GHz Dual 4-to-1 MUX Modules
The Agilent 44478A and 44478B consist of two independent 4-to-1
multiplexers (group 00 and group 01) that provide bidirectional
switching. The module’s latching relays are configured in a “tree”
structure, to provide high isolation and low VSWR (voltage standing
wave ratio). Each channel can switch up to 42V dc + ac peak at
frequencies up to 1.3 GHz.
4
The 44478A is intended for 50  impedance applications. 
The 44478B is intended for 75  impedance applications.
User connections for the channels are through BNC connectors on the
rear panel. Each channel has an SMB connector on the main PC board
used to connect resistive terminations and terminate unused channels.
The 3499A/B/C identifies this module as a 44472A on the front-panel
display. Changing the state of channels other than channels 00 through
03 or 10 through 13 does not generate an error, but has no effect.
Specifications for the 44478A/B are given on page 347.
7
267
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44478A/B 1.3 GHz Dual 4-to-1 MUX Modules
The 44478A/B is shown below.
7
268
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44478A/B 1.3 GHz Dual 4-to-1 MUX Modules
44478A Simplified Schematic
A simplified schematic is shown below. The two groups of 4-to-1 MUXs
are specified as GROUP 00 and GROUP 10. They are isolated from each
other. Closing a channel closes a particular set of relays to connect the
common BNC to one of the four BNC inputs. Channels within each group
are break-before-make and are numbered as 00 through 03 for GROUP
00 and 10 through 13 for GROUP 10.
4
J101
3
CH00
CH01
J102
3
COM00
GROUP 00
J104
3
CH02
CH03
BNC CONNECTOR
J105
3
3
J106
SMB CONNECTOR
4
CH10
CH11
J107
4
COM10
GROUP 10
J109
4
7
CH12
CH13
J110
4
TYPICAL CHANNEL RESISTIVE TERMINATIONS
FOR 44478A, R=50OR 75)
FOR 44478B, R=75
ChXX
269
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44478A/B 1.3 GHz Dual 4-to-1 MUX Modules
44478A Wiring Information
External Wiring The figure below shows the module’s female BNC
connectors and the channel group numbers. The BNC connectors accept
user-supplied male BNC connectors.
CHANNEL 01
CHANNEL 02
CHANNEL 03
CHANNEL 10
CHANNEL 11
CHANNEL 12
CHANNEL 13
COMMON 10
Group 10
CHANNEL 00
COMMON 00
Group 00
00
01 COM00 02
03
10
11 COM10 12
13
44478 MULTIPLEXER
Terminations The figure on page 268 shows the SMB connectors on the
main PC Board. The SMB connectors allow you to connect SMB resistive
terminations to any unused channels. SMB resistive terminations are
available from Agilent using the following part number:
Note
•
34585A (set of four 50  terminations for the 44478A)
•
34586A (set of four 75  terminations for the 44478B)
To maintain proper operation, unused channels should be terminated by
plugging a 50  or 75  SMB type resistive termination (50  for 44478A
and 75  for 44478B) onto the male SMB connector provided for each
channel.
7
270
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
44478A/B 1.3 GHz Dual 4-to-1 MUX Modules
Cabling Considerations
RG-223/U cable is recommended. Ready-made cables (BNCs on both
ends) are available from Agilent using the following part numbers:
•
8120-1838: 30 cm (12 in.), 50 coaxial
•
8120-1839: 61 cm (24 in.), 50 coaxial
•
8120-1840: 122 cm (48 in.), 50 coaxial
•
5062-6452: 30 cm (12 in.), 75 coaxial
4
Always use shielded coaxial cables with the characteristic impedance of
the module used (50 or). Keep cables as short as possible,
especially in high frequency circuits or pulse circuits where a rise/fall
time of < 50 nS is critical. Long cables can add considerable delay time
which can cause timing problems. All test equipment such as counters,
spectrum analyzers, oscilloscopes, etc., must be terminated in the
characteristic impedance to minimize reflection loss.
7
271
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
Protection Networks
Protection Networks
This information applies specifically to the N2267A (page 206) and
44471A (page 236) multiplexer modules. These multiplexers have
provisions built in to allow you to add custom protection networks. This
information is general and may be used to help you design other relay
protection circuits.
Protection networks are especially needed if the loads being switched are
inductive loads such as incandescent lamps or electric motors. The
resistance of these loads is very low when the power is first applied (for
example, the transient inrush current when switching on a lamp could
be 15 times the steady-state value). When switching off inductive loads,
the counter EMF of the coil can generate high voltage across the relay
contacts, and may damage the contacts.
Current limitation circuitry should be used to prevent relay contacts
from being damaged. Space to mount a protection network is designed on
the PC board to avoid this damage. Either an RC network or a varistor
can effectively absorb the high voltage surge. The specifications of
protection components are determined by the loads that are connected to
the multiplexer. A typical protection circuit for relay contacts is
illustrated below.
RELAY
CONTACT
7
VARISTOR
RC
NETWORK
272
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
Protection Networks
In designing RC protection networks, the protection resistor, Rp, is
selected as a compromise between two values. The minimum value of Rp
is determined by the maximum acceptable relay contact current (Io). The
maximum allowable relay current (Io) is 2 amps ac rms or 2 amps dc.
Thus, the minimum value for Rp is V/Io, where V is the peak value of the
supply voltage.
Rp = V/Io = V/2
Equation 1
The maximum value for Rp is usually made equal to the load resistance,
4
RI. Therefore, the limits on Rp can be stated as:
V/Io < Rp < RI
Equation 2
Note, the actual value of Io in a circuit is determined by the equation:
Io = V/RI
Equation 3
Where V is the peak value of the source voltage and RI is the resistance
of the load. Equations 1 & 2 use Io as the maximum allowable relay
current to determine the minimum value of Rp. The value for Io
calculated in Equation 3 will be used to determine the value of the
protection capacitor, Cp.
In determine the value of the protection network capacitor Cp, there are
several things that need to be considered. First, the total circuit
capacitance (C) must be such that the peak voltage across the open relay
contacts does not exceed 353 volts peak (250 V rms = 353 Vp). The
equation for determining the minimum allowable circuit capacitance is:
C  (Io/353)2L
Equation 4
where L = the inductance of the load and Io is the value calculated in
Equation 3.
In reality, the total circuit capacitance (C) is made up of the wiring
capacitance plus the value of the protection network capacitor Cp.
Therefore, the minimum value for Cp should be the value obtained for
the total circuit capacitance, C, from Equation 4. Indeed, the actual
value used for Cp should be substantially greater than the value
calculated for C.
273
7
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
Protection Networks
For example, we will determine the typical values for an RC protection
network where the load is a small ac motor running on the 120 V ac line
(170 V peak). This motor draws a maximum of 2 amps.
Using Equation 1 we can find the minimum value for Rp:
Rp = V/Io = 170/2 = 85 
The maximum value for Rp would be equal to the load resistance or 
400 . Therefore, any resistor (preferably at least 1 watt) between 85
and 400  will suffice.
To keep the peak contact voltage below 353V peak, use equation 3 to
determine Io:
Io = V/R1 = 170/400 = 0.425 A
Now use equation 4 to determine C:
C  (Io/353)2L = (0.425/353)2(0.1) = 0.144 F
Since Rp can vary between 85  and 400 , an appropriate protection
network to be connected to this circuit is Rp = 220  and Cp = 0.15 F.
Using Varistors
Just as contact protection circuits are important to suppress noise while
relay contacts are opening and closing, transient protection should be
provided while the relays are open. This is the purpose of the varistor.
When selecting a varistor, make certain that it has a voltage rating
sufficient for your application. A typical 250 VAC varistor can be
purchased with the Agilent part number 0873-0227.
7
274
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
Terminals and Connections Information
Terminals and Connections Information
This section contains details about each of the terminals and connections
available for the plug-in modules. Some modules have more than one
available terminal. The table below shows the terminals available for
each plug-in module. The general wiring information about each
terminal is on the listed page number. Additionally, for some terminals,
4
you will need to consult the specific plug-in module for connector pin-out
diagrams and assignments.
Plug-in
Module
Available Terminal(s)
Page
N2260A
N2290A
N2296A
N2297A
N2299A
Screw Terminal Block
Direct wiring (insulation displacement) connector
DIN96 to twin D50 Cable
DIN96 to quad D25 cable
277
278
279
281
N2261A
N2291A
N2296A
N2297A
N2299A
Screw Terminal Block
Direct wiring (insulation displacement) connector
DIN96 to twin D50 Cable
DIN96 to quad D25 cable
277
278
279
281
N2262A
N2292A
N2296A
N2298A
Screw Terminal Block
Direct wiring (insulation displacement) connector
DIN96 to D25 Cable
277
278
280
N2263A
N2293A
N2296A
N2297A
N2299A
Screw Terminal Block
Direct wiring (insulation displacement) connector
DIN96 to twin D50 Cable
DIN96 to quad D25 cable
277
278
279
281
N2264A
N2294A
N2296A
N2297A
N2299A
Screw Terminal Block
Direct wiring (insulation displacement) connector
DIN96 to twin D50 Cable
DIN96 to quad D25 cable
277
278
279
281
N2265A
N2295A
N2296A
N2297A
N2299A
Screw Terminal Block
Direct wiring (insulation displacement) connector
DIN96 to twin D50 Cable
DIN96 to quad D25 cable
277
278
279
281
7
275
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
Terminals and Connections Information
Plug-in
Module
7
Available Terminal(s)
Page
N2266A
N2290A
N2296A
N2297A
N2299A
Screw Terminal Block
Direct wiring (insulation displacement) connector
DIN96 to twin D50 Cable
DIN96 to quad D25 cable
277
278
279
281
N2267A
N2327A
Crimp and Insert Kit
282
N2268A
Rear Panel
SMA Connectors
211
N2270A
N2320A
Crimp and Insert Kit
283
N2272A
Rear Panel
BNC Connectors
215
N2276A/B
Rear Panel
SMA Connectors (on switches or attenuators)
220
N2280A
Rear Panel
SC/APC Connectors
225
N2281A
Rear Panel
SC/APC Connectors
227
N2282A
Rear Panel
SC/APC Connectors
229
44470A
44480A
Screw Terminal Connector Block
285
44470D
44480B
Screw Terminal Block
287
44471A
44481A
Screw Terminal Connector Block
285
44471D
44481D
Screw Terminal Block
287
44472A
Rear Panel
BNC Connectors
244
44473A
44483A
Screw Terminal Connector Block
285
44474A
44484A
Screw Terminal Connector Block
285
44475A
44485A
Screw Terminal Connector Block
285
44476A/B
Rear Panel
SMA Connectors
259
44477A
44477A
Screw Terminal Connector Block
285
44478A/B
Rear Panel
BNC Connectors
270
276
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
Terminals and Connections Information
N229X Screw Terminal Blocks
This terminal block is compatible with the N2290A, N2291A, N2292A,
N2293A, and N2295A plug-in modules. Refer to each plug-in module
section for detailed wiring information. The figure below shows the basic
steps to wire and assemble this terminal block.
STEP 1. Remove cover
A. Release screws on top of the cover;
B. Press tab forward and release.
STEP 3. Tighten the wires
A. Insert the wires into the nearest cable
boot, move the cable boot to the
Cable slot;
B. Tighten the cable boot.
STEP 2. Attach wires
4
A. The wire gauge: 18-26 AWG;
B. Insert wire into terminal connectors;
C. Tighten screws on the connectors.
STEP 4. Replace cover
A. Hook the top cover tabs onto the fixture;
B. Press down and tighten screws.
7
Cable Boot
277
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
Terminals and Connections Information
N2296A Insulation Displacement Connector
The N2296A is an insulation displacement connector you can use with
the N2260A, N2261A, N2262A, N2263A, N2264A, and N2265A modules.
The figure below shows the basic steps to wire and assemble this
terminal. Refer to the specific plug-in module wiring information for
details about the connector and pin-out assignments.
STEP 1. Remove cover
A. Release screws on top of the cover;
B. Press tab forward and release.
STEP 2. Attach wires
A. The wire gauge: 18-26 AWG;
B. Insert wire into a contact on the 96-pin DIN
connector and tighten it.
Note: The cover with two screws on
both sides is the bottom cover,
the other is the top cover.
STEP 3. Tighten the wires
A. Insert the wires into the nearest cable boot,
move the cable boot to the cable slot;
B. Tighten the cable boot.
Note: The label on the 96-pin DIN connector
must be toward you.
7
Cable Boot
278
STEP 4. Replace cover
A. Hook the top cover tabs onto the
Bottom cover;
B. Press down and tighten screws.
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
Terminals and Connections Information
N2297A DIN96 to twin D50 Cable
The N2297A is a female DIN96 to twin male D50 Cable. The cable uses
26 AWG wire (which meets UL AWM: 2464) with overall foil shield. The
maximum voltage is 200 volts per wire. The figure below shows the
connections between the D96 and the two D50s. Refer to the specific
plug-in module wiring information for details about the connector and
pin-out assignments.
4
17
33
50
CONNECTION
CONNECTOR 1 vs. 96-PIN DIN
PIN
1-16
17
18-33
34
35-50
A1-A16
-B1-B16
-C1-C16
34
1
18
33
17
50
CONNECTION
CONNECTOR 2 vs. 96-PIN DIN
PIN
34
1
1-16
17
18-33
34
35-50
A17-A32
-B17-B32
-C17-C32
Note: A “--” indicates that the pin is not used.
7
18
279
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
Terminals and Connections Information
N2298A DIN96 to D25 Cable
The N2298A is a female DIN96 to a male Sub-D25 Cable. The cable uses
26 AWG wire (which meets UL AWM: 2464) with overall foil shield. The
maximum voltage is 200 volts per wire. The figure below shows the
connections between the D96 and the Sub-D250. Refer to the N2262A
module wiring information (page 186) for details about the connector and
pin-out assignments.
2 1
5 4 3
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
280
CONNECTION
96-pin female DIN connector (on the DIN-to-D cable)
2 1
5 4 3
C
B
A
96-pin male DIN connector (on the plug-in module)
7
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
C
B
A
N2298A DIN96-TO-D25 CABLE
SUB-D
25-PIN
MALE
13
25
14
1
SUB-D
DIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
C1
C3
C5
C7
C10
C14
C18
C22
C25
C27
C29
C31
-C2
C4
C6
C8
C11
C15
C19
C23
C26
C28
C30
C32
Note: A “--” indicates the pin is not used.
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
Terminals and Connections Information
N2299A DIN96 to quad D25 Cable
The N2297A is a female DIN96 to four male D25 Cable. The cable uses
26 AWG wire (which meets UL AWM: 2464) with overall foil shield. The
maximum voltage is 200 volts per wire. The figure below shows the
connections between the D96 and the four D25s. Refer to the specific
plug-in module wiring information for details about the connector and
pin-out assignments.
4
N2299A DIN96-TO-QUAD-D25 CABLE
13
CONNECTOR 1
2 1
14
1
13
13
25
CONNECTOR 3
25
CONNECTOR 4
5 4 3
96-pin female DIN connector (on the DIN-to-D cable)
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
2 1
5 4 3
14
1
C
B
A
96-pin male DIN connector (on the plug-in module)
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
25
CONNECTOR 2
C
B
A
25
13
14
14
1
CONNECTOR 1
vs. 96-PIN DIN
CONNECTOR 2
vs. 96-PIN DIN
1
CONNECTOR 3
vs. 96-PIN DIN
CONNECTOR 4
vs. 96-PIN DIN
SUB-D
DIN
SUB-D
DIN
SUB-D
DIN
SUB-D
DIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A1
B1
C1
A3
B3
C3
A5
B5
C5
A7
B7
C7
-A2
B2
C2
A4
B4
C4
A6
B6
C6
A8
B8
C8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A9
B9
C9
A11
B11
C11
A13
B13
C13
A15
B15
C15
-A10
B10
C10
A12
B12
C12
A14
B14
C14
A16
B16
C16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A17
B17
C17
A19
B19
C19
A21
B21
C21
A23
B23
C23
-A18
B18
C18
A20
B20
C20
A22
B22
C22
A24
B24
C24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A25
B25
C25
A27
B27
C27
A29
B29
C29
A31
B31
C31
-A26
B26
C26
A28
B28
C28
A30
B30
C30
A32
B32
C32
7
Note: A “--” indicates the pin is not used.
281
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
Terminals and Connections Information
N2327A Crimp and Insert Terminal Block
This terminal is for the N2267A plug-in module only. Refer to the
N2267A module wiring information (page 208) for details about the
connector and pin-out assignments. The figures below illustrate how to
wire and assemble this terminal.
Stripped wire (14-18 AWG)
Socket
A. Prepare the Wire and the Socket.
B. Insert the Wire into the Socket.
C. Crimp the Wire with the Socket by
using an AMP Hand Crimping
Tool (90067-5) or equivalent tool.
In-Line Connector
To the N2267A module.
Insert wired Socket into the Connector
7
16
282
Pin Number
2 1
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
Terminals and Connections Information
N2320A Crimp and Insert Terminal Block
This terminal block is for the N2270A plug-in module only. Refer to the
N2270A module wiring information (page 213) for details about the
connector and pin-out assignments. The figures below illustrate how to
wire and assemble this terminal.
Stripped wire (14-18 AWG)
Socket
4
A. Prepare the Wire and the Socket.
B. Insert the Wire into the Socket.
C. Crimp the Wire with the Socket by
using an AMP Hand Crimping
Tool (90067-5) or equivalent tool.
Release the four screws and uncover the upper metal shield
Upper metal shield
7
Rear view
metal strain relief clamp
Front view
283
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
Terminals and Connections Information
Insert wired Socket into the Receptacle
Replace the metal shield and tighten relevant screws.
Plastic isolation tube
The strain relief clamp can be used to tighten wires with additional insulation around them.
Additional insulation should be used around the wires to prevent possible damage caused
by the strain relief clamp.
7
284
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
Terminals and Connections Information
4448X Screw Terminal Connector Blocks
Screw terminal connectors are available for the 44470A, 44471A,
44473A, 44474A, 44475A, and 44477A plug-in modules. One of these
terminals is shipped with each plug-in module. Refer to the specific plugin module wiring information for details about the connector and pin-out
assignments. The figures below shows the basic steps to wire and
assemble this type of terminal.
4
7
285
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
Terminals and Connections Information
7
286
Chapter 7 Plug-in Modules
Terminals and Connections Information
4448x Screw Terminal Blocks
Screw terminal blocks are available for the 44470D and 44471D plug-in
modules. One of these terminals is shipped with each plug-in module.
Refer to the specific plug-in module wiring information for details about
the terminal block. The figures below shows the basic steps to wire and
assemble this type of terminal.
2. Determine the wires & the wire exit
1. Remove c over
A. The wire gauge: 18-26 AWG;
A. Release sc rew on top of the cover;
B. Press tab forward and release.
4
B. Wires connected to P101 & P102
exit from EXIT# 1;
C. Wires connected to P103 & P104
exit from EXIT# 2.
J101
P104
P103
P102
P101
EXIT 2#
EXIT 1#
3. Attach wires
A. Insert wire into terminal c onnec tors;
B. Tighten screws on the connectors;
C. Tighten wraps to secure wires.
4. Replac e cover
A. Hook the top c over tabs onto the fixture;
B. Press down and tighten screw.
7
Tighten wraps to
sec ure wires
287
7
288
8
Application Programs
8
Application Programs
This chapter provides example programs in Visual C++, Visual BASIC
and BASIC to help you develop programs for your specific application.
Chapter contents include:
Note
•
Visual C++ Example Program, on page 291
•
Visual BASIC Example Program, on page 293
•
VB.net Example Program, on page 296
•
BASIC Example Program, on page 298
For the example programs provided in this chapter to run properly,
make sure that your system has been properly setup according to the
requirements of the individual example.
8
290
Chapter 8 Application Programs
Visual C++ Example Program
Visual C++ Example Program
This example program is written in Visual C++ 6.0 and has been tested
on a PC running WIN95/NT. The example uses the SCPI commands. As
the example is currently written, the program requirements are:
•
GPIB interface selected and set to the address of 09 from the frontpanel;
4
•
•
Any one of the relay modules installed in Slot 1 of the mainframe;
A GPIB interface card installed in your PC with the VISA library.
To program a 3499A/B/C using the RS-232 interface, you will need to
modify the code at the top of the program. Change the line 
# define USING_RS232 0 to # define USING_RS232 1. On the
3499A/B/C, select the RS-232 interface and set its parameters to: BAUD
RATE (9600), PARITY (NONE, 8 BITS), and FLOW (FLOW NONE). A
GPIB card in your PC is not necessary if you are using RS-232.
# include <stdio.h>
# include <windows.h>
# include "visa.h"
# define USING_RS232 0
#
#
#
#
#
// Change 0 to 1 if RS-232 interface
// is to be used.
if USING_RS232
define INST_ADDR"ASRL1::INSTR"// 3499A/B/C RS-232 address.
else
define INST_ADDR"GPIB0::9::INSTR"// 3499A/B/C GPIB address.
endif
void main()
{
ViSession drm;
ViSession vi;
ViStatus status;
char retStr[128];
//
//
//
//
Session to default resource manager.
Session to instrument.
VISA function status return code.
String returned from the instrument.
/* Open the default resource manager. */
status = viOpenDefaultRM( &drm );
if ( status < VI_SUCCESS ) {
printf( "VISA ERROR: viOpenDefaultRM()\n");
exit(1);
}
8
/* Open a session to the 3499A/B/C. */
status = viOpen( drm, INST_ADDR, VI_NULL, VI_NULL, &vi );
if ( status < VI_SUCCESS ) {
printf( "VISA ERROR: viOpen(). Address: %s\n",INST_ADDR);
viClose( drm );
exit(1);
}
291
Chapter 8 Application Programs
Visual C++ Example Program
# if USING_RS232
/* Set RS-232 parameters according to 3499A/B/C settings: 
BAUD RATE (9600), */
/* PARITY (NONE, 8 BITS), FLOW (FLOW NONE). */
viSetAttribute( vi, VI_ATTR_ASRL_BAUD, 9600 );
viSetAttribute( vi, VI_ATTR_ASRL_DATA_BITS, 8 );
viSetAttribute( vi, VI_ATTR_ASRL_FLOW_CNTRL, VI_ASRL_FLOW_NONE );
viSetAttribute( vi, VI_ATTR_ASRL_PARITY, VI_ASRL_PAR_NONE );
# endif
/* Set 3499A/B/C to SCPI mode. */
viPrintf( vi, "SYSMODE SCPI\n" );
Sleep(4000);// Wait 4 seconds.
/* Reset the instrument to a known state. */
viPrintf( vi, "*RST\n" );
Sleep( 4000 );
/* Close channels 100 through 103.
viPrintf( vi, "CLOSE (@ 100:103)\n" );
/* Open channels 100 through 103. */
viPrintf( vi, "OPEN (@ 100:103)\n" );
/* Scanning setup: executing the following commands to make
the instrument to scan sweep */
/* channels 100 through 103 two times. The channels are scanned
continuously and the second scan sweep starts 1 second after 
the start of the first scan sweep. */
viPrintf( vi, "SCAN (@ 100:103)\n" );// Create a scan list.
viPrintf( vi, "ARM:SOURCE TIMER\n" );// Set arm source to TIMER.
viPrintf( vi, "ARM:TIMER 1\n" );// Interval time between two scan 
// sweeps is 1 second.
viPrintf( vi, "ARM:COUNT 2\n" );// Set scan sweep 2 times.
viPrintf( vi, "TRIG:SOURCE IMM\n" );// Set trigger source to 
// IMM (default).
viPrintf( vi, "CHAN:DELAY 0, ( @100:103)\n");// Set channel delay
//time to 0 (default).
viPrintf( vi, "INIT\n");// Start the scan.
/* Set visa time-out value to 10 seconds. */
viSetAttribute( vi, VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE, 10000 );
/* *OPC command will wait until scan finishes. */
status = viQueryf( vi, "*OPC?\n","%t*", retStr );
printf("Scan End.\n");
viClose( vi );// Close session to 3499A/B/C.
viClose( drm );// Close session to the resource manager.
}
8
292
Chapter 8 Application Programs
Visual BASIC Example Program
Visual BASIC Example Program
This example program is written in Visual BASIC 6.0 and has been
tested on a PC running WIN95/NT. The example uses the SCPI commands. As the example is currently written, the program requirements
are:
•
GPIB interface selected and set to the address of 09 from the front- 4
panel;
•
•
Any one of the relay modules installed in Slot 1 of the mainframe;
A GPIB interface card installed in your PC with the VISA library.
To program a 3499A/B/C using the RS-232 interface, you will need to
modify the code at the top of the program. Change the line 
Const USING_RS232 =0 to Const USING_RS232 =1. 
On the 3499A/B/C, select the RS-232 interface and set its parameters to:
BAUD RATE (9600), PARITY (NONE, 8 BITS), and FLOW (FLOW
NONE). A GPIB card in your PC is not necessary if you are using 
RS-232.
Const USING_RS232 =0' Change 0 to 1 if RS-232 interface is to be used.
' Sleep( ) function declaration.
Declare Sub Sleep Lib "Kernel32" (ByVal s As Long)
Sub main()
Dim
Dim
Dim
Dim
Dim
drm As Long
'
vi As Long
'
status As Long
'
retStr As String * 128 '
str As String
'
Session to default resource manager.
Session to instrument.
VISA function status return code
String returned from the instrument.
String for individual channel number.
On Error GoTo ErrorHandler
' Open default resource manager.
drm = -1
status = viOpenDefaultRM(drm)
If (status < VI_SUCCESS) Then GoTo VisaErrorHandler
' Select an interface for 3499A/B/C.
' GPIB interface is used when USING_RS232 = 0,
' or RS-232 interface is used when USING_RS232 = 1.
If USING_RS232 Then
INST_ADDR = "ASRL1::INSTR"
Else
INST_ADDR = "GPIB0::9::INSTR"
Endif
8
' Open a session to 3499A/B/C.
status = viOpen(drm, INST_ADDR, 0, 0, vi)
If (status < VI_SUCCESS) Then GoTo VisaErrorHandler
293
Chapter 8 Application Programs
Visual BASIC Example Program
' Set RS-232 interface parameters when USING_RS232 equals 1.
If USING_RS232 Then
Call viSetAttribute(vi, VI_ATTR_ASRL_BAUD, 9600)
Call viSetAttribute(vi, VI_ATTR_ASRL_DATA_BITS, 8)
Call viSetAttribute(vi, VI_ATTR_ASRL_STOP_BITS,_
VI_ASRL_STOP_ONE)
Call viSetAttribute(vi, VI_ATTR_ASRL_FLOW_CNTRL,_
VI_ASRL_FLOW_NONE)
Call viSetAttribute(vi, VI_ATTR_ASRL_PARITY, VI_ASRL_PAR_NONE)
End If
' Set the 3499A/B/C to SCPI mode.
Call viVPrintf(vi, "SYSMODE SCPI" + Chr$(10), 0)
Call Sleep(4000)
' Wait 4 seconds
' Reset the instrument to a known state.
Call viVPrintf(vi, "*RST" + Chr$(10), 0)
Call Sleep(4000)
' Close channels 100 through 103.
Call viVPrintf(vi, "CLOSE ( @ 100:103)" + Chr$(10), 0)
' Open channels 100 through 103.
Call viVPrintf(vi, "OPEN ( @ 100:103)" + Chr$(10), 0)
'
'
'
'
Scanning setup: the following commands make the instrument scan
channels 100 through 103 two times. The channels are scanned
continuously and the second scan sweep starts 1 second after the
start of the first scan sweep.
' Create a scan list 100 through 103.
Call viVPrintf(vi, "SCAN (@100:103)" + Chr$(10), 0)
' Set arm source to TIMER.
Call viVPrintf(vi, "ARM:SOURCE TIMER" + Chr$(10), 0)
' Interval time between two scan sweeps is 1 second.
Call viVPrintf(vi, "ARM:TIMER 1" + Chr$(10), 0)
' Set scan sweep two times.
Call viVPrintf(vi, "ARM:COUNT 2" + Chr$(10), 0)
' Set trigger source to IMM (default).
Call viVPrintf(vi, "TRIG:SOURCE IMM" + Chr$(10), 0)
' Set trigger source to IMM (default).
Call viVPrintf(vi, "CHAN:DELAY 0, (@100:103)" + Chr$(10), 0
' Start scanning.
Call viVPrintf(vi, "INIT" + Chr$(10), 0)
' Set visa time-out value to 10 seconds
Call viSetAttribute(vi, VI_ATTR_TMO_VALUE, 10 * 1000)
' *OPC command will wait until scan finished.
Call viVQueryf(vi, "*OPC?" + Chr$(10), "%t*", retStr)
8






294
viClose (vi)' Close session to 3499A/B/C.
viClose (drm)' Close session to default resource manager.
End
Chapter 8 Application Programs
Visual BASIC Example Program
ErrorHandler:
' Display the error message.
MsgBox "*** Error : " + Error$, MB_ICON_EXCLAMATION
If drm <> -1 Then
viClose (drm)
End If
End
VisaErrorHandler:
Dim strVisaErr As String * 200
Call viStatusDesc(defrm, status, strVisaErr)
MsgBox "*** Error : " + strVisaErr
If drm <> -1 Then
viClose (drm)
End If
End
End Sub
4
8
295
Chapter 8 Application Programs
VB.net Example Program
VB.net Example Program
This example is written in VB.net. The example includes Open, Close,
Self-test, Digital I/O, and Scan commands for the 3499A/B/C using the
Agilent T&M Toolkit in VB.net (Visual Basic). As the example is currently written, the program requirements are:
•
GPIB interface selected and set to the address of 09 from the frontpanel;
•
•
•
A GPIB interface card installed in your PC with the VISA library;
An Agilent N2265A installed in Slot 1 of the mainframe;
The Agilent T&M Toolkit installed on your PC.
Imports Agilent.TMFramework
Imports Agilent.TMFramework.InstrumentIO
Public Class Form1
Inherits System.Windows.Forms.Form
#Region " Windows Form Designer generated code "
Private myDirectIO As DirectIO
Private Sub Form1_Load(ByVal sender As System.Object, _
ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles MyBase.Load
'Create DirectIO object.
myDirectIO = New DirectIO("GPIB0::9::INSTR", False, 2000)
myDirectIO.Timeout = 2000
End Sub
Private Sub Selftestbtn_Click(ByVal sender As System.Object, _
ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles Selftestbtn.Click
'Send *TST (Selftest) command to the 3499.
myDirectIO.WriteLine("*tst?")
Timing.Delay(10000000)
'Read results
Dim Results As String
Results = myDirectIO.Read()
Textbox1.Text = Results
8
End Sub
Private Sub Results_TextChanged(ByVal sender As System.Object, _
ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles Textbox1.TextChanged
End Sub
296
Chapter 8 Application Programs
VB.net Example Program
'This example closes/opens multiple switches within a 4x4 Matrix.
'The switches can be controlled within one command line or listed
'separtely.
Private Sub Closebtn_Click(ByVal sender As System.Object, _
ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles Closebtn.Click
myDirectIO.WriteLine("CLOS (@120,123)")
End Sub
Private Sub Openbtn_Click(ByVal sender As System.Object, _
ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles Openbtn.Click
myDirectIO.WriteLine("OPEn (@120)")
myDirectIO.WriteLine("OPEn (@123)")
End Sub
4
'Digital Input/Output - on power up or after Reset all Digital I/O
'ports in the 3499 will be input ports. Mode 1 is default mode.
Private Sub DigIObtn_Click(ByVal sender As System.Object, _
ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles DigIObtn.Click
myDirectIO.WriteLine("SENSE:DIGITAL:DATA:BYTE:VALue? 140")
'Read the Digital Input results 8 bits (1 byte), binary value is
'displayed.
Dim Digitalin As String
Digitalin = myDirectIO.Read()
TextBox2.Text = Digitalin
End Sub
'Create and execute a scan list
Private Sub Scanbtn_Click(ByVal sender As System.Object, _
ByVal e As System.EventArgs) Handles Scanbtn.Click
myDirectIO.WriteLine("SCAN (@200:209,220:225)")
myDirectIO.WriteLine("INIT")
myDirectIO.WriteLine("SCAN:LIST?")
Dim Scanresults As String
Scanresults = myDirectIO.Read()
Scanlst.Text = Scanresults
End Sub
End Class
8
297
Chapter 8 Application Programs
BASIC Example Program
BASIC Example Program
Sample programs in this section are written in BASIC 6.0 and have been
tested on a UNIX workstation.
Requirements:
Note
•
GPIB interface selected and set to the address of 09 from the frontpanel;
•
•
Any one of the relay modules installed in Slot 1 of the mainframe;
A GPIB interface card installed in your UNIX workstation.
Either GPIB or RS-232 interface can be used in SCPI mode. However, we
only provide and test the BASIC program examples over the GPIB
interface.
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
! EXAMPLE.BAS: TEST 3499A/B/C IN SCPI MODE
DIM Retstr$[128]! String returned from the instrument.
OUTPUT 709; "SYSMODE SCPI"! Set 3499A/B/C to SCPI mode.
WAIT 4! Wait 4 seconds.
OUTPUT 709; "*RST"! Reset 3499A/B/C.
WAIT 4! Wait 4 second.
OUTPUT 709; "CLOSE (@100:103)"! Close channels 100 through 103.
OUTPUT 709; "OPEN (@100:103)"! Open channels 100 through 103.
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
! LINES 150 TO 200 SET UP A TIMER CONTROLLED SCANNING.
! 3499A/B/C SCAN SWEEP CHANNELS 100 THROUGH 139 TWO TIMES.
! THE CHANNELS ARE SCANNED CONTINUOUSLY.
! THE SECOND SCAN SWEEP STARTS 1 SECOND AFTER THE START
! OF THE FIRST SCAN SWEEP.
OUTPUT 709; "SCAN (@100:103)"! Create a scan list.
OUTPUT 709; "ARM:SOUR TIMER"! Set arm source to timer.
OUTPUT 709; "ARM:TIMER 1"! Interval time between two scan sweeps
! is 1 second.
OUTPUT 709; "ARM:COUNT 2"! Set scan sweep 2 times.
OUTPUT 709; "TRIG:SOUR IMM"! Set trigger source to IMM (default).
OUTPUT 709; "CHAN:DELAY 0, (@100:103)"! Set channel delay time
!to 0 (default).
OUTPUT 709; "INIT"! Start scanning
OUTPUT 709; "*OPC?"! Wait until scan finishes.
ENTER 709; Retstr$
Done: END
180
190
200
8
210
220
230
240
298
9
Specifications
9
Specifications
Specification for the mainframe and all plug-in modules are given in this
chapter for easy reference. This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3499A/B/C Mainframe, on page 301
N2260A 40-Channel MUX Module, on page 303
N2261A 40-Channel GP Relay Module, on page 305
N2262A 4 x 8 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module, on page 307
N2263A 32-bit Digital I/O Module, on page 309
N2264A Multifunction Module, on page 310
N2265A Multifunction Module, on page 313
N2266A 40-Channel MUX Module, on page 315
N2267A 8-Channel High Current GP Module, on page 317
N2268A 50 3.0 GHz Dual 1-to-4 MUX Module, on page 319
N2270A 10-Channel High Voltage MUX Module, on page 321
N2272A 1 GHz RF 1-to-9 MUX Module, on page 323
N2276A Dual 1-to-6(4) Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module, on page 325
N2276B Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module, on page 325
N2280A Quadruple 1-to-2 Optical Switch Module, on page 326
N2281A Dual 1-to-4 Optical Switch Module, on page 327
N2282A 1-to-8 Optical Switch Module, on page 328
44470A 10-Channel MUX Module, on page 329
44470D 20-Channel MUX Module, on page 331
44471A 10-Channel GP Relay Module, on page 333
44471D 20-Channel GP Relay Module, on page 335
44472A Dual 4-Channel VHF Switch Module, on page 337
44473A 4 x 4 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module, on page 339
44474A 16-Bit Digital I/O Module, on page 341
44475A Breadboard Module, on page 342
44476A Microwave Switch Module, on page 344
44476B Microwave Switch Module, on page 344
44477A Form-C Relay Module, on page 345
44478A/B 1.3 GHz Dual 4-to-1 MUX Modules, on page 347
9
300
Chapter 9 Specifications
3499A/B/C Mainframe
3499A/B/C Mainframe
GENERAL
Power Supply:
For 3499A/B: ~100 to 127 Vac, 50Hz to 400 Hz
~200 to 240 Vac, 50Hz to 60 Hz
90 VA maximum;
For 3499C: ~100 to 240 Vac, 50Hz to 60 Hz; 140 VA maximum.
Operating Environment:
0 to 55oC (32 to 131oF); < 80% RH, 0 to 40oC (32 to 104oF).
Storage Environment:
-40 to +70oC (-40 to 158oF).
Net Weight:
3499A: 3.8 kg (8.4 lbs);
3499B: 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs);
3499C: 7.4 kg (16.4 lbs).
Dimensions:
3499A (H x W x L): 89mm x 426mm x 348mm (3.5” x 16.8” x 13.7”);
3499B (H x W x L): 89mm x 213mm x 348mm (3.5” x 8.4” x 13.7”);
3499C (H x W x L):221.5mm x 426mm x 353.5mm (8.7” x 16.8“ x 13.9”).
Operating Altitude
3000 meters (10,000 ft)
IEC 61010-1 Operating
Polution Degree
2
IEC61010-1 Installation
Category
II
4
SYSTEM
Capacity:
3499A: 5 slots;
3499B: 2 slots;
3499C: electrically 9 slots
(Slot 1~6 are 1-slot width, Slot 7 is 2-slot width, Slot 8~9 are 3-slot width).
Display:
Vacuum fluorescent, 13 characters can be displayed simultaneously.
Rear Panel Connectors:
GPIB (IEEE 488); RS-232;
8-pin Mini DIN connector 
(built-in 4-bit Digital I/O & built-in external trigger in/out).
For 3499A/B mainframe with Controller board 1.0 (Firmware REV 1.0/2.0/3.0):
Capable of storing 10 instrument setups and 10 errors in SCPI mode or 40
instrument setups and 1 error in 3488A mode.
Memory:
For 3499A/B/C mainframe with Controller board 2.0 (Firmware REV 4.0 or later):
Capable of storing 50 instrument setups and 10 errors in SCPI mode or 40
instrument setups and 1 error in 3488A mode.
9
301
Chapter 9 Specifications
3499A/B/C Mainframe
SYSTEM (continued)
Switch Setting Time:
Automatically selected by the mainframe for individual modules;
Additional time from 0 to 99999.999 seconds can be added in 1 ms steps.
Arm Source:
External trigger (from the rear panel Mini DIN connector);
IEEE-488 bus (GET, *TRG, or pressing Step from the front-panel);
Software (TRIGger:IMM);
Internal timer (programmable as 0 to 99999.999 seconds in 1 ms steps).
Trigger Source:
External trigger (from the rear panel Mini DIN connector);
IEEE-488 bus (GET, *TRG, or pressing Step from the front-panel);
Software (Trigger:IMM);
Internal timer (programmable as 0 to 99999.999 seconds in 1 ms steps).
External Trigger Input:
Level: TTL compatible;
Minimum trigger pulse width: 2 s;
Maximum external trigger delaya: 2 ms.
External Trigger Output:
Level: Normally pull up to 5 V;
Sink current: 10 mA @ Vo(Low) 0.4V; 80 mA @ Vo(Low) 0.8V;
Low going pulse width: 10 s typical.
Built-in 4-bit 
Digital I/O:
Input: TTL compatible;
Output: Vo(high) V @ Io1 mA; Vo(Low) V @ Io100 mA;
Maximum Vo = 42V, with external pull-up.
SYSTEM SPEEDb
Scan Speed:
350 chans/sec (N2266A)
Parser Timec:
Open (@100):
3 ms
Close (@100):
3 ms
Open (@100:139): 4 ms
Switching Speed:
Digital I/O Block Transfer
Rate:
Open/Close:
Open/Close:
Open/Close:
Channels
1
10
40
Time (ms)
7.1 (N2266A)
22.0 (N2266A, in the same group)
28.9 (N2266A)
20K bytes/sec (long word)
a. Maximum time from activation of external trigger pulse to start of switch open or close.
b. The system speed specification may vary in a small range due to the speed of the remote PC, the GPIB module, the
version of VISA and the version of 3499A/B/C’s firmware used.
c. Measured from the time at which the command terminator is taken from the bus to the time at which the relay begins
to open or close.
9
302
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2260A 40-Channel MUX Module
N2260A 40-Channel MUX Module
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Total Channels:
80 1-wire; or 40 2-wire; or dual 20 2-wire; or 20 4-wire
Maximum Voltage:
Terminal-Terminal or
Terminal-Chassis:
200 V, dc or ac rms
Per Channel:
1 A, dc or ac rms
Per Module:
2A, dc or ac rms
Per Channel:
60 W dc; 62.5 VA ac
Per Module:
120 W dc; 125 VA ac
4
Maximum Current:
Maximum Power:
Thermal Offset:
Initial Closed Channel
Resistance:
< 3 V differential or single-ended
<1
Relay Life:
Mechanical:
Electrical:
Maximum Scan Rate:
80 Chans/sec
108 (at 36000 operations/hour)
5 x 105 (1A load)
DC ISOLATION (with terminal block)
Open Channel,
Channel-Channel:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 
HI-LO:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 
Channel-Chassis:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 


9
303
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2260A 40-Channel MUX Module
AC ISOLATION / PERFORMANCEa (without terminal block)
Open Channel, ChannelChannel:
HI-LO:
Channel-Chassis:
< 7 pF (2-wire);
< 7 pF (dual 2-wire) 
Capacitance:
(with 1 channel closed)
< 75 pF (2-wire);
< 150 pF (2-wire);
< 45 pF (dual 2-wire)
< 90 pF (dual 2-wire)
Insertion Loss:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< 0.10 dB
< 0.20 dB
< 1.50 dB
Crosstalk:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< -70 dB (2-wire);
< -50 dB (2-wire);
< -30 dB (2-wire);
< -40 dB (1-wire)
< -25 dB (1-wire)
NA (1-wire)
a. With chassis of all instruments connected, and with the Lo Terminal of the input connected to the 
Lo Terminal of the output (either directly or via the 3499A/B/C switching channels).
9
304
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2261A 40-Channel GP Relay Module
N2261A 40-Channel GP Relay Module
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Total Channels:
40
Maximum Voltage:
Terminal-Terminal or
Terminal-Chassis:
200 V, dc or ac rms
Maximum Current:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
1 A, dc or ac rms
20 A, dc or ac rms
Maximum Power:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
60 W dc; 62.5 VA ac
1200 W dc; 1250 VA ac
Thermal Offset:
Per Channel:
< 3 V
Initial Closed
Channel Resistance:
4
< 0.5 
Relay Life:
Mechanical:
Electrical:
Maximum Scan Rate:
80 Chans/sec
108 (at 36000 operations/hour)
5 x 105 (1A load)
DC ISOLATION (with terminal block)
Open Channel,
Channel-Channel:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 
Channel-Chassis:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 

9
305
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2261A 40-Channel GP Relay Module
AC ISOLATION / PERFORMANCEa (without terminal block)
Capacitance:
(with 1 channel closed)
Open Channel, ChannelChannel:
Channel-Chassis:
< 10 pF
Insertion Loss:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< 0.10 dB
< 0.20 dB
< 0.50 dB
Crosstalk:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< -70 dB
< -50 dB
< -30 dB
< 20 pF
a. With chassis of all instruments connected, and with Low Terminal of the input connected to Low Terminal of the
output (either directly or via the 3499A/B/C switching channels).
9
306
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2262A 4 x 8 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module
N2262A 4 x 8 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Total Channels:
4x8
Maximum Voltage:
Terminal-Terminal or 
Terminal-Chassis:
200 V, dc or ac rms
Maximum Current:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
1 A, dc or ac rms
4 A, dc or ac rms
Maximum Power:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
60 W dc; 62.5 VA ac
240 W dc; 250 VA ac
Thermal Offset:
< 3 V differential
Initial Closed Channel
Resistance:
<1
Mechanical:
108 
(at 36000 operations/hour)
Electrical:
5 x 105 (1A load)
Relay Life:
Maximum Scan Rate:
4
80 Chans/sec
DC ISOLATION (with terminal block)
Open Channel, ChannelChannel:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 
HI-LO:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 
Channel-Chassis:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 


9
307
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2262A 4 x 8 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module
AC ISOLATION / PERFORMANCEa (without terminal block)
Capacitance:
(with 1 channel closed)
Open Channel, Channel-Channel:
HI-LO:
Channel-Chassis:
< 7 pF
< 30 pF
< 50 pF
Insertion Loss:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< 0.10 dB
< 0.20 dB
< 0.60 dB
Crosstalk:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< -73 dB
< -53 dB
< -28 dB
a. With chassis of all instruments connected, and with Low Terminal of the input connected to Low Terminal of the
output (either directly or via the 3499A/B/C switching channels).
9
308
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2263A 32-bit Digital I/O Module
N2263A 32-bit Digital I/O Module
I/O LINES
Bit Number:
32
Maximum Voltage:
Line-Chassis:
+ 42 V dc
Maximum Sink Current:
Per Bit:
600 mA
Output Characteristics:
Vout (high):
Vout (low):
2.4 V @ I  10 mA output
0.8 V @ I 600 mA input
Input Characteristics:
Vin (high):
Vin (low):
2.0 V
0.8 V
Maximum Voltage:
Line-Chassis:
+5 V dc
Output Characteristics:
Vout (high):
Vout (low):
Iout (low):
2.4 V @ I 400 A output
0.5 V @ I 1 mA input
< 25 mA (when shorted to +5 V)
Input Characteristics:
Vin (high):
Vin (low):
2.0 V
0.8 V
4
HANDSHAKE LINES
9
309
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2264A Multifunction Module
N2264A Multifunction Module
The maximum number of channels that can be closed simultaneously is
10 (including the GP and High-Current GP relays). The maximum
carrying current is 15 A (including the GP, High-Current GP and 
Digital I/O.
16-bit Digital I/O Function
I/O LINES
Bit Number:
16
Maximum Voltage:
Line-Chassis:
+ 42 V dc
Maximum Sink Current:
Per Bit:
600 mA
Output Characteristics:
Vout (high):
Vout (low):
2.4 V @ I  10 mA output
0.8 V @ I 600 mA input
Input Characteristics:
Vin (high):
Vin (low):
2.0 V
0.8 V
Maximum Voltage:
Line-Chassis:
+5 V dc
Output Characteristics:
Vout (high):
Vout (low):
Iout (low):
2.4 V @ I 400 A output
.5 V @ I 1 mA input
< 25 mA (when shorted to +5 V)
Input Characteristics:
Vin (high):
Vin (low):
2.0 V
0.8 V
HANDSHAKE LINES
9
310
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2264A Multifunction Module
12-Channel GP Relay Function
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Total Channels:
12
Maximum Voltage:
Terminal-Terminal or 
Terminal-Chassis:
200 V, dc or ac rms
Maximum Current:
Per Channel:
1 A, dc or ac rms
Maximum Power:
Per Channel:
60 W dc; 62.5 VA ac
Thermal Offset:
Per Channel:
< 3 V
Initial Closed Channel
Resistance:
4
< 0.5 
Relay Life:
Mechanical:
Electrical:
Maximum Scan Rate:
80 Chans/sec
108 (at 36000 operations/hour)
5 x 105 (1A load)
DC ISOLATION (with terminal block)
Open Channel, 
Channel-Channel:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 
Channel-Chassis:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 
AC ISOLATION / PERFORMANCEa (without terminal block)
Capacitance:
(with 1 channel closed)
Open Channel, Channel-Channel:
Channel-Chassis:
< 10 pF
< 20 pF
Insertion Loss:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< 0.10 dB
< 0.20 dB
< 0.50 dB
Crosstalk:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< -70 dB
< -50 dB
< -30 dB
a. With chassis of all instruments connected, and with Lo Terminal of the input connected to Lo Terminal of the
output (either directly or via the 3499A/B/C switching channels).
9
311
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2264A Multifunction Module
High-Current GP Relay Function
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Total Channels:
3
Maximum Voltage:
Terminal-Terminal or 
Terminal-Chassis:
125 V dc or 200 V ac rms
Maximum Current:
Per Channel:
5 A, dc or ac rms
Maximum Power:
Per Channel:
150 W dc; 1250 VA ac
Thermal Offset:
Per Channel:
< 3 V
Initial Closed Channel
Resistance:
< 0.1 
Relay Life:
Mechanical:
Electrical:
Time to Close One Channel:
16 mS
5 x 107 (at 180 cycles/minute)
105 (at rated load)
DC ISOLATION (with terminal block)
Open Channel, 
Channel-Channel:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 
Channel-Chassis:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 
AC ISOLATION / PERFORMANCEa (without terminal block)
Capacitance:
(with 1 channel closed)
Open Channel, Channel-Channel:
Channel-Chassis:
< 10 pF
< 20 pF
Insertion Loss:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< 0.10 dB
< 0.20 dB
< 0.50 dB
Crosstalk:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< -70 dB
< -50 dB
< -30 dB
a. With chassis of all instruments connected, and with Lo Terminal of the input connected to Lo Terminal of the
output (either directly or via the 3499A/B/C switching channels).
9
312
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2265A Multifunction Module
N2265A Multifunction Module
4 X 4 Matrix Function
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Total Channels:
4x4
Maximum Voltage:
Terminal-Terminal or 
Terminal-Chassis:
200 V, dc or ac rms
Maximum Current:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
1 A, dc or ac rms
4 A, dc or ac rms
Maximum Power:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
60 W dc; 62.5 VA ac
240 W dc; 250 VA ac
Thermal Offset:
< 3 V differential
Initial Closed Channel
Resistance:
4
<1
Relay Life:
Mechanical:
Electrical:
Maximum Scan Rate:
80 Chans./sec
108 (at 36000 operations/hour)
5 x 105 (1A load)
DC ISOLATION (with terminal block)
Open Channel, ChannelChannel:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 
HI-LO:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 
Channel-Chassis:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 
9
313
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2265A Multifunction Module
AC ISOLATION / PERFORMANCEa (without terminal block)
Capacitance:
(with 1 channel closed)
Open Channel, Channel-Channel:
HI-LO:
Channel-Chassis:
< 7 pF
< 25 pF
< 40 pF
Insertion Loss:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< 0.10 dB
< 0.20 dB
< 0.60 dB
Crosstalk:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< -76 dB
< -56 dB
< -33 dB
a. With chassis of all instruments connected, and with Lo Terminal of the input connected to Lo Terminal of the output
(either directly or via the 3499A/B/C switching channels).
16-bit Digital I/O Function
I/O LINES
Number of Bits:
16
Maximum Voltage:
Line-Chassis:
+ 42 V dc
Maximum Sink Current:
Per Bit:
600 mA
Output Characteristics:
Vout (high):
Vout (low):
2.4 V @ I  10 mA output
0.8 V @ I 600 mA input
Input Characteristics:
Vin (high):
Vin (low):
2.0 V
0.8 V
Maximum Voltage:
Line-Chassis:
+5 V dc
Output Characteristics:
Vout (high):
Vout (low):
Iout (low):
2.4 V @ I 400 A output
0.5 V @ I 1 mA input
< 25 mA (when shorted to +5 V)
Input Characteristics:
Vin (high):
Vin (low):
2.0 V
0.8 V
HANDSHAKE LINES
9
314
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2266A 40-Channel MUX Module
N2266A 40-Channel MUX Module
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Total Channels:
80 1-wire; or 40 2-wire; or dual 20 2-wire; or 20 4-wire
Maximum Switching
Voltage:
Terminal-Terminal or 
Terminal-Chassis:
200 V, dc or peak AC Resist.
Maximum Switching
Current:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
0.5 A, dc or peak AC Resist.
1 A, dc or peak AC Resist.
Maximum Switching
Power:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
10 W dc or peak AC Resist.
20 W dc or peak AC Resist.
Thermal Offset:
Per Channel:
50 V differential or single-ended
Initial Closed Channel
Resistance:
4
< 1
Relay Life:
@1V/1mA:
Maximum Scan Rate
350 Chans/sec
109
DC CHARACTERISTICS
Open Channel,
Channel-Channel:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 
HI-LO:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010
> 109 
Channel-Chassis:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH)”
> 1010
> 109
9
315
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2266A 40-Channel MUX Module
AC CHARACTERISTICSa
Bandwidth (-3dB):
40 MHz
Capacitance:
(with 1 channel closed)
(2-wire)
Open Channel, Channel-Channel:
Channel-Chassis:
HI-LO:
< 7 pF
< 140 pF
< 50 pF
Insertion Loss:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
40 MHz:
0.2 dB
0.3 dB
2.0 dB
3.0 dB
Crosstalk:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
-75 dB
-55 dB
-33 dB
a.
With chassis of all instruments connected, and with the Lo Terminal of the input connected to the Lo Terminal of the
output (either directly or via the 3499A/B/C switching channels).
Caution
In order to stay within the 20W power limit set for convection cooling, no
more than three (3) N2266A 40-Channel MUX Modules should be
installed in an Agilent 3499A mainframe; the remaining two slots must
remain empty. Other module combinations are acceptable; for example,
two N2266A MUX modules plus any combination of other Agilent
modules is permissible. This limitation does not apply to the 3499B or
3499C mainframes.
9
316
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2267A 8-Channel High Current GP Module
N2267A 8-Channel High Current GP Module
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Total Channels:
8
Maximum Switching
Voltage:
Terminal-Terminal or 
Terminal-Chassis:
250 VAC, 125 VDC
Maximum Switching
Current:
Per Channel:
0 - 30 Vdc at 5A
30 - 125 Vdc at 0.24A
0 - 250 Vac
Per Module:

5 A
0.24 A
8A
64 A
Maximum Switching
Power:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
2000 VA, 150 W
16000 VA, 1200 W
Thermal Offset:
Per Channel:
3 V
Initial Closed Channel
Resistance:
4
< 0.08
Relay Life:
Mechanical:
Electrical:
Maximum Scan Rate:
20 Chans/sec
5 x107 (at 180 cpm)
105
DC CHARACTERISTICS
Open Channel,
Channel-Channel:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 
Channel-Chassis:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 
9
317
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2267A 8-Channel High Current GP Module
AC CHARACTERISTICSa
Capacitance:
(with 1 channel closed)
Open Channel, Channel-Channel:
Channel-Chassis:
< 10 pF
< 10 pF
Insertion Loss:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
0.10 dB
0.20 dB
Crosstalk:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
-75 dB
-55 dB
Environmental Conditions
Operating Pollution
Degree:
2
Operating Altitude:
3000 meters (10,000 ft)
Measurement
Category:
I, 1500 Vpk transient, 500 V over voltage transient
Operating
Temperature:
0 - 55oC
Operating Humidity:
<80% RH (0oC to 40oC), non-condensing
a.
With chassis of all instruments connected, and with Lo Terminal of the input connected to Lo Terminal of the output
(either directly or via the 3499A/B/C switching channels)
9
318
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2268A 50 3.0 GHz Dual 1-to-4 MUX Module
N2268A 50 3.0 GHz Dual 1-to-4 MUX
Module
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Total Channels:
Dual 1-to-4 Chans
Maximum Switching Voltage:
Any center/shield to any other
center/shield/chassis:
30 V, dc or peak AC
Maximum Switching Current:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
0.5 A, dc or peak AC
1 A, dc or peak AC
Maximum Switching Power:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
10 W
20 W
Characteristic Impedance:
50 
Relay Life:
Mechanical:
10mA/24VDC resist. load:
10W 2.5G 50
5 x 106
3x105
105
Thermal Offset:
Per Channel:
3 V
Initial Closed Channel
Resistance:
Maximum Scan Rate:
4
<1 
20 Chans/sec
DC CHARACTERISTICS
Open Channel, 
Channel-Channel:
(with 1 Channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 
HI-LO:
(with 1 Channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010
> 109 
Channel-Chassis:
(with 1 Channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109
9
319
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2268A 50 3.0 GHz Dual 1-to-4 MUX Module
AC CHARACTERISTICSa
Bandwidth (-3dB):
50  source, 50  termination:
3.5 GHz
Insertion Loss:
(with 50 termination)
1 GHz:
2 GHz:
3 GHz:
0.9 dB
1.2 dB
1.4 dB
Crosstalk:
(with 50 termination)
DC-2 GHz:
2 GHz-3.0 GHz:
-64 dB
-50 dB
VSWR:
1 GHz:
2 GHz:
3.0 GHz:
1.20
1.35
1.35
Capacitance:
Center-Shield:
Center-Center:
20 pF
0.06 pF
Rise Time:
<150 ps
Signal Delay:
<1.5 ns
a.
With chassis of all instruments connected, and with Lo Terminal of the input connected to Lo Terminal of the output
(either directly or via the 3499A/B/C switching channels).
9
320
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2270A 10-Channel High Voltage MUX Module
N2270A 10-Channel High Voltage MUX
Module
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Total Channels:
10
Maximum Switching
Voltage:
Terminal-Terminal or 
Terminal-Chassis:
1000 V peak (per IEC1010 for
Pollution Degree I)
Maximum Switching
Current:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
1A
1A
Maximum Switching Power:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
10 W
10 W
Thermal Offset:
Per Channel:
200V
Initial Closed Channel
Resistance:
4
<1
Relay Life:
Signal load, 1V 10mA:
Maximum Scan Rate:
100 Chans/sec
108
DC CHARACTERISTICS
Open Channel, 
Channel-Channel:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 
Channel-Chassis:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 50% RH):
< (40oC, 80% RH):
> 1010 
> 109 
9
321
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2270A 10-Channel High Voltage MUX Module
AC CHARACTERISTICSa
Capacitance:
(with 1 channel closed)
Open Channel, Channel-Channel, 
Hi-Lo:
Channel-Chassis:
< 7 pF
Insertion Loss:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
0.1 dB
0.2 dB
Crosstalk :
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
-70 dB
-50 dB
< 50 pF
Environmental Conditions
Operating Pollution Degree:
2
3000 meters (10,000 ft)
Operating Altitude:
Measurement Category:
I, 1500 Vpk transient, 500 V over voltage transient
Operating Temperature:
0-55oC
Operating Humidity:
<80% RH (0oC-40oC), non-condensing
a.
With chassis of all instruments connected, and with Lo Terminal of the input connected to Lo Terminal of the output
(either directly or via the 3499A/B/C switching channels).
9
322
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2272A 1 GHz RF 1-to-9 MUX Module
N2272A 1 GHz RF 1-to-9 MUX Module
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Total Channels:
1-to-9
Relay Type:
Latching
Connector Type:
BNC
Maximum Switching Voltage:
24 VDC
Maximum Switching Current:
1A
Maximum Switching Power:
24 W
Characteristic Impedance:
50
Relay Life:
Mechanical:
Electrical@1A24VDC:
4
5X106
105
DC CHARACTERISTICS
Offset Voltage (mV):
8.0
Initial Closed Channel
Resistance ():
0.8
Insulation Resistance ():
@(25oC, 40%RH) 
(Open Ch, Ch-Ch):
(Ch-Chassis, Ch-Center):
@(40oC, 80%RH) 
(Open Ch, Ch-Ch):
(Ch-Chassis, Ch-Center):


1010

109
109
9
323
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2272A 1 GHz RF 1-to-9 MUX Module
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth (-3dB):
1GHz
Insertion Loss (dB):
@(25oC, 40%RH)
100 MHz:
300 MHz:
500 MHz:
800 MHz:
1 GHz:
0.5
0.8
1.0
1.8
2.5
Ch-Ch Cross Talk (dB):
@(25oC, 40%RH)
100 MHz:
300 MHz:
500 MHz:
800 MHz:
1 GHz:
-75
-65
-65
-55
-50
VSWR:
@(25oC, 40%RH)
100 MHz:
300 MHz:
500 MHz:
800 MHz:
1 GHz:
1.20
1.30
1.35
1.35
1.55
Capacitance (pF):
Center-Shield:
Center-Center:
60 pF
0.006 pF
Rise Time:
500 ps
Signal Delay:
2.5 ns
9
324
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2276A Dual 1-to-6(4) Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module
N2276A Dual 1-to-6(4) Microwave MUX/
Attenuator Module
Total Channels:
Dual 1-to-6 (Dual 1-to-4 when with option 204)
Connector Type:
SMA (female)
Frequency Range:
DC to 20 GHz
Insertion Loss:
0.3 dB + 0.015*Frequency (GHz)
Isolation:
100 dB min. DC to 12 GHz
80 dB min. 12 GHz to 15 GHz
70 dB min. 15 GHz to 20 GHz
SWR:
1.2 max DC to 4 GHz
1.35 max 4 to 12.4 GHz
1.45 max 12.4 to 18 GHz
1.7 max 18 to 20 GHz
Repeatability:
(5 million cycles at 25oC)
0.03 dB maximum
Switch Speed:
25ms
Switch Life:
5 million cycles
4
N2276B Microwave MUX/Attenuator Module
The switching and attenuation characteristics of the N2276B are
determined by the switches and attenuators installed in it. Please refer
to the switch’s and/or attenuator’s data sheet for the specifications of
your customized N2276B module.
9
325
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2280A Quadruple 1-to-2 Optical Switch Module
N2280A Quadruple 1-to-2 Optical Switch
Module
Typical
Maximum
Insertion Loss:
Single-mode (SM):a
0.5 dB
0.8 dB
Return Loss:
SM:b
50 dB
45 dB (min.)
Polarization Dependent Loss:b
SM:
0.02 dB
0.07 dB
Insertion Loss Stability:c
±0.03 dB
±0.05 dB
Repeatability:
±0.03dB
±0.005 dB
Crosstalk:
-70 dB
-60 dB
300 mW
Optical Input Power:
15 ms
Switching Time:
20 ms
Cycle Rate:
5 c/s
Relay Life:
10M cycles (min.)
Operating Temperature:
0 to 55oC
Storage Temperature;
-40 to 70oC
Humidity: (non-condensing)
< 80%RH
5 ±5%VDC/45mA
Power:
5 ±5%VDC/70mA
a. Excluding connectors. Include 0.2dB (typical insertion loss) for each connector.
b. Excluding connectors.
c. Drift of any channel relative to one assigned reference channel at + 3o C deviation of ambient temperature over a
seven-day period.
9
326
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2281A Dual 1-to-4 Optical Switch Module
N2281A Dual 1-to-4 Optical Switch Module
Typical
Maximum
Insertion Loss:
Single-mode (SM):a
0.5 dB
0.8 dB
Return Loss:
SM:b
50 dB
45 dB (min.)
SM:
0.02 dB
0.07 dB
Insertion Loss Stability:c
±0.03 dB
±0.05 dB
Repeatability:
±0.03 dB
±0.005 dB
Crosstalk:
-70 dB
-60 dB
Polarization Dependent Loss:
b
300 mW
Optical Input Power:
Switching Time:
20 ms
25 ms
Cycle Rate:
5 c/s
Relay Life:
10M cycles (min.)
Operating Temperature:
0 to 55oC
Storage Temperature:
-40 to 70oC
Humidity (non-condensing):
< 80%RH
Power:
4
5 ±5%VDC/45mA
5 ±5%VDC/70mA
a. Excluding connectors. Include 0.2dB (typical insertion loss) for each connector.
b. Excluding connectors.
c. Drift of any channel relative to one assigned reference channel at ±3o C deviation of ambient temperature over a
seven-day period.
9
327
Chapter 9 Specifications
N2282A 1-to-8 Optical Switch Module
N2282A 1-to-8 Optical Switch Module
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
Channel Count:
1-to-8
Switch Type:
Latching
Return Loss (SM):a
-62 dB
-57 dB
Insertion Loss (SM):b
0.5 dB
0.7 dB
Insertion Loss Stability:c
±0.02 dB
±0.025 dB
Polarization Dependent Loss
(PDL):
0.02 dB
0.04 dB
Insertion Repeatabilityd
Sequential Switching:
Random Switching:
±0.005 dB
±0.01 dB
±0.01 dB
±0.05 dB
Crosstalk:
-90 dB
-80 dB
Input Power (Optical):
300 mW
Continuous
Switching Time:
250 ms
Wavelength (SM):
1270 nm
Relay Life:
10M cycles
Operating Temperature:
0o C
Humidity (non-condensing):
a.
b.
c.
d.
1670 nm
55 oC
<80%RH 
(0o C~55o C)
Excluding connector.
Excluding Connectors, 0.2 dB typical connector insertion loss.
Measured after one hour’s warm-up.
Measured after temperature has been stablized for one hour.
9
328
Chapter 9 Specifications
44470A 10-Channel MUX Module
44470A 10-Channel MUX Module
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Total Channels:
10
Maximum Voltage:
Terminal-Terminal or 
Terminal-Chassis:
250 V, dc or ac rms
Maximum Current:
Per Channel or Module:
2 A, dc or ac rms
Maximum Power:
Per Channel or Module:
60 W dc; 500 VA ac
Maximum Overvoltage
Transients:
1400 Vpk
Thermal Offset:
Initial Closed Channel
Resistance:
4
< 3 V differential or single-ended
<1
Relay Life:
Dry Load of < 300 mA & < 10 V:
Maximum Rated Load:
Maximum Scan Rate:a
43 Chans/sec
108
105
DC ISOLATION
Open Channel, 
Channel-Channel:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 60% RH):
< (40oC, 95% RH):
> 1011 
>109 
HI-LO:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 60% RH):
< (40oC, 95% RH):
> 1010 
> 108 
Channel-Chassis:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 60% RH):
< (40oC, 95% RH):
> 1010 
> 5 x 108 
a. Using the 44474A external increment & channel closed, display off.
9
329
Chapter 9 Specifications
44470A 10-Channel MUX Module
AC ISOLATION / PERFORMANCEa
Capacitance:
(with 1 channel closed)
Open Channel, Channel-Channel:
HI-LO:
Channel-Chassis:
< 5 pF
< 27 pF
< 80 pF
Insertion Loss:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< 0.20 dB
< 0.25 dB
< 0.50 dB
Crosstalk:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< -73 dB
< -53 dB
< -33 dB
a. With chassis of all instruments connected, and with the Lo of input lines connected to the Lo of output lines (either
directly or via the 3499A/B/C switching channels).
9
330
Chapter 9 Specifications
44470D 20-Channel MUX Module
44470D 20-Channel MUX Module
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Total Channels:
20
Maximum Voltage:
Terminal-Terminal or 
Terminal-Chassis:
250 V, dc or ac rms
Maximum Current:
Per Channel or Module:
2 A, dc or ac rms
Maximum Power:
Per Channel or Module:
60 W dc; 125 VA ac
Maximum Overvoltage
Transients:
1400 Vpk
Thermal Offset:
Initial Closed Channel
Resistance:
4
< 3 V differential or single-ended
<1
Relay Life:
Dry Load of < 300 mA & < 10 V:
Maximum Rated Load:
Maximum Scan Rate:a
43 Chans/sec
108
105
DC ISOLATION
Open Channel, ChannelChannel:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 60% RH):
< (40oC, 95% RH):
> 1011 
> 5 x 109 
HI-LO:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 60% RH):
< (40oC, 95% RH):
> 5 x 1010 
> 109 
Channel-Chassis;
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 60% RH):
< (40oC, 95% RH):
> 5 x 1010 
> 109 
a. Using the 44474A external increment & channel closed, display off.
9
331
Chapter 9 Specifications
44470D 20-Channel MUX Module
AC ISOLATION / PERFORMANCEa
Capacitance:
(with 1 channel closed)
Open Channel, Channel-Channel:
HI-LO:
Channel-Chassis:
< 7 pF
< 27 pF
< 80 pF
Insertion Loss:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< 0.20 dB
< 0.25 dB
< 1.20 dB
Crosstalk:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< -73 dB
< -53 dB
< -31 dB
a. With chassis of all instruments connected, and with the Lo of input lines connected to the Lo of output lines (either
directly or via the 3499A/B/C switching channels).
9
332
Chapter 9 Specifications
44471A 10-Channel GP Relay Module
44471A 10-Channel GP Relay Module
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
10
Total Channels:
Maximum Voltage:
Terminal-Terminal or 
Terminal-Chassis:
250 V, dc or ac rms
Maximum Current:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
2 A, dc or ac rms
20 A, dc or ac rms
Maximum Power:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
60 W dc; 500 VA ac
600 W dc; 5000 VA ac
Maximum Overvoltage
Transients:
Thermal Offset:
Initial Closed Channel
Resistance:
4
1400 Vpk
< 3 V differential or single-ended
<1
Relay Life:
Dry Load of < 300 mA & < 10 V:
Maximum Rated Load:
Maximum Scan Rate:a
43 Chans/sec
108
105
DC ISOLATION
Open Channel, ChannelChannel:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 60% RH):
< (40oC, 95% RH):
> 1011 
> 109 
Channel-Chassis:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 60% RH):
< (40oC, 95% RH):
> 5 x 1011 
> 1010 
a. Using the 44474A external increment & channel closed, display off.
9
333
Chapter 9 Specifications
44471A 10-Channel GP Relay Module
AC ISOLATION / PERFORMANCEa
Capacitance:
(with 1 channel closed)
Open Channel:
Channel-Channel:
Channel-Chassis:
< 7 pF
< 10 pF
< 25 pF
Insertion Loss:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< 0.20 dB
< 0.25 dB
< 0.50 dB
Crosstalk:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< -73 dB
< -53 dB
< -33 dB
a. With chassis of all instruments connected, and with the Lo of input lines connected to the Lo of output lines (either
directly or via the 3499A/B/C switching channels).
9
334
Chapter 9 Specifications
44471D 20-Channel GP Relay Module
44471D 20-Channel GP Relay Module
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Total Channels:
20
Maximum Voltage:;
Terminal-Terminal or 
Terminal-Chassis:
250 V, dc or ac rms
Maximum Current:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
1 A, dc or ac rms
20 A, dc or ac rms
Maximum Power:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
60 W dc; 125 VA ac
1200 W dc; 2500 VA ac
Maximum Overvoltage
Transients:
Thermal Offset:
Initial Closed Channel
Resistance:
4
1400 Vpk
< 3V differential or single-ended
<1
Relay Life:
Dry Load of < 300 mA & < 10 V:
Maximum Rated Load:
Maximum Scan Rate:a
43 Chans/sec
108
105
DC ISOLATION
Open Channel, 
Channel-Channel:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 60% RH):
< (40oC, 95% RH):
> 1011 
> 109 
Channel-Chassis:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 60% RH):
< (40oC, 95% RH):
> 5 x 1011 
> 1010 
a. Using the 44474A external increment & channel closed, display off.
9
335
Chapter 9 Specifications
44471D 20-Channel GP Relay Module
AC ISOLATION / PERFORMANCEa
Capacitance:
(with 1 channel closed)
Open Channel:
Channel-Channel:
Channel-Chassis:
< 7 pF
< 10 pF
< 25 pF
Insertion Loss:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< 0.20 dB
< 0.25 dB
< 1 dB
Crosstalk:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< -71 dB
< -51 dB
< -31 dB
a. With chassis of all instruments connected, and with the Lo of input lines connected to the Lo of output lines (either
directly or via the 3499A/B/C switching channels).
9
336
Chapter 9 Specifications
44472A Dual 4-Channel VHF Switch Module
44472A Dual 4-Channel VHF Switch Module
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Total Channels:
Dual 4 Chans
Connector Type:
BNC
Center-Center or Center-Low:
Low-Chassis or Low-Low:
250 V dc, 30 V ac rms or 
42 V ac peak
42 V dc
Maximum Current:
Per Channel:
30 mA dc, 300 mA ac rms
Thermal Offset:
Per Channel:
< 15 V
Characteristic Impedance:
50 
Maximum Voltage:
Initial Closed Channel
Resistance:
4
<1
Relay Life:
Dry Load of < 300 mA & < 10 V:
Maximum Rated Load:
Maximum Scan Rate:a
43 Chans/sec
108
105
DC ISOLATION
Between Any Two Points:
< (40oC, 95% RH):
> 107 
a. Using Agilent 44474A external increment & channel closed, display off.

9
337
Chapter 9 Specifications
44472A Dual 4-Channel VHF Switch Module
AC ISOLATION / PERFORMANCEa
< 0.002 pF
Capacitance:
Center-Center, CenterCommon:
Center-Low:
Low-Chassis:
Rise Time:
< 0.7 ns
Signal Delay:
< 2.5 ns (channel match < 90 ps)
Insertion Loss:
(with 50 termination)
30 MHz:
100 MHz:
300 MHz:
< 0.50 dB
< 0.75 dB
< 1.25 dB
30 MHz:
100 MHz:
300 MHz:
< -100 dB
< -85 dB
< -65 dB
Crosstalk Group to Group:
(with 50 termination)
30 MHz:
100 MHz:
300 MHz:
< -85 dB
< -85 dB
< -50 dB
VSWR:
(with 50 termination)
30 MHz:
100 MHz:
300 MHz:
< 1.06
< 1.12
< 1.43
Crosstalk Within a Group:
(Channel-Channel or 
Channel-Common,
with 50 termination)
< 70 pF
< 0.20 F
a. When all channels in a group are opened, the last channel opened (or channel 00 or 13 following a group RESET)
has channel-common isolation of > 80 dB @ 30 MHz, > 60 dB @ 100 MHz, and > 40 dB @ 300 MHz.
9
338
Chapter 9 Specifications
44473A 4 x 4 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module
44473A 4 x 4 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Total Channels:
16
Maximum Voltage:
Terminal-Terminal or 
Terminal-Chassis:
250 V, dc or ac rms
Maximum Current:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
2 A, dc or ac rms
8 A, dc or ac rms
Maximum Power:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
60 W dc; 500 VA ac
240 W dc; 2000 VA ac
Maximum Overvoltage
Transients:
Thermal Offset:
Initial Closed Channel
Resistance:
4
1400 Vpk
< 3 V differential
<1
Relay Life:
Dry Load of < 300 mA & < 10 V:
Maximum Rated Load:
Maximum Scan Rate:a
43 Chans/sec
108
105
DC ISOLATION
Open Channel, Channel-Channel:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 60% RH):
< (40oC, 95% RH):
> 1011 
> 109 
HI-LO:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 60% RH):
< (40oC, 95% RH):
> 1010 
> 108 
Channel-Chassis:
(with 1 channel closed)
< (40oC, 60% RH):
< (40oC, 95% RH):
> 1010 
> 5x108 
a. Using the 44474A external increment & channel closed, display off.
9
339
Chapter 9 Specifications
44473A 4 x 4 2-Wire Matrix Switch Module
AC ISOLATION / PERFORMANCEa
Capacitance:
(with 1 channel closed)
Open Channel, Channel-Channel:
HI-LO:
Channel-Chassis:
< 5 pF
< 40 pF
< 70 pF
Insertion Loss:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< 0.30 dB
< 0.35 dB
< 0.90 dB
Crosstalk:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< -76 dB
< -56 dB
< -36 dB
a. With chassis of all instruments connected, and with the Lo of input lines connected to the Lo of output lines (either
directly or via the 3499A/B/C switching channels).
9
340
Chapter 9 Specifications
44474A 16-Bit Digital I/O Module
44474A 16-Bit Digital I/O Module
I/O LINES
Number of Bits:
16
Maximum Voltage:
Line-Chassis:
+30 V dc
Vout (high):
Vout (low):
I (low):
2.4 V @ I  8 mA output
0.4 V @ I 16 mA input
= 125 mA @ Vout (low) V
fused at 250 mA
Vin (high):
Vin (low):
2.0 V
0.8 V
Maximum Voltage:
Line-Chassis:
+5 V dc
Output Characteristics:
Vout (high):
Vout (low):
2.4 V @ I 400 A output
0.5 V @ I 2 mA input
Input Characteristics:
Vin (high):
Vin (low):
2.0 V
0.8 V
Minimum TTL Pulse Width:
0.25 s
Minimum TTL Pulse Width:
10 s
Output Characteristics:
Input Characteristics:
4
HANDSHAKE LINES
External Increment (EI):a
Channel Closed (CC):b
a. Both EI and CC lines are used for external controlled scanning. The 3499A/B/C will advance to the next channel in
the scan list on the falling edge of EI pulse.
b. When the next channel closes, the 44474A outputs a CC pulse to trigger the voltmeter.
9
341
Chapter 9 Specifications
44475A Breadboard Module
44475A Breadboard Module
Components required, but not supplied, are to be mounted on the
Breadboard. Refer to the manufacturers data sheet for load/drive
specifications of these components see page 251 for a list of required
components).
MODULE DIMENSIONS
Component Area Available:
104mm x 74mm and 79mm x 74mm
(4.1” x 2.9” and 3.1” x 2.9”)
Grid Hole Spacing (center-center):
2.54mm x 2.54 mm (0.1” x 0.1”)
Grid Hole Size (inside diameter):
1.17mm (0.046”)
Maximum Component Height (above board):
12.7mm (0.5”)
Maximum lead Length (below board):
3.2mm (0.125”)
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Maximum Voltage:
42 V dc, 30 V ac rms, 42 V ac peak 
(on breadboard area);
5.5 V (on digital input port lines)
Maximum Power Dissipation (Per Module):
2 Watts
9
342
Chapter 9 Specifications
44475A Breadboard Module
4
9
343
Chapter 9 Specifications
44476A Microwave Switch Module
44476A Microwave Switch Module
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency Range:
DC to 18 GHz
Characteristic Impedance:
50 
Input Power Rating:
1 Watt average, 100 Watts peak (Also less than ±7 V dc)
Average Switch Life:
106
Repeatability (typical):
0.03 dB after 106 switchings
Maximum Scan Rate:a
43 Chans/sec
Connector:
SMA
AC ISOLATION / PERFORMANCE
Isolation:
DC - 18 GHz:
> 90 dB
Insertion Loss:
DC - 2 GHz:
DC - 18 GHz:
< 0.25 dB
< 0.50 dB
SWR (3 mm SMA):
DC - 2 GHz:
DC - 12.4 GHz:
DC - 18.0 GHz:
< 1.15 dB
< 1.25 dB
< 1.40 dB
a. Using the 44474A External Increment & Channel Closed, display off.
44476B Microwave Switch Module
The switching and attenuation characteristics of the 44476B are
determined by the switches and attenuators installed in it. Please refer
to the switch’s and/or attenuator’s data sheet for the specifications of
your customized 44476B module.
9
344
Chapter 9 Specifications
44477A Form-C Relay Module
44477A Form-C Relay Module
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Total Channels:
7
Maximum Voltage:
Terminal-Terminal or 
Terminal-Chassis:
250 V dc or ac rms, 
350 V ac peak
Maximum Current:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
2 A, dc or ac rms
14 A, dc or ac rms
Maximum Power:
Per Channel:
Per Module:
60 W dc; 500 VA ac
420 W dc; 3500 VA ac
Maximum Overvoltage
Transients:
Thermal Offset:
Initial Closed Channel
Resistance:
4
1400 Vpk
< 3 V per channel
<1
Relay Life:
Dry Load of < 300 mA & < 10 V:
Maximum Rated Load:
Maximum Scan Rate:a
43 Chans/sec
108
105
DC ISOLATION
Open Channel, 
Channel-Channel:
(with 1 channel closed)
Channel-Chassis:
(with 1 channel closed)
 (40oC, 60% RH):
 (40oC, 95% RH):
> 1011 
>109 
 (40oC, 60% RH):
 (40oC, 95% RH):
> 5 x 1011 
> 1010 
a. Using the 44474A external increment & channel closed, display off.
9
345
Chapter 9 Specifications
44477A Form-C Relay Module
AC ISOLATION/PERFORMANCEa
Capacitance:
(with 1 channel closed)
Open Channel, Channel-Channel:
Channel-Chassis:
< 10 pF
< 25 pF
Insertion Loss:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< 0.20 dB
< 0.25 dB
< 0.50 dB
Crosstalk:
(with 50 termination)
100 kHz:
1 MHz:
10 MHz:
< -73 dB
< -53 dB
< -33 dB
a. With chassis of all instruments connected, and with the Lo of input lines connected to the Lo of output lines (either
directly or via the 3499A/B/C switching channels).
9
346
Chapter 9 Specifications
44478A/B 1.3 GHz Dual 4-to-1 MUX Modules
44478A/B 1.3 GHz Dual 4-to-1 MUX Modules
Specifications in the table describe the modules’ warranted performance
over the temperature range 0º to 55º C. Information marked by the
“Typical” designation is helpful in applying the modules, but is nonwarranted information.
4
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Total Channels:
Dual 4 Chans
Any Center/Shield to Any
Other Center/Shield/
Chassis:
42 V dc + ac peak
Maximum Voltage:
Maximum Current:
Per Channel or Common:
1 A dc, or ac rms
Maximum Power:
Per Channel or Common:
Each Resistive Termination:
24 W, 24 VA or 44 dBm
0.25 W, 0.25 VA or 24 dBm
Characteristic Impedance:
44478A:
44478B:
50 
75 
Relay Life (Typical):
With No Load:
At Maximum Rated Power:
5 x 106 operations
105 operations
Maximum Scan Rate:a
43 Chans/sec
DC PERFORMANCE
Thermal Offset:
Initial Closed Channel
Resistance:
Insulation Resistance
(any terminal to any terminal)
Per Channel:
< 6 V (< 2 V, Typical)
<1
 (40oC, 95% RH):
 (25oC, 40% RH):
> 108 
> 1010 (Typical)
a. Using the 44474A external increment & channel closed, display off.
9
347
Chapter 9 Specifications
44478A/B 1.3 GHz Dual 4-to-1 MUX Modules
.
AC ISOLATION / PERFORMANCE (ZL = ZS = 50 or 75)a
Insertion Loss
 40 C, 95% RH:
 10 MHz:
 100 MHz:
 500 MHz:
 1.3 GHz:
< 0.3 dB
< 0.7 dB
< 1.5 dB
< 3.0 dB
 25 C, 40% RH (Typical):
 10 MHz:
 100 MHz:
 500 MHz:
 1.3 GHz:
< 0.2 dB
< 0.5 dB
< 1.1 dB
< 1.9 dB
Channel-Channel, ChannelCommon:
(with 1 channel closed)
 10 MHz:
 100 MHz:
 500 MHz:
 1.3 GHz:
< -90 dB
< -80 dB
< -65 dB
< -55 dB
Group-Group, Module-Module:
 10 MHz:
 100 MHz:
 500 MHz:
 1.3 GHz:
< -90 dB
< -80 dB
< -70 dB
< -60 dB
VSWR:
 10 MHz:
 100 MHz:
 500 MHz:
 1.3 GHz:
< 1.20
< 1.25
< 1.35
< 1.55
Capacitance:
Center-Center:
Center-Shield:
< 0.006 pF
< 60 pF
Rise Time:
< 300 ps
Signal Delay:
< 3 ns (channel matched to ±50 ps)
o
o
Crosstalkb
a. ZL = ZS = 50  applies for the 44478A and ZL = ZS = 75  applies for the 44478B.
b. The CrossTalk specifications assume 50 termination for the 44478A and 75  termination for the 44478B. If all
channels unterminated, derate specification by 6 dB.
9
348
Index
If you have questions realated to the operation of the Agilent 3499A/B/C
or plug-in modules, call 1.800.453.4844 in the United States, or contact
your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales Office.
44470D module
channel numbering 72
connector pinout 235
description 63, 233
pinout 235
relay type 63
simplified schematic 233
wiring 234
44471A module
channel numbering 72
descriptioin 64
description 236
mounting attenuators 237
relay type 64
simplified schematic 236
specifications 333
wiring 238
44471D module
channel numbering 72
descriptiion 65
description 239
relay type 65
simplified schematic 239
specifications 335
wiring 240, 241
44472A module
BNC connector 243
channel numbering 72
description 63, 242
relay type 63
simplified schematic 243
specifications 337, 338
wiring 244
44473A module
channel numbering 73
description 66, 245
relay type 66
simplified schematic 246
specifications 339
wiring 247
44474A module
channel numbering 73
description 67, 248
simplified schematic 249
specifications 341
wiring 250
44475A module
channel numbering 73
description 65, 251
hardware assembly 254
simplified schematic 253
specifications 342
wiring 254
44476A module
channel numbering 73
description 65, 257
relay type 65
specifications 344
44476B module
channel numbering 73
description 65, 260
mounting microwave
switches 264
specifications 344
44477A module
channel numbering 73
description 65, 265
relay type 65
simplified schematic 265
specifications 345
44478A module
cabling considerations 271
channel numbering 73
description 63, 267
relay type 63
simplified schematic 269
SMB connector 270
specifications 347
wiring 270

349
Index
*CLS 108, 149, 166
*ESE 151
*ESE? 151
*ESR? 151
*IDN? 59, 153
*OPC 156
*OPC? 156
*RCL 107, 147
*RST 74, 156
*SAV 107, 147
*SRE 152
*SRE? 152
*STB? 152
*TRG 138
*TST? 157
*TST? command 109
1-wire mode 82, 178
2-wire mode 178
3488 Mode Defaults 75
3488A mode selection 112
3499A
Features 2
rack mount 23
rear panel 6
3499B
Features 2
rack mount 24
rear panel 6
3499C
Features 2
rack mount 26
rear panel 7
44470A module
channel numbering 72
description 230
descriptoin 63
mounting attenuators 231
relay type 63
simplified schematic 230
specifications 329
wiring 232
44478B module
cabling considerations 271
channel numbering 73
description 63
relay type 63
SMB connector 270
4448x Screw Terminal Blocks 287
4448X Screw Terminal
Connector Blocks 285
4-wire mode 178
Index
A
ABORt 92, 138
aborting scan 92
address, GPIB (IEEE 488) 47
Addressing
channels 19
Agilent
contacting 8
phone 8
Agilent BASIC 298
Annunciators 5
application program
VB.net 296
Visual BASIC 293
Visual C++ 291
application programs
Agilent BASIC 298
Visual BASIC 293
ARM
COUNt 134
COUNt? 134
SOURce 134
SOURce? 134
TIMer 135
TIMer? 135
arm count selection 91
arm layer 87
arm source description 302
BUS 87
EXT 87
HOLD 87
IMM 87
MIX 87
TIMER 87
arm source selection 91
350
B
Basic Operation 19
built-in digital I/O
channel numbering 72
read from 31, 104
specifications 302
write 105
write to 32
built-in external trigger
configuration 42, 93
specifications 302
BYTE 104
C
card pair 41
CC/EI 93
channel
addressing 19
close 21, 82
monitoring 80
open 21, 82
open all 22
channel list
rules 79, 115
channel number 19
clear scan list 89
close/open relay channel 21, 82
command reference
alphabetical 116
functional 122
command separator 161
command syntax
SCPI command
format 161
Common Commands 161
CONFigure
EXTernal
TRIGger
OUTPut 137
SOURce 137
SOURce? 137
configure MUX module 83
connecting
with screw terminal block
275

Connector
GPIB 6, 7
mini DIN 7
RS-232 6, 7
Contact Agilent 8
convention
front panel operation 28, 78
SCPI command 79, 115
cycle counts of relay 111
D
data display format 96
default states 74
delay time setting 91
DIAGnostic
DISPlay
INFOrmation 158
STATe 158
STATe? 158
MONitor 159
MONitor? 159
RELay
CYCLes
CLEar 155
MAX? 155
CYCLes? 111, 155
SPOKE 131
Digital I/O
configuration 95
default setting 104, 105
general rules 95
operation described 95
read from port 104
read port 31
write port 32
write to port 105
Digital I/O configuration
control line polarity 96
data display format 96
data line polarity 96
default settings 95
flag line polarity 96
flow control mode 33
front panel 33
I/O line polarity 96

Digital I/O input/output
general rules 139
write to port 32
Digital I/O modules
general information 67
DIN Connector 7
Display 5
display message 110
DTR/DSR 48
dual 2-wire mode 178
E
H
factory default 74
Features 2
FIFO 108
Filler Panels 7, 26
firmware
revision 52
revision 4.0 44
revision differences 106
flow control mode description
(DIO modules)
full handshake mode #5
102
read and write strobe mode
#4 101
read or write and strobe
mode #3 100
static mode #1 99
static mode #2 99
flow control mode description
(RS-232)
DTR/DSR 48
None 48
RTS/CTS 48
XON/XOFF 48
FP1 7, 26
FP2 7, 26
Front Panel 4
front-panel display
general description 5
on/off 110
text message 110
Front-Panel Operation 28
function mode (N2260A module)
1-wire mode 178
2-wire mode 178
4-wire mode 178
dual 2-wire mode 178
handshake mode description
(DIO modules)
default 99
full handshake mode #5
102
read and write strobe mode
#4 101
read or write and strobe
Mode #3 100
static mode #1 99
static mode #2 99
handshake mode description
(RS-232)
DTR/DSR 48
None 48
RTS/CTS 48
XON/XOFF 48
high-current relays (N2264A
module) 192
high-speed switching 84
G
GP modules
general information 64
GPIB (IEEE 488)
address selection 47
connector 6, 7
interface configuration 46
4
I
idle state 86
IEEE 488.2 commands 161
INITiate 92, 138
Inoperative instrument 16
instrument
firmware revision 52
idle state 87
local/remote state 54
mounting onto rack 23
power on 29
power on failure 16
power on process 15
power-on state setting 44
recall state 107
serial number 53
state storage 106
store state 107
system mode selection 112
unpacking & inspection 15
viewing errors 36
instrument errors 170
Insulation Displacement
Connector 278
351
Index
EI/CC 93
enable/disable EI/CC 42
enable/disable trigger out pulse
42, 94
error messages 166
errors
execution 167
instrument 170
errors viewing/clearing 36, 108
errors, self-test 172
example program
VB.net 296
Visual BASIC 293
Visual C++ 291
example programs
Agilent BASIC 298
Visual BASIC 293
execution errors 167
external trigger 93
general rules 93
configuration 94
external trigger (3488A mode)
built-in TRIG IN/TRIG
OUT
specifications 302
configuration 42
EI/CC specifications 341
external trigger (SCPI mode)
built-in TRIG IN/TRIG
OUT
specifications 302
configuration 42
EI/CC specifications 341
F
interface, GPIB (IEEE 488)
address selection 47
interface, RS-232
baud rate 48, 49
data bits 48, 50
default setting 48
flow control 48, 50
parity 48, 50
setting 48
L
linking commands 163
local 54
LWORD 104
Index
M
mainframes
general description 58
Matrix modules
general information 66
Menu key operation
card pair 41
configure external trigger
42
configure power-on state 44
configure remote interface
46
firmware revision query 52
perform self-test 51
serial number query 53
system mode 112
Mini DIN 6, 7
Mode #1 99
Mode #2 99
Mode #3 100
Mode #4 101
Mode #5 102
Mode key operation
configure DIO module 33
configure DIO port 34
modules
classification 61
installation 18
installation procedure 17
pairing 41
removal 17
screw terminal blocks 275
wiring information 275
352
modules information
44470A module 230
44470D module 233
44471A module 236
44471D module 239
44472A module 242
44473A module 245
44474A module 248
44475A module 251
44476A/B module 257
44476B module 260
44477A module 265
44478A/B module 267
N2260A module 176
N2261A module 182
N2262A module 185
N2263A module 188
N2264A module 192
N2265A module 196
N2266A module 200
N2267A module 206
N2268A module 210
N2270A module 212
N2272A module 214
N2276A/B module 217, 221
N2280A module 225
N2281A module 226
N2282A module 228
monitoring channel/slot 29, 80
mount
3499A 23
3499B 24
3499C 26
mount mainframe onto rack 23
Multifunction modules
general information 68
MUX modules
configuration 83
general information 61





N
N2260A module
channel numbering 70
configure function mode 83
default setting 83, 95
description 176
descripton 62
exception 83
relay type 62
simplified schematic 177
specifications 303
N2261A module
channel numbering 70
description 64, 182
relay type 64
simplified schematic 182
specifications 305
N2262A module
channel numbering 70
description 66, 185
relay type 66
simplified schematic 185
specifications 307
N2263A module
channel numbering 71
description 67, 188
simplified schematic 189
specifications 309
N2264A module
Caution 194
channel numbering 71
description 68, 192
relay type 68
simplified schematic 193
specifications 310
N2265A module
channel numbering 71
description 68, 196
relay type 68
simplified schematic 196
specifications 313




N2276A/B module
channel numbering 72
description 63
relay type 63
simplified schematic 218
wiring 224
N2276B module
channel numbering 72
configuration 223
description 221
specifications 325
N2280A module
channel numbering 72
description 69, 225
relay type 69
simplified schematic 225
specifications 326
wiring 225
N2281A module
channel numbering 72
description 69, 226
relay type 69
simplified schematic 226
specifications 327
wiring information 227
N2282A module
channel numbering 72
description 69, 228
relay type 69
simplified schematic 228
Specifications 328
wiring 229
N2296A Insulation
Displacement Connector 278
N2297A DIN96 to twin D50
Cable 279
N2298A DIN96-to-D25 cable
280
N2299A DIN96-to-D25 cable
281
N2320A Crimp and Insert
Terminal Block 283
non-latching relay (N2264A
module) 192

O
open/close relay channel 82
Optical modules
general information 69
P
pair modules 41
parallel operation 58
parallel switching 84
plug-in modules
classification 61
overview 61
pairing 41
removal 17
screw terminal blocks 275
wiring information 275
plug-in modules information
44470A module 230
44470D module 233
44471A module 236
44471D module 239
44472A module 242
44473A module 245
44474A module 248
44475A module 251
44476A/B module 257
44476B module 260
44477A module 265
44478A/B module 267
N2260A module 176
N2261A module 182
N2262A module 185
N2263A module 188
N2264A module 192
N2265A module 196
N2266A module 200
N2267A module 206
N2268A module 210
N2270A module 212
N2272A module 214
N2276A/B module 217, 221
N2280A module 225
N2281A module 226
N2282A module 228
power on instrument 15, 29
power-on state setting 44
protection networks 272
4
353
Index
N2266A module
channel numbering 71
configuration 202
description 62, 200
pinout 205
relay type 62
simplified schematic 201
wiring 204
N2267A module
channel numbering 71
description 64, 206
pinout 209
protection network 207
relay type 64
simplified schematic 208
specifications 317
temperature control 206
wiring 208
N2268A module
channel numbering 71
description 62, 210
relay type 62
simplified schematic 210
specifications 319
N2270A module
channel numbering 72
description 62, 212
relay type 62
simplified schematic 212
specifications 321
wiring 213
N2272A module
channel numbering 72
connecting multiple 216
description 63, 214
relay type 63
simplified schematic 215
Specifications 323
wiring 215
N2276A module
channel numbering 72
configuration 219
description 217
simplified schematic 218
specifications 325
wiring 220
Index
R
R/W and Strobe Mode #3 100
Rack Mount 23
Read and Write Strobe Mode #4
101
read from port 104
read or write and strobe mode
#3 100
read relay cycles 111
Rear Panel 6
rear panel connectors 301
recall instrument state 107
by including into scan list
89
by setting power-on to 44
relay cycle count 111
relay protection 272
remote interface configuration
46
remote interface, GPIB (IEEE
488)
address selection 47
remote interface, RS-232
baud rate 48, 49
data bits 48, 50
default setting 48
flow control 48, 50
parity 48, 50
remove module from mainframe
17
reset 22
states 74
ROUTe
CHANnel
DELay 136
DELay? 136
CLOSe 127
STATe? 128
CLOSe? 127
CPAir 129
CPAir? 129
DIAGnostic
SPEEK? 131
FUNCtion 130
FUNCtion? 130
OPEN 128
354
ROUTe
OPEN? 128
SCAN
LIST 132
LIST? 132
SIZE 132
SCAN CLEar 132
RS-232 Interface
baud rate 48, 49
connector 6
data bits 48, 50
default setting 48
described 48
flow control 48, 50
parity 48, 50
selecting interface 49
RTS/CTS 48
S
scan
list 38
list clear 39
viewing list 40
scan list
rules 79, 115
viewing 40
scanning
arm Layer 87
arm source selection 91
clearing scan list 89
creating scan list 89
external mode 93
from front-panel 38
general rules 85
idle state 87
initiating and stopping 92
process description 86
scan procedure description
86
starting 92
trigger layer 88
scanning (3488A mode)
default settings 75
scanning (SCPI mode)
arm count selection 91
default settings 75, 90
delay time setting 91
SCPI command
abbreviated 162
alphabetical reference 116
application programs 291,
293, 296, 298
channel list 115
functional reference 122
implied commands 162
linking commands 163
parameters 163
scan list 115
syntax 79, 115, 161
SCPI Mode Defaults 76
SCPI mode selection 112
screw terminal blocks summary
275
self-test 15, 51, 109
SENSe
DIGital
DATA 142
BIT? 142
BLOCK? 143
TRACe 146
TRACE
DATA? 146
serial number 53
slot
monitoring 80
slot numbers 19
SOURce
DIGital
CONTrol
POLarity 141
POLarity? 141
DATA 144
BIT 143
BLOCK 144
POLarity 141
TRACe 146
FLAG
POLarity 141
POLarity? 141
IO
POLarity 141
POLarity? 141
MODE 140
MODE? 140
SOURce
DIGital
TRACe
DATA 146
DEFine 145
CATalog? 145
DEFine? 145
DELete 145
ALL 145
trigger layer 88
trigger source description 302
BUS 88
EXT 88
HOLD 88
IMM 88
MIX 88
TIMER 88
turn on instrument 29
turn on/off display 110
4
V
Varistors 274
VB.net 296
VHF MUX module 242
view errors 36, 108
View key operation
view error 36
view scan list 40
view relay cycles 111
view scan list 40
Visual BASIC 293
Visual C++ 291
W
wiring
with screw terminal block
275
WORD 104
write to port 32, 105
X
XON/XOFF 48
T
Telephone 8
terminal block
4448X 285, 287
N229X 277
N2320A 283
TRIGger
IMMediate 138
SOURce 135
SOURce? 135
TIMer 136
TIMer? 136

355
Index
specifications
3499A/B/C 301
44470A 329
44470A 329
44471A 333
44471A 333
44471D 335
44472A 337
44472A 338
44473A 339
44473A 339
44474A 341
44475A 342
44476A 344
44476B 344
44477A 345
44477A 345
44478A 347
mainframe 301
N2260A 303
N2261A 305
N2262A 307
N2263A 309
N2264A 310
N2265A 313
N2267A 317
N2268A 319
N2270A 321
N2272A 323
N2276A 325
N2276B 325
N2280A 326
N2281A 327
N2282A 328
State Storage 60
and firmware revision 106

Static Mode #1 99
Static Mode #2 99
STATus
OPERation
CONDition? 150
ENABle 150
ENABle? 150
EVENt? 150
PRESet 150
store instrument state 106
Switch/Control System
features 2
mainframes description 58
plug-in modules overview
61
switching relay channel 82
SYSMODE 159
SYSMODE? 159
SYSTem
CPON 157
CTYPE? 153
ERRor? 108, 153
LOCal 160
REMote 160
RWLoc 160
STATe
DELete 147
VERSion? 153
system mode
3488A mode selection 112
general description 58
SCPI mode selection 112
356
Index
Declaration of Conformity
Declarations of Conformity for this product and for other Agilent products may be
downloaded from the Internet. There are two methods to obtain the Declaration of
Conformity:
• Go to http://regulations.corporate.agilent.com/DoC/search.htm. You can then
search by product number to find the latest Declaration of Conformity.
• Alternately, you can go to the product web page (www.agilent.com/find/3499A),
click on the Document Library tab then scroll down until you find the Declaration of Conformity link.
Agilent Technologies, Inc.
Printed in Malaysia
Revision F
October 2012 E1012
*03499-90017*
User’s Manual
03499-90017
">